Save the Internet – the pressure is working!


The vote could happen at any time now,  but free speech champions in Congress say our outcry will help, and one of them – Senator Wyden –  is even going to block the vote by reading out our petition names for hours! Let’s reach 1 million!

Posted: 15 November 2011
Right now, the US Congress is debating a law that would give them the power to censor the world’s Internet — creating a blacklist that could target YouTube, WikiLeaks and even groups like Avaaz!

Under the new law, the US could force Internet providers to block any website on suspicion of violating copyright or trademark legislation, or even failing to sufficiently police their users’ activities. And, because so much of the Internet’s hosts and hardware are located in the US, their blacklist would clamp down on the free web for all of us.

The vote could happen any day now, but we can help stop this — champions in Congress want to preserve free speech and tell us that an international outcry would strengthen their hand. Let’s urgently raise our voices from every corner of the world and build an unprecedented global petition calling on US decision makers to reject the bill and stop Internet censorship. Sign now and then forward as widely as possible — our message will be delivered directly to key members of the US Congress ahead of the crucial vote.




The Great Global Crisis of Maturity and the New World Order


 The Great Global Crisis of Maturity and the New World Order


 [As Newt Gingrich recently appears to be a frontrunner in the US 2012 Presidential election, his “Transhumanist” agenda MUST be exposed! See Aaron Frantz’s documentary The Age of Transitions!]

Feb. 23, 2009

By Daniel Taylor, Old-Thinker News

“Although technological powers will be vast and progress will likely be made, the normal level of social resistance and political stalemate is likely to oppose change. Thus, it may take an occasional environmental collapse, global wars and terrorism, or yet unknown calamities to force the move to global consciousness.” — William E. Halal, Emerging Technologies and the Global Crisis of Maturity

“By 2035, an implantable information chip could be developed and wired directly to the user’s brain.”

The technological revolution that will re-shape humanity and our world is well underway. A cacophony of crises, both real and manufactured, are being heralded as birth pangs of a new global order. Some analysts say that we can no more fathom the political, technological, and social world that will emerge as “ . . . chimpanzees in the forest can comprehend what goes on among humans in a nearby village.” [1]

We witness piecemeal examples of the steady buildup to this catalyst every day in the media. However, they fail to connect them in a coherent picture to demonstrate their interwoven nature. The “big picture” gets lost to many. We leave it to the “experts” to interpret these events and developments, but they often present solutions that come directly from the establishment.

To begin, let’s take a look at the technological revolution. Nanotechnology, biotechnology, information science and cognitive science (NBIC) are converging to form what has been called the largest leap in technological progress in human history. The Transhumanist movement is eagerly anticipating this revolution. Some foresee the fusion of the human brain with computer circuitry as leading “ . . . to a truly revolutionary upheaval for the human race.” [2] Brain-machine interfaces; cloning; genetic engineering of food, plants, and animals; artificial intelligence; nanomaterials; these all stem from the NBIC convergence.

Some countries are currently serving as testing grounds for technologies that are expected to be implemented globally in the near future. For example, South Korea’s “U-city” or “ubiquitous city” called New Songdo – hailed as the city of the future – is nearly fully functional. The city is wired from the ground up with RFID sensors and other advanced computing devices to automate traffic, surveillance and e-government. The marketing campaign for the city is heavily focused on consumer convenience aspects of the technology, reminiscent of the sci-fi thriller Minority Report. The U-city model, being tested in New Songdo, is anticipated to be exported world-wide. There is a reason this technology is being tested in South Korea. As the New York Times reports,

“Much of this technology was developed in U.S. research labs, but there are fewer social and regulatory obstacles to implementing them in Korea,” said Mr. Townsend [a research director at the Institute for the Future in Palo Alto, California], who consulted on Seoul’s own U-city plan, known as Digital Media City. “There is an historical expectation of less privacy. Korea is willing to put off the hard questions to take the early lead and set standards.” [3]

Some believe that ubiquitous computing technology, also known as the “Internet of Things”, is heralding the beginning of a “unified global intelligence.” This global intelligence will consist of a vast network of places, things and people that have been given a virtual representation in a computer network. William E. Halal, professor emeritus of science, technology and innovation at George Washington University writes,

“Even with the turmoil that is sure to follow, this will mark the serious beginning of a unified global intelligence, what some have forecast as the emergence of a “global brain” – a fine web of conscious thought directing life on the planet.” [4]

Brain-machine interfaces

The current and ongoing technological revolution has – as shown with the above example – a whole array of implications attached to it. Advancements in brain-machine interfaces provide one of the most startling examples. Fred C. Ikle, former undersecretary of defense for policy under the Reagan administration, and author of The Ultimate Threat to Nations: Annihilation from Within, is anticipating the development of advanced brain-machine interfaces. It is this development that Ikle sees as the most revolutionary. He writes,

“In my judgment, the greatest, most profound transformation of the human condition will not derive from the prolongation of life, or from the anxiously debated – and probably vastly overrated – possibilities of human cloning and “designer babies.” Instead, I see an effective synthesis of the computer with living human brains as the agent that will lead to a truly revolutionary upheaval for the human race.”[5]

These interfaces, Ikle writes, could spark a race between superpowers to create a super-advanced think tank. This brain-computer symbiosis would come from a group of individuals connected to a central computer.

“Its purpose would be greatly to enrich and expand what advanced computers can do by creating a symbiosis between, on one side, a computer system designed for this purpose, and on the other side, the judgmental capacities and essential emotive functions of the human brain. The contribution of the living human brain would probably not come from one individual “hooked up” to a computer, but from computer linkages to an expert committee or group of policy advisors. Such a symbiosis would be far more advanced than the latest brain-computer links.”[6]


Brain-machine interfaces lead us inevitably to the Transhumanist movement, which sees technologies like this as heralding a new era of human enhancement. Most researchers anticipate these technologies to be developed at first to serve a medical purpose – such as restoring sight, allowing paralyzed individuals to move robotic arms using their minds, etc. The initial focus on providing aid to disabled individuals is giving technologies like brain-machine interfaces public acceptance and support because of its benevolent nature. Eventually, however, these technologies will be used for enhancement purposes and not out of any specific medical necessity.

The June 2002 conference Converging Technologies for Improving Human Performance, organized by the National Science Foundation and the Department of Commerce, discussed this NBIC (Nanotechnology, Biotechnology, Information science and Cognitive science) revolution. The lengthy report demonstrates the intense attention that is being given to these rising technologies. The report calls for the training of a new generation of scientists to aid in the coming convergence.

“Education and training at all levels should use converging technologies as well as prepare people to take advantage of them. Interdisciplinary education programs, especially in graduate school, can create a new generation of scientists and engineers who are comfortable working across fields and collaborating with colleagues from a variety of specialties… education projects need to be launched at the intersections of crucial fields to build a scientific community that will achieve the convergence of technologies that can greatly improve human capabilities.” [7]

The Knowledge NBIC Project, funded by the European Union, is conducting research into the political and social implications of the NBIC convergence. One of the project’s recent reports details the potential applications of these enhancement technologies,

“…people may come to think of themselves as ‘always already disabled’, that is, on the verge of falling behind in a social world where regular neurochemical upgradings are expected as a precondition for adequate performance. The first stirrings of this general problem have already entered public view in controversies concerning the use of drugs to enhance competitive athletic and academic performance. The political responses so far suggest that this . . . agenda may well be subject to considerable regulation but it is very unlikely that its advance will be stopped altogether.”[8]

The United Kingdom Ministry of Defense report DCDC Global Strategic Trends Programme 2007-2036 is also anticipating the use of this technology.

“By 2035, an implantable information chip could be developed and wired directly to the user’s brain. Information and entertainment choices would be accessible through cognition and might include synthetic sensory perception beamed direct to the user’s senses. Wider related ICT developments might include the invention of synthetic telepathy, including mind-to-mind or telepathic dialogue. This type of development would have obvious military and security, as well as control, legal and ethical, implications.”[9]

The RAND corporation has its sights on this technological revolution as well. RAND’s 2001 report, The Global Technology Revolution: Bio/Nano/Materials Trends and Their Synergies with Information Technology by 2015 covers these issues. Among other trends, it foresees expanded globalization, reduced privacy and potential societal unrest as a response to revolutionary technologies.

“The results could be astonishing. Effects may include significant improvements in human quality of life and life span . . . continued globalization, reshuffling of wealth, cultural amalgamation or invasion with potential for increased tension and conflict, shifts in power from nation states to non-governmental organizations and individuals… and the possibility of human eugenics and cloning.”[10]

The Scientific Planners

“Man’s conquest of Nature, if the dreams of some scientific planners are realized, means the rule of a few hundreds of men over billions upon billions of men. There neither is nor can be any simple increase of power on Man’s side. Each new power won by man is a power over man as well.”— CS Lewis, The Abolition of Man

The influence of wealthy and important interests in shaping current and past events cannot be ignored when studying what the future may hold. Elites have always sought to project their dominance into the future, and this modern world is no different. Trends can either be products of an organic process or a deliberate method.

As we progress into the future, prominent analysts see a trend toward global government and a “global consciousness” as a natural, logical, and organic process of evolution. What these experts often fail to mention is the fact that it has been a prime directive of institutional schooling to prepare and condition youth to accept world governance for decades.

In 1954 the Reece Committee, chaired by Carroll B. Reece, produced its findings regarding the influence of tax-exempt foundations in the field of education. The Rockefeller Foundation, Ford Foundation, Carnegie Foundation and others were discussed during the Committee hearings. A predominant theme in the Committee’s findings was the desire of the foundations and those behind them to create a system of world governance. The use of propaganda and social engineering were identified as the means to achieve this goal.

The Reece Committee cited a report from the President’s Commission on Higher Education, published in 1947. The cited report states,

“In speed of transportation and communication and in economic interdependence, the nations of the globe are already one world; the task is to secure recognition and acceptance of this oneness in the thinking of the people, as that the concept of one world may be realized psychologically, socially and in good time politically.

It is this task in particular that challenges our scholars and teachers to lead the way toward a new way of thinking. There is an urgent need for a program for world citizenship that can be made a part of every person’s general education.

It will take social science and social engineering to solve the problems of human relations. Our people must learn to respect the need for special knowledge and technical training in this field as they have come to defer to the expert in physics, chemistry, medicine, and other sciences.” [1]

Futurists and government analysts often point to global warming and terrorism as defining crises of our time, as a natural part of the “global crisis of maturity.” Today, these issues are often presented as a justification for a system of world governance. William E. Halal writes,

“Intercultural conflict, weapons of mass destruction, and threats of environmental collapse are likely to force the move to some form of global community as the best means for managing such nagging problems.” [2]

Again, what we are not being told is that these issues were identified by powerful interests many years ago to serve as a pretext to prepare the way for “global solutions.” In a 1991 report titled “The First Global Revolution”, published by the Club of Rome, we find the following statement:

“In searching for a new enemy to unite us, we came up with the idea that pollution, the threat of global warming, water shortages, famine and the like would fit the bill…. All these dangers are caused by human intervention… The real enemy, then, is humanity itself.” [3]

In order to gain a deeper perspective, let’s take a look at the earlier 1976 Club of Rome report “Rio: Reshaping the International Order” which details a strategy to create a system of economic and world governance. The report states,

“At the highest level, the level of world affairs, international institutions must form the prime movers of planned change.”

“The achievement of this global planning and management system calls for the conscious transfer of power – a gradual transfer to be sure – from the nation State to the world organization. Only when this transfer takes place can the organization become effective and purposeful.”[4]

Halal continues in his Futurist article, praising the Club of Rome for its anticipation of these events,

“The major conclusion from this analysis is that the world is facing a global crisis of maturity, the most salient example being the near-collapse of the global banking system in October 2008. Warnings of massive transformations have been anticipated for decades by the Club of Rome and many others. Today, however, the acceleration of change seems to be producing a mounting series of severe global disruptions – energy shortages as oil supplies peak, impending climate change and environmental decline in general… continuing terrorism… as globalization inexorably strains old systems to the breaking point.”[5]

As these crises develop amidst the rising technological revolution, we are entering an “Age of Transitions” in which the elite of society – who have foreseen, and in many cases manufactured these crises – hope to emerge on top.

The Great Transition

“It will be necessary to replace today’s cumbersome social systems, religious dogmas, heated emotions, partisan ideologies, and other commonly outmoded forms of thought and consciousness that now form the major obstacles to progress.” — William E. Halal, Emerging Technologies and the Global Crisis of Maturity

There are several futurists, think tanks and high level government analysts that are both eagerly anticipating and warning that there will be great social conflict during this “great transition”. They are nearly uniform in calling for a casting aside of “outmoded forms of thought” to pave the way for a new era. By holding on to “ancient ideas” of government and religion, people are holding back the progress of the great technological revolution and a resulting “planetary civilization”. Some have compared the potential impact of this transition to the social and political impact of the Industrial Revolution. This new revolution, however, is on a much grander scale.

Some call it the “Age of Transitions”, others the “Global Crisis of Maturity”. Zbigniew Brzezinski called it the “Technectronic Era”.  However it is labeled, it brings with it major change and upheaval to humanity. Fred C. Ikle, author of The Ultimate Threat to Nations: Annihilation from Within, sees a widening gap between the “two souls” of society. One is dedicated to the scientific outlook that has been freed from religious and political bindings, while the other clings to the “stubborn past” of tradition and religion. Ikle sees this expanding gap as a great danger to all governments world-wide. Ikle writes,

“This widening chasm is ominous. It might impair the social cohesion of societies, and of nations, by drawing the human psyche in two directions: to the personal and national identity that resides in acquired beliefs, memories, and traditions of the past; and to the promise of greater wealth and power offered by untrammeled technological progress . . .  In the scientific sphere, we are neither emotionally tied to our cultural and religious heritage, nor pining for a final redemption. But when animated by the world’s old soul, we seek to protect our identity by clinging to ancient artifacts from our ancestors and hallowed legends from the distant past.”[1]

William E. Halal stated in the March-April 2009 edition of The Futurist that, “Some new form of global order is needed to avert disaster.” He continues, “The transition could happen anytime, but it is hard to conceive of a future in which today’s systems could survive much beyond 2020, let alone 2030.” Halal writes,

“It will be necessary to replace today’s cumbersome social systems, religious dogmas, heated emotions, partisan ideologies, and other commonly outmoded forms of thought and consciousness that now form the major obstacles to progress.”[2]

Halal cites prominent pollster John Zogby’s new book The Way We’ll Be as he discusses the rise of a new “global generation.” His description of this generation fits current economic trends that point to dramatically lower standards of living, but frames this as a “sustainable” lifestyle. The “First Globals” as he calls them will be “…intent on living sustainable lives in a unified world.” Zogby writes,

“…we are in the midst of a fundamental reorientation of the American character… away from wanton consumption and toward a new global citizenry in an age of limited resources.” [3]

Michio Kaku, a theoretical physicist and futurist, believes that the globe is moving towards what he calls a “Type 1″ civilization. This civilization, according to Kaku, will be technologically superior and constitute a world-wide system of governance, a global language, culture, and global economy. The transition may not be smooth, however. As Kaku has repeatedly stated, there will be resistance to the rise of this “Type 1″ civilization. In a 2006 interview Kaku stated,

“It’s the most dangerous of all transitions because there are some people who don’t want to be in type 1. They instinctively in their gut know that a type 1 system will be a system of different discourses, of different ideas and clashes of ideas and so on and so forth and these people who don’t want this transition are the terrorists.

In their gut, the terrorists know that we’re headed for type 1. They can’t articulate it, they don’t know the larger outlines of it, but in their gut they don’t like it.”[3]

In an earlier 2005 BBC interview Kaku said,

“…look at the economies. NAFTA, European Union, Trading blocks, the birth of a new economy is taking place.

Now there are people who don’t like this transition, who feel in their gut feel more comfortable being in a Type minus 1. They’re the terrorists. They in their gut realize that a Type 1 civilization has flowing ideas, challenging orthodoxies, new bigger, wondrous ideas popping forth. That’s Type 1.” [5]

As the world faces unparalleled economic turmoil, America’s decline is marking a historical geopolitical time period. The re-ordering of the globe is underway. The “Global Crisis of Maturity” – as envisioned by the elite – is ushering in a new world order as advancing technologies dramatically alter society.

It is vitally important that everyone, especially young people, gain their own understanding of what we are facing. The school system may prepare you for the future, but only in a manner that is self-serving to the establishment and kept within safe confines to prevent organic change. This study must involve not just a study of potential technological developments, but an understanding of the nature of power and the elites that wield it. Social engineers and opinion molders will be working overtime to shape society during this “Age of Transitions” as societal norms are broken and reshaped, and the political battlefield is thrown into chaos.


The Technological Revolution:

[1.] Ikle, Fred Charles. The Ultimate Threat to Nations: Annihilation from Within. Columbia University Press, 2006. Page 33

[2.] lbid 1, Ikle.

[3.] “Korea’s High-Tech Utopia, Where Everything Is Observed.”  The New York Times. October 5, 2005. Available at: <;

[4.] Halal, William E. “Emerging Technologies and the Global Crisis of Maturity.” The Futurist. March-April 2009.

[5.] lbid 1, Ikle.

[6.] lbid 1, Ikle. Page 32.

[7.] Mihail C. Roco and William Sims Bainbridge, National Science Foundation. “Converging Technologies for Improving Human Performance.” Arlington, Virginia 2002. Page 21. Available here: <;

[8.] Project coordinator: Nico Stehr Ph.D. F.R.S.C. “Knowledge Politics and New Converging Technologies: A Social Science Perspective.” Available here: <;

[9.] “DCDC Global Strategic Trends Programme 2007-2036.”

[10.] Philip S. Anto´n, Richard Silberglitt, James Schneider. “The Global Technology Revolution: Bio/Nano/Materials Trends and Their Synergies with Information Technology by 2015.” RAND Corporation. 2001. Available here: <;

The Scientific Planners:

[1.] United States. Cong. House Special Committee to Investigate Tax-Exempt Foundations and Comparable Organizations. 1954.

[2.] Halal, William E. “Technology’s Promise: Highlights from the TechCast Project”, The Futurist, Nov-Dec 2006.

[3.] Alexander King & Bertrand Schneider. The First Global Revolution. New York: Pantheon Books, 1991. Page 115.

[4.] Jan Tinbergen. RIO: Reshaping the International Order: A Report to the Club of Rome. 1976. Page 100.

[5.] lbid 2, Halal.

The Great Transition:

[1.] lbid 1, Ikle. Page 16.

[2.] lbid 2, Halal.

[3.] lbid 2, Halal.

[4.] 2006 interview with the Conscious Media Network. Available here: <;

[5.] BBC Hard Talk Extra. Gavin Esler interviewing Michio Kaku. April 22, 2005. Available here: <;


Post-Humans: Let’s Not Go There

Biotechnology and The Corporation’s race to own nature

NASA 2001 Report: The Bots, Borgs and Humans Welcome You to 2025


Micro-chip Implants, Mind Control and Cybernetics


The Protocols of the Learned Elders of Zion


The Protocols of the Learned Elders of Zion

[Editor’s Note: The term “protocols” in this text refers to the recorded minutes of a series of meetings which took place among the innermost circle of Zion elders. The term also implies a blueprint or strategy to follow in order to achieve the desired goals stated here. The minutes of these meetings were either originally issued at the First Zionist Congress held in in Basel, Switzerland  (spelled Basle at the time) in 1897, or they were re-issued at that Congress. The Zionist Congress was headed up by Theodore Herzl who held subsequent Zionist congresses on almost a yearly basis until 1913, and then resumed again in 1921. The ideas and beliefs expressed in these protocols are so hideous and repugnant to the sensibilities of any normal person of good will, that the British translator, Victor Marsden, could only work on translating the 1905 Russian text of the Protocols for one hour per day due to his revulsion with the concepts being promoted. The people who embrace these concepts consider themselves a special and separate category of humanity who were chosen by “God” to rule over all other men on this planet and establish a simple two tier feudal society: one with elites at the top and worker serfs below them. They consider non-Jews to be the equivalent of cattle and therefore afford no more concern for the “rights” of the subhuman Goyim than one would grant to a herd of steer or sheep.

You will notice that the strategies of control expostulated here-in 1897– such as the use of fiat paper from Zionist owned banks to replace currency backed by gold, along with the destruction of the nuclear family unit, control of school curriculums, the end of freedoms of any stripe, the creation of “terrorism” to frighten the Goy into clamoring for safety over safeguarding of constitutional rights, etc., etc., etc. is today being followed and employed exactly as laid out by Zionist planners in the 19th century.

While Zionists and their agents are dispersed world wide, the heart of Zionism resides with those who control the state of Israel. I bear no ill will toward Israelis who do not endorse Zionism, but I am mindful that the Zionists in control of that tiny nation have wielded enormous influence upon American politicians who in turn, have burdened the American taxpayer with the cost of  funding the strife, oppression, and terrorism which Israel has wrecked upon so many defenseless and vulnerable people around the world. For the twisted minds who embrace these precepts, there is no lower limit to the degree of deceit, dishonesty, abuse, trickery, cruelty, or killing that the Talmud tells they that they are allowed to employ in order to achieve their goals of a One World feudal society in which merely staying alive in order to serve the Zionist masters and enjoy even one more day of life, will be the ONLY concern of the Goyim “workers’…Ken Adachi]

Translated by Victor E. Marsden


Who are the Elders?
Protocol I The Basic Doctrine
Protocol II Economic Wars
Protocol III Methods of Conquest
Protocol IV Materialism Replace Religion
Protocol V Despotism and Modern Progress
Protocol VI Take-Over Technique
Protocol VII World-Wide Wars
Protocol VIII Provisional Government
Protocol IX Re-education
Protocol X Preparing for Power
Protocol XI The Totalitarian State
Protocol XII Control of the Press
Protoco XIII Distractions
Protocol XIV Assault on Religion
Protocol XV Ruthless Suppression
Protocol XVI Brainwashing
Protocol XVII Abuse of Authority
Protocol XVIII Arrest of Opponents
Protocol XIX Rulers and People
Protocol XX Financial Programme
Protocol XXI Loans and Credit
Protocol XXII Power of Gold
Protocol XXIII Instilling Obedience
Protocol XXIV Qualities of the Ruler

The author of this translation of the famous Protocols was himself a victim of the [1917 Russian] Revolution. He had lived for many years in Russia and was married to a Russian lady. Among his other activities in Russia he had been for a number of years a Russian Correspondent of the MORNING POST [British press], a position which he occupied when the Revolution broke out, and his vivid descriptions of events in Russia will still be in the recollection of many of the readers of that Journal. Naturally, he was singled out for the anger of the Soviet.

On the day that Captain Cromie was murdered by Jews, Victor Marsden was arrested and thrown into the Peter-Paul Prison, expecting every day to have his name called out for execution. This, however, he escaped, and eventually he was allowed to return to England very much of a wreck in bodily health. However, he recovered under treatment and the devoted care of his wife and friends. One of the first things he undertook, as soon as he was able, was this translation of the Protocols.

Mr. Marsden was eminently well qualified for the work. His intimate acquaintance with Russia, Russian life and the Russian language on the one hand, and his mastery of a terse literary English style on the other, placed him in a position of advantage which few others could claim. The consequence is that we have in his version an eminently readable work, and though the subject-matter is somewhat formless, Mr. Marsden’s literary touch reveals the thread running through the twenty-four Protocols. It may be said with truth that this work was carried out at the cost of Mr. Marsden’s own life’s blood.

He told the writer of this Preface that he could not stand more than an hour at a time of his work on it in the British Museum, as the diabolical spirit of the matter which he was obliged to turn into English made him positively ill.

Mr. Marsden’s connection with the MORNING POST was not severed by his return to England, and he was well enough to accept the post of special correspondent of that journal in the suite of H.R.H., the Prince of Wales on his Empire tour. From this he returned with the Prince, apparently in much better health, but within a few days of his landing he was taken suddenly ill, and died after a very brief illness.

May this work be his crowning monument! In it he has performed an immense service to the English-speaking world, and there can be little doubt that it will take its place in the first rank of the English versions of “THE PROTOCOLS of the Meetings of the LEARNED ELDERS OF ZION.”

Of the Protocols themselves little need be said in the way of introduction. The book in which they are embodied was published by Sergyei Nilus in Russia in 1905. A copy of this is in the British Museum bearing the date of its reception, August 10, 1906. All copies that were known to exist in Russia were destroyed in the Kerensky regime, and under his successors the possession of a copy by anyone in Soviet land was a crime sufficient to ensure the owner’s of being shot on sight. The fact is in itself sufficient proof of the genuineness of the Protocols. The Jewish journals, of course, say that they are a forgery, leaving it to be understood that Professor Nilus, who embodied them in a work of his own, had concocted them for his own purposes.

Mr. Henry Ford, in an interview published in the New York WORLD, February 17th, 1921, put the case for Nilus tersely and convincingly thus: “The only statement I care to make about the PROTOCOLS is that they fit in with what is going on. They are sixteen years old, and they have fitted the world situation up to this time. THEY FIT IT NOW.” Indeed they do!

The word “Protocol” signifies a precis gummed on to the front of a document, a draft of a document, minutes of proceedings. In this instance, “Protocol” means minutes of the proceedings of the Meetings of the Learned Elders of Zion. These Protocols give the substance of addresses delivered to the innermost circle of the Rulers of Zion. They reveal the converted plan of action of the Jewish Nation developed through the ages and edited by the Elders themselves up to date. Parts and summaries of the plan have been published from time to time during the centuries as the secrets of the Elders have leaked out.

The claim of the Jews that the Protocols are forgeries is in itself an admission of their genuineness, for they NEVER ATTEMPT TO ANSWER THE FACTS corresponding to the THREATS which the Protocols contain, and, indeed, the correspondence between prophecy and fulfillment is too glaring to be set aside or obscured. This the Jews well know and therefore evade.

The presumption is strong that the Protocols were issued, or reissued, at the First Zionist Congress held at Basle in 1897 under the presidency of the Father of Modern Zionism, the late Theodore Herzl. There has been recently published a volume of Herzl’s “Diaries,” a translation of some passages which appeared in the JEWISH CHRONICLE of July 14, 1922.

Herzl gives an account of his first visit to England in 1895, and his conversation with Colonel Goldsmid, a Jew brought up as a Christian, an officer in the English Army, and at heart a Jew Nationalist all the time. Goldsmid suggested to Herzl that the best way of expropriating the English aristocracy, and so destroying their power to protect the people of England against Jew domination, was to put excessive taxes on the land. Herzl thought this an excellent idea, and it is now to be found definitely embodied in Protocol VI!

The above extract from Herzl’s DIARY is an extremely significant bit of evidence bearing on the existence of the Jew World Plot and authenticity of the Protocols, but any reader of intelligence will be able from his own knowledge of recent history and from his own experience to confirm the genuineness of every line of them, and it is in the light of this LIVING comment that all readers are invited to study Mr. Marsden’s translation of this terribly inhuman document. And here is another very significant circumstance.

The present successor of Herzl, as leader of the Zionist movement, Dr. Weizmann, quoted one of these sayings at the send-off banquet given to Chief Rabbi Hertz on October 6, 1920. The Chief Rabbi was on the point of leaving for HIS Empire tour of H.R.H., the Prince of Wales. And this is the “saying” of the Sages which Dr. Weizmann quoted: “A beneficent protection which God has instituted in the life of the Jew is that He has dispersed him all over the world.” (JEWISH GUARDIAN, Oct. 8, 1920.) Now compare this with the last clause of but one of Protocol XI. “God has granted to us, His Chosen People, the gift of dispersion, and from this, which appears to all eyes to be our weakness, has come forth all our strength, which has now brought us to the threshold of sovereignty over all the world.”

The remarkable correspondence between these passages proves several things. It proves that the Learned Elders exist. It proves that Dr. Weizmann knows all about them. It proves that the desire for a “National Home” in Palestine is only camouflage and an infinitesimal part of the Jew’s real object. It proves that the Jews of the world have no intention of settling in Palestine or any separate country, and that their annual prayer that they may all meet “Next Year in Jerusalem” is merely a piece of their characteristic make-believe. It also demonstrates that the Jews are now a world menace, and that the Aryan races will have to domicile them permanently out of Europe..

Who Are the Elders?
This is a secret which has not been revealed. They are the Hidden hand. They are not the “Board of Deputies” (the Jewish Parliament in England) or the “Universal Israelite Alliance” which sits in Paris. But the late Walter Rathenau of the Allgemeiner Electricitaets Gesellschaft has thrown a little light on the subject and doubtless he was in possession of their names, being, in all likelihood, one of the chief leaders himself. Writing in the WIENER FREIE PRESSE, December 24, 1912, he said: “Three hundred men, each of whom knows all the others, govern the fate of the European continent, and they elect their successors from their entourage.”

In the year 1844, on the eve of the Jewish Revolution of 1848, Benjamin Disraeli, whose real name was Israel, and who was a “damped,” or baptized Jew, published his novel, CONINGSBY, in which occurs this ominous passage: “The world is governed by very different personages from what is imagined by those who are not behind the scenes.” And he went on to show that these personages were all Jews.

Now that Providence has brought to the light of day these secret Protocols all men may clearly see the hidden personages specified by Disraeli at work “behind the scenes” of all the Governments. This revelation entails on all white peoples the grave responsibility of examining and revising AU FOND their attitude towards the Race and Nation which boasts of its survival over all Empires.

Notes I. – “Agentur” and “The Political.” There are two words in this translation which are unusual, the word “AGENTUR” and “political” used as a substantive, AGENTUR appears to be a word adopted from the original and it means the whole body of agents and agencies made use of by the Elders, whether members of the tribe or their Gentile tools. By “the Political” Mr. Marsden means, not exactly the “body politic” but the entire machinery of politics.

Notes II – The Symbolic Snake of Judaism. Protocol III opens with a reference to the Symbolic Snake of Judaism. In his Epilogue to the 1905 Edition of the Protocols, Nilus gives the following interesting account of this symbol: “According to the records of secret Jewish Zionism, Solomon and other Jewish learned men already, in 929 B.C.thought out a scheme in theory for a peaceful conquest of the whole universe by Zion.

As history developed, this scheme was worked out in detail and completed by men who were subsequently initiated in this question. These learned men decided by peaceful means to conquer the world for Zion with the slyness of the Symbolic Snake, whose head was to represent those who have been initiated into the plans of the Jewish administration, and the body of the Snake to represent the Jewish people – the administration was always kept secret, EVEN FROM THE JEWISH NATION ITSELF. As this Snake penetrated into the hearts of the nations which it encountered it  undermined and devoured all the non-Jewish power of these States.        By Alain Roth, 1915 Jewish New Year Postcard

Leviathan,  from Jewish New Year Postcard

It is foretold that the Snake has still to finish its work, strictly adhering to the designed plan, until the course which it has to run is closed by the return of its head to Zion and until, by this means, the Snake has completed its round of Europe and has encircled it – and until, by dint of enchaining Europe, it has encompassed the whole world. This it is to accomplish by using every endeavor to subdue the other countries by an ECONOMICAL CONQUEST.

The return of the head of the Snake to Zion can only be accomplished after the power of all the Sovereign of Europe has been laid low, that is to say, when by means of economic crises and wholesale destruction effected everywhere, there shall have been brought about spiritual demoralization and a moral corruption, chiefly with the assistance of Jewish women masquerading as French, Italians, etc.. These are the surest spreaders of licentiousness into the lives of the leading men at the heads of nations.

Fox-TV Ad for Millenium seires

A map of the course of the Symbolic Snake is shown as follows: – Its first stage in Europe was in 429 B.C. in Greece, where, about the time of Pericles, the Snake first started eating into the power of that country. The second stage was in Rome in the time of Augustus, about 69 B.C.. The third in Madrid in the time of Charles V, in A.D. 1552. The fourth in Paris about 1790, in the time of Louis XVI. The fifth in London from 1814 onwards (after the downfall of Napoleon). The sixth in Berlin in 1871 after the Franco-Prussian war. The seventh in St. Petersburg, over which is drawn the head of the Snake under the date of 1881. [This “Snake” is now being drawn through the Americas and in the United States of America, it is been partially identified as the “Council on Foreign Relations” (C.F.R.) and the “Tri-Lateral Commission”].

All these States which the Snake traversed have had the foundations of their constitutions shaken, Germany, with its apparent power, forming no exception to the rule. In economic conditions, England and Germany are spared, but only till the conquest of Russia is accomplished by the Snake, on which at present [i.e., 1905] all its efforts are concentrated. The further course of the Snake is not shown on this map, but arrows indicate its next movement towards Moscow, Kieft and Odessa. It is now well known to us to what extent the latter cities form the centuries of the militant Jewish race. Constantinople is shown as the last stage of the Snake’s course before it reaches Jerusalem. (This map was drawn years before the occurrence of the “Young Turk” – i.e., Jewish – Revolution in Turkey). den.

Notes III. – The term “Goyim,” meaning Gentile or non-Jews, is used throughout the Protocols and is retained by Mr. Marsden.

Top of Protocols

Protocol I

1. ….Putting aside fine phrases we shall speak of the significance of each thought: by comparisons and deductions we shall throw light upon surrounding facts.

2. What I am about to set forth, then, is our system from the two points of view, that of ourselves and that of the GOYIM [i.e., non- Jews].

3. It must be noted that men with bad instincts are more in number than the good, and therefore the best results in governing them are attained by violence and terrorization, and not by academic discussions. Every man aims at power, everyone would like to become a dictator if only he could, and rare indeed are the men who would not be willing to sacrifice the welfare of all for the sake of securing their own welfare.

4. What has restrained the beasts of prey who are called men? What has served for their guidance hitherto?

5. In the beginnings of the structure of society, they were subjected to brutal and blind force; after words – to Law, which is the same force, only disguised. I draw the conclusion that by the law of nature right lies in force.

6. Political freedom is an idea but not a fact. This idea one must know how to apply whenever it appears necessary with this bait of an idea to attract the masses of the people to one’s party for the purpose of crushing another who is in authority. This task is rendered easier of the opponent has himself been infected with the idea of freedom, SO-CALLED LIBERALISM, and, for the sake of an idea, is willing to yield some of his power. It is precisely here that the triumph of our theory appears; the slackened reins of government are immediately, by the law of life, caught up and gathered together by a new hand, because the blind might of the nation cannot for one single day exist without guidance, and the new authority merely fits into the place of the old already weakened by liberalism.


7. In our day the power which has replaced that of the rulers who were liberal is the power of Gold. Time was when Faith ruled. The idea of freedom is impossible of realization because no one knows how to use it with moderation. It is enough to hand over a people to self-government for a certain length of time for that people to be turned into a disorganized mob. From that moment on we get internecine strife which soon develops into battles between classes, in the midst of which States burn down and their importance is reduced to that of a heap of ashes.

8. Whether a State exhausts itself in its own convulsions, whether its internal discord brings it under the power of external foes – in any case it can be accounted irretrievable lost: IT IS IN OUR POWER. The despotism of Capital, which is entirely in our hands, reaches out to it a straw that the State, willy-nilly, must take hold of: if not – it goes to the bottom.

9. Should anyone of a liberal mind say that such reflections as the above are immoral, I would put the following questions: If every State has two foes and if in regard to the external foe it is allowed and not considered immoral to use every manner and art of conflict, as for example to keep the enemy in ignorance of plans of attack and defense, to attack him by night or in superior numbers, then in what way can the same means in regard to a worse foe, the destroyer of the structure of society and the commonweal, be called immoral and not permissible?

10. Is it possible for any sound logical mind to hope with any success to guide crowds by the aid of reasonable counsels and arguments, when any objection or contradiction, senseless though it may be, can be made and when such objection may find more favor with the people, whose powers of reasoning are superficial? Men in masses and the men of the masses, being guided solely by petty passions, paltry beliefs, traditions and sentimental theorems, fall a prey to party dissension, which hinders any kind of agreement even on the basis of a perfectly reasonable argument. Every resolution of a crowd depends upon a chance or packed majority, which, in its ignorance of political secrets, puts forth some ridiculous resolution that lays in the administration a seed of anarchy.

11. The political has nothing in common with the moral. The ruler who is governed by the moral is not a skilled politician, and is therefore unstable on his throne. He who wishes to rule must have recourse both to cunning and to make-believe. Great national qualities, like frankness and honesty, are vices in politics, for they bring down rulers from their thrones more effectively and more certainly than the most powerful enemy. Such qualities must be the attributes of the kingdoms of the GOYIM, but we must in no wise be guided by them.


12. Our right lies in force. The word “right” is an abstract thought and proved by nothing. The word means no more than: Give me what I want in order that thereby I may have a proof that I am stronger than you.

13. Where does right begin? Where does it end?

14. In any State in which there is a bad organization of authority, an impersonality of laws and of the rulers who have lost their personality amid the flood of rights ever multiplying out of liberalism, I find a new right – to attack by the right of the strong, and to scatter to the winds all existing forces of order and regulation, to reconstruct all institutions and to become the sovereign lord of those who have left to us the rights of their power by laying them down voluntarily in their liberalism.

15. Our power in the present tottering condition of all forms of power will be more invincible than any other, because it will remain invisible until the moment when it has gained such strength that no cunning can any longer undermine it.

16. Out of the temporary evil we are now compelled to commit will emerge the good of an unshakable rule, which will restore the regular course of the machinery of the national life, brought to naught by liberalism. The result justifies the means. Let us, however, in our plans, direct our attention not so much to what is good and moral as to what is necessary and useful.

17. Before us is a plan in which is laid down strategically the line from which we cannot deviate without running the risk of seeing the labor of many centuries brought to naught.

18. In order to elaborate satisfactory forms of action it is necessary to have regard to the rascality, the slackness, the instability of the mob, its lack of capacity to understand and respect the conditions of its own life, or its own welfare. It must be understood that the might of a mob is blind, senseless and unreasoning force ever at the mercy of a suggestion from any side. The blind cannot lead the blind without bringing them into the abyss; consequently, members of the mob, upstarts from the people even though they should be as a genius for wisdom, yet having no understanding of the political, cannot come forward as leaders of the mob without bringing the whole nation to ruin.

19. Only one trained from childhood for independent rule can have understanding of the words that can be made up of the political alphabet.

20. A people left to itself, i.e., to upstarts from its midst, brings itself to ruin by party dissensions excited by the pursuit of power and honors and the disorders arising therefrom. Is it possible for the masses of the people calmly and without petty jealousies to form judgment, to deal with the affairs of the country, which cannot be mixed up with personal interest? Can they defend themselves from an external foe? It is unthinkable; for a plan broken up into as many parts as there are heads in the mob, loses all homogeneity, and thereby becomes unintelligible and impossible of execution.


21. It is only with a despotic ruler that plans can be elaborated extensively and clearly in such a way as to distribute the whole properly among the several parts of the machinery of the State: from this the conclusion is inevitable that a satisfactory form of government for any country is one that concentrates in the hands of one responsible person. Without an absolute despotism there can be no existence for civilization which is carried on not by the masses but by their guide, whosoever that person may be. The mob is savage, and displays its savagery at every opportunity. The moment the mob seizes freedom in its hands it quickly turns to anarchy, which in itself is the highest degree of savagery.

22. Behold the alcoholic animals, bemused with drink, the right to an immoderate use of which comes along with freedom. It is not for us and ours to walk that road. The peoples of the GOYIM are bemused with alcoholic liquors; their youth has grown stupid on classicism and from early immorality, into which it has been inducted by our special agents – by tutors, lackeys, governesses in the houses of the wealthy, by clerks and others, by our women in the places of dissipation frequented by the GOYIM. In the number of these last I count also the so-called “society ladies,” voluntary followers of the others in corruption and luxury.

23. Our countersign is – Force and Make-believe. Only force conquers in political affairs, especially if it be concealed in the talents essential to statesmen. Violence must be the principle, and cunning and make-believe the rule for governments which do not want to lay down their crowns at the feet of agents of some new power. This evil is the one and only means to attain the end, the good. Therefore, we must not stop at bribery, deceit and treachery when they should serve towards the attainment of our end. In politics one must know how to seize the property of others without hesitation if by it we secure submission and sovereignty.

24. Our State, marching along the path of peaceful conquest, has the right to replace the horrors of war by less noticeable and more satisfactory sentences of death, necessary to maintain the terror which tends to produce blind submission. Just but merciless severity is the greatest factor of strength in the State: not only for the sake of gain but also in the name of duty, for the sake of victory, we must keep to the program of violence and make-believe. The doctrine of squaring accounts is precisely as strong as the means of which it makes use. Therefore it is not so much by the means themselves as by the doctrine of severity that we shall triumph and bring all governments into subjection to our super-government. It is enough for them to know that we are too merciless for all disobedience to cease.


25. Far back in ancient times we were the first to cry among the masses of the people the words “Liberty, Equality, Fraternity,” words many times repeated since these days by stupid poll- parrots who, from all sides around, flew down upon these baits and with them carried away the well-being of the world, true freedom of the individual, formerly so well guarded against the pressure of the mob. The would-be wise men of the GOYIM, the intellectuals, could not make anything out of the uttered words in their abstractedness; did not see that in nature there is no equality, cannot be freedom: that Nature herself has established inequality of minds, of characters, and capacities, just as immutably as she has established subordination to her laws: never stopped to think that the mob is a blind thing, that upstarts elected from among it to bear rule are, in regard to the political, the same blind men as the mob itself, that the adept, though he be a fool, can yet rule, whereas the non-adept, even if he were a genius, understands nothing in the political – to all those things the GOYIM paid no regard; yet all the time it was based upon these things that dynastic rule rested: the father passed on to the son a knowledge of the course of political affairs in such wise that none should know it but members of the dynasty and none could betray it to the governed. As time went on, the meaning of the dynastic transference of the true position of affairs in the political was lost, and this aided the success of our cause.

26. In all corners of the earth the words “Liberty, Equality, Fraternity,” brought to our ranks, thanks to our blind agents, whole legions who bore our banners with enthusiasm. And all the time these words were canker-worms at work boring into the well-being of the GOYIM, putting an end everywhere to peace, quiet, solidarity and destroying all the foundations of the GOYA States. As you will see later, this helped us to our triumph: it gave us the possibility, among other things, of getting into our hands the master card – the destruction of the privileges, or in other words of the very existence of the aristocracy of the GOYIM, that class which was the only defense peoples and countries had against us. On the ruins of the eternal and genealogical aristocracy of the GOYIM we have set up the aristocracy of our educated class headed by the aristocracy of money. The qualifications for this aristocracy we have established in wealth, which is dependent upon us, and in knowledge, for which our learned elders provide the motive force.

27. Our triumph has been rendered easier by the fact that in our relations with the men, whom we wanted, we have always worked upon the most sensitive chords of the human mind, upon the cash account, upon the cupidity, upon the insatiability for material needs of man; and each one of these human weaknesses, taken alone, is sufficient to paralyze initiative, for it hands over the will of men to the disposition of him who has bought their activities.

28. The abstraction of freedom has enabled us to persuade the mob in all countries that their government is nothing but the steward of the people who are the owners of the country, and that the steward may be replaced like a worn-out glove.

29. It is this possibility of replacing the representatives of the people which has placed at our disposal, and, as it were, given us the power of appointment.

Top of Protocols

Protocol II

1. It is indispensable for our purpose that wars, so far as possible, should not result in territorial gains: war will thus be brought on to the economic ground, where the nations will not fail to perceive in the assistance we give the strength of our predominance, and this state of things will put both sides at the mercy of our international AGENTUR; which possesses millions of eyes ever on the watch and unhampered by any limitations whatsoever. Our international rights will then wipe out national rights, in the proper sense of right, and will rule the nations precisely as the civil law of States rules the relations of their subjects among themselves.

2. The administrators, whom we shall choose from among the public, with strict regard to their capacities for servile obedience, will not be persons trained in the arts of government, and will therefore easily become pawns in our game in the hands of men of learning and genius who will be their advisers, specialists bred and reared from early childhood to rule the affairs of the whole world. As is well known to you, these specialists of ours have been drawing to fit them for rule the information they need from our political plans from the lessons of history, from observations made of the events of every moment as it passes. The GOYIM are not guided by practical use of unprejudiced historical observation, but by theoretical routine without any critical regard for consequent results. We need not, therefore, take any account of them – let them amuse themselves until the hour strikes, or live on hopes of new forms of enterprising pastime, or on the memories of all they have enjoyed. For them let that play the principal part which we have persuaded them to accept as the dictates of science (theory). It is with this object in view that we are constantly, by means of our press, arousing a blind confidence in these theories. The intellectuals of the GOYIM will puff themselves up with their knowledge and without any logical verification of them will put into effect all the information available from science, which our AGENTUR specialists have cunningly pieced together for the purpose of educating their minds in the direction we want.


3. Do not suppose for a moment that these statements are empty words: think carefully of the successes we arranged for Darwinism, Marxism, Nietzsche-ism. To us Jews, at any rate, it should be plain to see what a disintegrating importance these directives have had upon the minds of the GOYIM.

4. It is indispensable for us to take account of the thoughts, characters, tendencies of the nations in order to avoid making slips in the political and in the direction of administrative affairs. The triumph of our system of which the component parts of the machinery may be variously disposed according to the temperament of the peoples met on our way, will fail of success if the practical application of it be not based upon a summing up of the lessons of the past in the light of the present.

5. In the hands of the States of to-day there is a great force that creates the movement of thought in the people, and that is the Press. The part played by the Press is to keep pointing our requirements supposed to be indispensable, to give voice to the complaints of the people, to express and to create discontent. It is in the Press that the triumph of freedom of speech finds its incarnation. But the GOYIM States have not known how to make use of this force; and it has fallen into our hands. Through the Press we have gained the power to influence while remaining ourselves in the shade; thanks to the Press we have got the GOLD in our hands, notwithstanding that we have had to gather it out of the oceans of blood and tears. But it has paid us, though we have sacrificed many of our people. Each victim on our side is worth in the sight of God a thousand GOYIM.

Top of Protocols

Protocol III

1. To-day I may tell you that our goal is now only a few steps off. There remains a small space to cross and the whole long path we have trodden is ready now to close its cycle of the Symbolic Snake, by which we symbolize our people. When this ring closes, all the States of Europe will be locked in its coil as in a powerful vice.

2. The constitution scales of these days will shortly break down, for we have established them with a certain lack of accurate balance in order that they may oscillate incessantly until they wear through the pivot on which they turn. The GOYIM are under the impression that they have welded them sufficiently strong and they have all along kept on expecting that the scales would come into equilibrium. But the pivots – the kings on their thrones – are hemmed in by their representatives, who play the fool, distraught with their own uncontrolled and irresponsible power. This power they owe to the terror which has been breathed into the palaces. As they have no means of getting at their people, into their very midst, the kings on their thrones are no longer able to come to terms with them and so strengthen themselves against seekers after power. We have made a gulf between the far-seeing Sovereign Power and the blind force of the people so that both have lost all meaning, for like the blind man and his stick, both are powerless apart.

3. In order to incite seekers after power to a misuse of power we have set all forces in opposition one to another, breaking up their liberal tendencies towards independence. To this end we have stirred up every form of enterprise, we have armed all parties, we have set up authority as a target for every ambition. Of States we have made gladiatorial arenas where a lot of confused issues contend …. A little more, and disorders and bankruptcy will be universal ….

4. Babblers, inexhaustible, have turned into oratorical contests the sittings of Parliament and Administrative Boards. Bold journalists and unscrupulous pamphleteers daily fall upon executive officials. Abuses of power will put the final touch in preparing all institutions for their overthrow and everything will fly skyward under the blows of the maddened mob.


5. All people are chained down to heavy toil by poverty more firmly than ever. They were chained by slavery and serfdom; from these, one way and another, they might free themselves. These could be settled with, but from want they will never get away. We have included in the constitution such rights as to the masses appear fictitious and not actual rights. All these so-called “Peoples Rights” can exist only in idea, an idea which can never be realized in practical life. What is it to the proletariat laborer, bowed double over his heavy toil, crushed by his lot in life, if talkers get the right to babble, if journalists get the right to scribble any nonsense side by side with good stuff, once the proletariat has no other profit out of the constitution save only those pitiful crumbs which we fling them from our table in return for their voting in favor of what we dictate, in favor of the men we place in power, the servants of our AGENTUR … Republican rights for a poor man are no more than a bitter piece of irony, for the necessity he is under of toiling almost all day gives him no present use of them, but the other hand robs him of all guarantee of regular and certain earnings by making him dependent on strikes by his comrades or lockouts by his masters.


6. The people, under our guidance, have annihilated the aristocracy, who were their one and only defense and foster- mother for the sake of their own advantage which is inseparably bound up with the well-being of the people. Nowadays, with the destruction of the aristocracy, the people have fallen into the grips of merciless money-grinding scoundrels who have laid a pitiless and cruel yoke upon the necks of the workers.

7. We appear on the scene as alleged saviours of the worker from this oppression when we propose to him to enter the ranks of our fighting forces – Socialists, Anarchists, Communists – to whom we always give support in accordance with an alleged brotherly rule (of the solidarity of all humanity) of our SOCIAL MASONRY. The aristocracy, which enjoyed by law the labor of the workers, was interested in seeing that the workers were well fed, healthy, and strong. We are interested in just the opposite – in the diminution, the KILLING OUT OF THE GOYIM. Our power is in the chronic shortness of food and physical weakness of the worker because by all that this implies he is made the slave of our will, and he will not find in his own authorities either strength or energy to set against our will. Hunger creates the right of capital to rule the worker more surely than it was given to the aristocracy by the legal authority of kings.

8. By want and the envy and hatred which it engenders we shall move the mobs and with their hands we shall wipe out all those who hinder us on our way.


10. The GOYIM have lost the habit of thinking unless prompted by the suggestions of our specialists. Therefore they do not see the urgent necessity of what we, when our kingdom comes, shall adopt at once, namely this, that IT IS ESSENTIAL TO TEACH IN NATIONAL SCHOOLS ONE SIMPLE, TRUE PIECE OF KNOWLEDGE, THE BASIS OF ALL KNOWLEDGE – THE KNOWLEDGE OF THE STRUCTURE OF HUMAN LIFE, OF SOCIAL EXISTENCE, WHICH REQUIRES DIVISION OF LABOR, AND, CONSEQUENTLY, THE DIVISION OF MEN INTO CLASSES AND CONDITIONS. It is essential for all to know that OWING TO DIFFERENCE IN THE OBJECTS OF HUMAN ACTIVITY THERE CANNOT BE ANY EQUALITY, that he, who by any act of his compromises a whole class, cannot be equally responsible before the law with him who affects no one but only his own honor. The true knowledge of the structure of society, into the secrets of which we do not admit the GOYIM, would demonstrate to all men that the positions and work must be kept within a certain circle, that they may not become a source of human suffering, arising from an education which does not correspond with the work which individuals are called upon to do. After a thorough study of this knowledge, the peoples will voluntarily submit to authority and accept such position as is appointed them in the State. In the present state of knowledge and the direction we have given to its development of the people, blindly believing things in print – cherishes – thanks to promptings intended to mislead and to its own ignorance – a blind hatred towards all conditions which it considers above itself, for it has no understanding of the meaning of class and condition.


11. THIS HATRED WILL BE STILL FURTHER MAGNIFIED BY THE EFFECTS of an ECONOMIC CRISES, which will stop dealing on the exchanges and bring industry to a standstill. We shall create by all the secret subterranean methods open to us and with the aid of gold, which is all in our hands, A UNIVERSAL ECONOMIC CRISES WHEREBY WE SHALL THROW UPON THE STREETS WHOLE MOBS OF WORKERS SIMULTANEOUSLY IN ALL THE COUNTRIES OF EUROPE. These mobs will rush delightedly to shed the blood of those whom, in the simplicity of their ignorance, they have envied from their cradles, and whose property they will then be able to loot.


13. We have demonstrated that progress will bring all the GOYIM to the sovereignty of reason. Our despotism will be precisely that; for it will know how, by wise severities, to pacificate all unrest, to cauterize liberalism out of all institutions.

14. When the populace has seen that all sorts of concessions and indulgences are yielded it, in the same name of freedom it has imagined itself to be sovereign lord and has stormed its way to power, but, naturally like every other blind man, it has come upon a host of stumbling blocks. IT HAS RUSHED TO FIND A GUIDE, IT HAS NEVER HAD THE SENSE TO RETURN TO THE FORMER STATE and it has laid down its plenipotentiary powers at OUR feet. Remember the French Revolution, to which it was we who gave the name of “Great”: the secrets of its preparations are well known to us for it was wholly the work of our hands.

15 Ever since that time we have been leading the peoples from one disenchantment to another, so that in the end they should turn also from us in favor of that KING-DESPOT OF THE BLOOD OF ZION, WHOM WE ARE PREPARING FOR THE WORLD.

16. At the present day we are, as an international force, invincible, because if attacked by some we are supported by other States. It is the bottomless rascality of the GOYIM peoples, who crawl on their bellies to force, but are merciless towards weakness, unsparing to faults and indulgent to crimes, unwilling to bear the contradictions of a free social system but patient unto martyrdom under the violence of a bold despotism – it is those qualities which are aiding us to independence. From the premier- dictators of the present day, the GOYIM peoples suffer patiently and bear such abuses as for the least of them they would have beheaded twenty kings.

17. What is the explanation of this phenomenon, this curious inconsequence of the masses of the peoples in their attitude towards what would appear to be events of the same order?

18. It is explained by the fact that these dictators whisper to the peoples through their agents that through these abuses they are inflicting injury on the States with the highest purpose – to secure the welfare of the peoples, the international brotherhood of them all, their solidarity and equality of rights. Naturally they do not tell the peoples that this unification must be accomplished only under our sovereign rule.

19. And thus the people condemn the upright and acquit the guilty, persuaded ever more and more that it can do whatsoever it wishes. Thanks to this state of things, the people are destroying every kind of stability and creating disorders at every step.

20. The word “freedom” brings out the communities of men to fight against every kind of force, against every kind of authority even against God and the laws of nature. For this reason we, when we come into our kingdom, shall have to erase this word from the lexicon of life as implying a principle of brute force which turns mobs into bloodthirsty beasts.

21. These beasts, it is true, fall asleep again every time when they have drunk their fill of blood, and at such time can easily be riveted into their chains. But if they be not given blood they will not sleep and continue to struggle

Top of Protocols

Protocol IV

1. Every republic passes through several stages. The first of these is comprised in the early days of mad raging by the blind mob, tossed hither and thither, right and left: the second is demagogy from which is born anarchy, and that leads inevitably to despotism – not any longer legal and overt, and therefore responsible despotism, but to unseen and secretly hidden, yet nevertheless sensibly felt despotism in the hands of some secret organization or other, whose acts are the more unscrupulous inasmuch as it works behind a screen, behind the backs of all sorts of agents, the changing of whom not only does not injuriously affect but actually aids the secret force by saving it, thanks to continual changes, from the necessity of expanding its resources on the rewarding of long services.

2. Who and what is in a position to overthrow an invisible force? And this is precisely what our force is. GENTILE masonry blindly serves as a screen for us and our objects, but the plan of action of our force, even its very abiding-place, remains for the whole people an unknown mystery.


3. But even freedom might be harmless and have its place in the State economy without injury to the well-being of the peoples if it rested upon the foundation of faith in God, upon the brotherhood of humanity, unconnected with the conception of equality, which is negated by the very laws of creation, for they have established subordination. With such a faith as this a people might be governed by a wardship of parishes, and would walk contentedly and humbly under the guiding hand of its spiritual pastor submitting to the dispositions of God upon earth. This is the reason why IT IS INDISPENSABLE FOR US TO UNDERMINE ALL FAITH, TO TEAR OUT OF THE MIND OF THE “GOYIM” THE VERY PRINCIPLE OF GOD-HEAD AND THE SPIRIT, AND TO PUT IN ITS PLACE ARITHMETICAL CALCULATIONS AND MATERIAL NEEDS.

4. In order to give the GOYIM no time to think and take note, their minds must be diverted towards industry and trade. Thus, all the nations will be swallowed up in the pursuit of gain and in the race for it will not take note of their common foe. But again, in order that freedom may once for all disintegrate and ruin the communities of the GOYIM, we must put industry on a speculative basis: the result of this will be that what is withdrawn from the land by industry will slip through the hands and pass into speculation, that is, to our classes.

5. The intensified struggle for superiority and shocks delivered to economic life will create, nay, have already created, disenchanted, cold and heartless communities. Such communities will foster a strong aversion towards the higher political and towards religion. Their only guide is gain, that is Gold, which they will erect into a veritable cult, for the sake of those material delights which it can give. Then will the hour strike when, not for the sake of attaining the good, not even to win wealth, but solely out of hatred towards the privileged, the lower classes of the GOYIM will follow our lead against our rivals for power, the intellectuals of the GOYIM.

Top of Protocols

Protocol V

1. What form of administrative rule can be given to communities in which corruption has penetrated everywhere, communities where riches are attained only by the clever surprise tactics of semi-swindling tricks; where looseness reigns: where morality is maintained by penal measures and harsh laws but not by voluntarily accepted principles: where the feelings towards faith and country are obligated by cosmopolitan convictions? What form of rule is to be given to these communities if not that despotism which I shall describe to you later? We shall create an intensified centralization of government in order to grip in our hands all the forces of the community. We shall regulate mechanically all the actions of the political life of our subjects by new laws. These laws will withdraw one by one all the indulgences and liberties which have been permitted by the GOYIM, and our kingdom will be distinguished by a despotism of such magnificent proportions as to be at any moment and in every place in a position to wipe out any GOYIM who oppose us by deed or word.

2. We shall be told that such a despotism as I speak of is not consistent with the progress of these days, but I will prove to you that is is.

3. In the times when the peoples looked upon kings on their thrones as on a pure manifestation of the will of God, they submitted without a murmur to the despotic power of kings: but from the day when we insinuated into their minds the conception of their own rights they began to regard the occupants of thrones as mere ordinary mortals. The holy unction of the Lord’s Anointed has fallen from the heads of kings in the eyes of the people, and when we also robbed them of their faith in God the might of power was flung upon the streets into the place of public proprietorship and was seized by us.


4. Moreover, the art of directing masses and individuals by means of cleverly manipulated theory and verbitage, by regulations of life in common and all sorts of other quirks, in all which the GOYIM understand nothing, belongs likewise to the specialists of our administrative brain. Reared on analysis, observation, on delicacies of fine calculation, in this species of skill we have no rivals, any more than we have either in the drawing up of plans of political actions and solidarity. In this respect the Jesuits alone might have compared with us, but we have contrived to discredit them in the eyes of the unthinking mob as an overt organization, while we ourselves all the while have kept our secret organization in the shade. However, it is probably all the same to the world who is its sovereign lord, whether the head of Catholicism or our despot of the blood of Zion! But to us, the Chosen People, it is very far from being a matter of indifference.

5. FOR A TIME PERHAPS WE MIGHT BE SUCCESSFULLY DEALT WITH BY A COALITION OF THE “GOYIM” OF ALL THE WORLD: but from this danger we are secured by the discord existing among them whose roots are so deeply seated that they can never now be plucked up. We have set one against another the personal and national reckonings of the GOYIM, religious and race hatreds, which we have fostered into a huge growth in the course of the past twenty centuries. This is the reason why there is not one State which would anywhere receive support if it were to raise its arm, for every one of them must bear in mind that any agreement against us would be unprofitable to itself. We are too strong – there is no evading our power. THE NATIONS CANNOT COME TO EVEN AN INCONSIDERABLE PRIVATE AGREEMENT WITHOUT OUR SECRETLY HAVING A HAND IN IT.

6. PER ME REGES REGNANT. “It is through me that Kings reign.” And it was said by the prophets that we were chosen by God Himself to rule over the whole earth. God has endowed us with genius that we may be equal to our task. Were genius in the opposite camp it would still struggle against us, but even so, a newcomer is no match for the old-established settler: the struggle would be merciless between us, such a fight as the world has never seen. Aye, and the genius on their side would have arrived too late. All the wheels of the machinery of all States go by the force of the engine, which is in our hands, and that engine of the machinery of States is – Gold. The science of political economy invented by our learned elders has for long past been giving royal prestige to capital.


7. Capital, if it is to co-operate untrammeled, must be free to establish a monopoly of industry and trade: this is already being put in execution by an unseen hand in all quarters of the world. This freedom will give political force to those engaged in industry, and that will help to oppress the people. Nowadays it is more important to disarm the peoples than to lead them into war: more important to use for our advantage the passions which have burst into flames than to quench their fire: more important to eradicate them. THE PRINCIPLE OBJECT OF OUR DIRECTORATE CONSISTS IN THIS: TO DEBILITATE THE PUBLIC MIND BY CRITICISM; TO LEAD IT AWAY FROM SERIOUS REFLECTIONS CALCULATED TO AROUSE RESISTANCE; TO DISTRACT THE FORCES OF THE MIND TOWARDS A SHAM FIGHT OF EMPTY ELOQUENCE.

8. In all ages the people of the world, equally with individuals, have accepted words for deeds, for THEY ARE CONTENT WITH A SHOW and rarely pause to note, in the public arena, whether promises are followed by performance. Therefore we shall establish show institutions which will give eloquent proof of their benefit to progress.

9. We shall assume to ourselves the liberal physiognomy of all parties, of all directions, and we shall give that physiognomy a VOICE IN ORATORS WHO WILL SPEAK SO MUCH THAT THEY WILL EXHAUST THE PATIENCE OF THEIR HEARERS AND PRODUCE AN ABHORRENCE OF ORATORY.


11. The second secret requisite for the success of our government is comprised in the following: To multiply to such an extent national failings, habits, passions, conditions of civil life, that it will be impossible for anyone to know where he is in the resulting chaos, so that the people in consequence will fail to understand one another. This measure will also serve us in another way, namely, to sow discord in all parties, to dislocate all collective forces which are still unwilling to submit to us, and to discourage any kind of personal initiative which might in any degree hinder our affair. THERE IS NOTHING MORE DANGEROUS THAN PERSONAL INITIATIVE: if it has genius behind it, such initiative can do more than can be done by millions of people among whom we have sown discord. We must so direct the education of the GOYIM communities that whenever they come upon a matter requiring initiative they may drop their hands in despairing impotence. The strain which results from freedom of actions saps the forces when it meets with the freedom of another. From this collision arise grave moral shocks, disenchantments, failures. BY ALL THESE MEANS WE SHALL SO WEAR DOWN THE “GOYIM” THAT THEY WILL BE COMPELLED TO OFFER US INTERNATIONAL POWER OF A NATURE THAT BY ITS POSITION WILL ENABLE US WITHOUT ANY VIOLENCE GRADUALLY TO ABSORB ALL THE STATE FORCES OF THE WORLD AND TO FORM A SUPER-GOVERNMENT.

In place of the rulers of to-day we shall set up a bogey which will be called the Super-Government Administration. Its hands will reach out in all directions like nippers and its organization will be of such colossal dimensions that it cannot fail to subdue all the nations of the world.

Top of Protocols

Protocol VI

1. We shall soon begin to establish huge monopolies, reservoirs of colossal riches, upon which even, large fortunes of the GOYIM will depend to such an extent that they will go to the bottom together with the credit of the States on the day after the political smash …

2. You gentlemen here present who are economists, just strike an estimate of the significance of this combination! …

3. In every possible way we must develop the significance of our Super-Government by representing it as the Protector and Benefactor of all those who voluntarily submit to us.

4. The aristocracy of the GOYIM as a political force, is dead – We need not take it into account; but as landed proprietors they can still be harmful to us from the fact that they are self-sufficing in the resources upon which they live. It is essential therefore for us at whatever cost to deprive them of their land. This object will be best attained by increasing the burdens upon landed property – in loading lands with debts. These measures will check land- holding and keep it in a state of humble and unconditional submission.

5. The aristocrats of the GOYIM, being hereditarily incapable of contenting themselves with little, will rapidly burn up and fizzle out.


6. At the same time we must intensively patronize trade and industry, but, first and foremost, speculation, the part played by which is to provide a counterpoise to industry: the absence of speculative industry will multiply capital in private hands and will serve to restore agriculture by freeing the land from indebtedness to the land banks. What we want is that industry should drain off from the land both labor and capital and by means of speculation transfer into our hands all the money of the world, and thereby throw all the GOYIM into the ranks of the proletariat. Then the GOYIM will bow down before us, if for no other reason but to get the right to exist.



Top of Protocols

Protocol VII

1. The intensification of armaments, the increase of police forces – are all essential for the completion of the aforementioned plans. What we have to get at is that there should be in all the States of the world, besides ourselves, only the masses of the proletariat, a few millionaires devoted to our interests, police and soldiers.

2. Throughout all Europe, and by means of relations with Europe, in other continents also, we must create ferments, discords and hostility. Therein we gain a double advantage. In the first place we keep in check all countries, for they will know that we have the power whenever we like to create disorders or to restore order. All these countries are accustomed to see in us an indispensable force of coercion. In the second place, by our intrigues we shall tangle up all the threads which we have stretched into the cabinets of all States by means of the political, by economic treaties, or loan obligations. In order to succeed in this we must use great cunning and penetration during negotiations and agreements, but, as regards what is called the “official language,” we shall keep to the opposite tactics and assume the mask of honesty and complacency. In this way the peoples and governments of the GOYIM, whom we have taught to look only at the outside whatever we present to their notice, will still continue to accept us as the benefactors and saviours of the human race.


3. We must be in a position to respond to every act of opposition by war with the neighbors of that country which dares to oppose us: but if these neighbors should also venture to stand collectively together against us, then we must offer resistance by a universal war.

4. The principal factor of success in the political is the secrecy of its undertakings: the word should not agree with the deeds of the diplomat.

5. We must compel the governments of the GOYIM to take action in the direction favored by our widely conceived plan, already approaching the desired consummation, by what we shall represent as public opinion, secretly promoted by us through the means of that so-called “Great Power” – THE PRESS, WHICH, WITH A FEW EXCEPTIONS THAT MAY BE DISREGARDED, IS ALREADY ENTIRELY IN OUR HANDS.

In a word, to sum up our system of keeping the governments of the goyim in Europe in check, we shall show our strength to one of them by terrorist attempts and to all, if we allow the possibility of a general rising against us, we shall respond with the guns of America or China or Japan.

Top of Protocols

Protocol VIII

1. We must arm ourselves with all the weapons which our opponents might employ against us. We must search out in the very finest shades of expression and the knotty points of the lexicon of law justification for those cases where we shall have to pronounce judgments that might appear abnormally audacious and unjust, for it is important that these resolutions should be set forth in expressions that shall seem to be the most exalted moral principles cast into legal form. Our directorate must surround itself with all these forces of civilization among which it will have to work. It will surround itself with publicists, practical jurists, administrators, diplomats and, finally, with persons prepared by a special super-educational training IN OUR SPECIAL SCHOOLS. These persons will have consonance of all the secrets of the social structure, they will know all the languages that can be made up by political alphabets and words; they will be made acquainted with the whole underside of human nature, with all its sensitive chords on which they will have to play. These chords are the cast of mind of the GOYIM, their tendencies, short-comings, vices and qualities, the particularities of classes and conditions. Needless to say that the talented assistants of authority, of whom I speak, will be taken not from among the GOYIM, who are accustomed to perform their administrative work without giving themselves the trouble to think what its aim is, and never consider what it is needed for. The administrators of the GOYIM sign papers without reading them, and they serve either for mercenary reasons or from ambition.

2. We shall surround our government with a whole world of economists. That is the reason why economic sciences form the principal subject of the teaching given to the Jews. Around us again will be a whole constellation of bankers, industrialists, capitalists and – THE MAIN THING – MILLIONAIRES, BECAUSE IN SUBSTANCE EVERYTHING WILL BE SETTLED BY THE QUESTION OF FIGURES.

3. For a time, until there will no longer be any risk in entrusting responsible posts in our State to our brother-Jews, we shall put them in the hands of persons whose past and reputation are such that between them and the people lies an abyss, persons who, in case of disobedience to our instructions, must face criminal charges or disappear – this in order to make them defend our interests to their last gasp.

Top of Protocols

Protocol IX

1. In applying our principles let attention be paid to the character of the people in whose country you live and act; a general, identical application of them, until such time as the people shall have been re-educated to our pattern, cannot have success. But by approaching their application cautiously you will see that not a decade will pass before the most stubborn character will change and we shall add a new people to the ranks of those already subdued by us.

2. The words of the liberal, which are in effect the words of our masonic watchword, namely, “Liberty, Equality, Fraternity,” will, when we come into our kingdom, be changed by us into words no longer of a watchword, but only an expression of idealism, namely, into “The right of liberty, the duty of equality, the ideal of brotherhood.” That is how we shall put it, – and so we shall catch the bull by the horns … DE FACTO we have already wiped out every kind of rule except our own, although DE JURE there still remain a good many of them. Nowadays, if any States raise a protest against us it is only PRO FORMA at our discretion and by our direction, for THEIR ANTI-SEMITISM IS INDISPENSABLE TO US FOR THE MANAGEMENT OF OUR LESSER BRETHREN. I will not enter into further explanations, for this matter has formed the subject of repeated discussions amongst us.


3. For us there are not checks to limit the range of our activity. Our Super-Government subsists in extra-legal conditions which are described in the accepted terminology by the energetic and forcible word – Dictatorship. I am in a position to tell you with a clear conscience that at the proper time we, the law-givers, shall execute judgment and sentence, we shall slay and we shall spare, we, as head of all our troops, are mounted on the steed of the leader. We rule by force of will, because in our hands are the fragments of a once powerful party, now vanquished by us. AND THE WEAPONS IN OUR HANDS ARE LIMITLESS AMBITIONS, BURNING GREEDINESS, MERCILESS VENGEANCE, HATREDS AND MALICE.


5. The people have raised a howl about the necessity of settling the question of Socialism by way of an international agreement. DIVISION INTO FRACTIONAL PARTIES HAS GIVEN THEM INTO OUR HANDS, FOR, IN ORDER TO CARRY ON A CONTESTED STRUGGLE ONE MUST HAVE MONEY, AND THE MONEY IS ALL IN OUR HANDS.

6. We might have reason to apprehend a union between the “clear-sighted” force of the GOY kings on their thrones and the “blind” force of the GOY mobs, but we have taken all the needful measure against any such possibility: between the one and the other force we have erected a bulwark in the shape of a mutual terror between them. In this way the blind force of the people remains our support and we, and we only, shall provide them with a leader and, of course, direct them along the road that leads to our goal.

7. In order that the hand of the blind mob may not free itself from our guiding hand, we must every now and then enter into close communion with it, if not actually in person, at any rate through some of the most trusty of our brethren. When we are acknowledged as the only authority we shall discuss with the people personally on the market, places, and we shall instruct them on questings of the political in such wise as may turn them in the direction that suits us.

8. Who is going to verify what is taught in the village schools? But what an envoy of the government or a king on his throne himself may say cannot but become immediately known to the whole State, for it will be spread abroad by the voice of the people.

9. In order to annihilate the institutions of the GOYIM before it is time we have touched them with craft and delicacy, and have taken hold of the ends of the springs which move their mechanism. These springs lay in a strict but just sense of order; we have replaced them by the chaotic license of liberalism. We have got our hands into the administration of the law, into the conduct of elections, into the press, into liberty of the person, BUT PRINCIPALLY INTO EDUCATION AND TRAINING AS BEING THE CORNERSTONES OF A FREE EXISTENCE.



11. Above the existing laws without substantially altering them, and by merely twisting them into contradictions of interpretations, we have erected something grandiose in the way of results. These results found expression in the fact that the INTERPRETATIONS MASKED THE LAW: afterwards they entirely hid them from the eyes of the governments owing to the impossibility of making anything out of the tangled web of legislation.

12. This is the origin of the theory of course of arbitration.

13. You may say that the GOYIM will rise upon us, arms in hand, if they guess what is going on before the time comes; but in the West we have against this a maneuver of such appalling terror that the very stoutest hearts quail – the undergrounds, metropolitans, those subterranean corridors which, before the time comes, will be driven under all the capitals and from whence those capitals will be blown into the air with all their organizations and archives.

Top of Protocols

Protocol X

1. To-day I begin with a repetition of what I said before, and I BEG YOU TO BEAR IN MIND THAT GOVERNMENTS AND PEOPLE ARE CONTENT IN THE POLITICAL WITH OUTSIDE APPEARANCES. And how, indeed, are the GOYIM to perceive the underlying meaning of things when their representatives give the best of their energies to enjoying themselves? For our policy it is of the greatest importance to take cognizance of this detail; it will be of assistance to us when we come to consider the division of authority of property, of the dwelling, of taxation (the idea of concealed taxes), of the reflex force of the laws. All these questions are such as ought not to be touched upon directly and openly before the people. In cases where it is indispensable to touch upon them they must not be categorically named, it must merely be declared without detailed exposition that the principles of contemporary law are acknowledged by us. The reason of keeping silence in this respect is that by not naming a principle we leave ourselves freedom of action, to drop this or that out of it without attracting notice; if they were all categorically named they would all appear to have been already given.

2. The mob cherishes a special affection and respect for the geniuses of political power and accepts all their deeds of violence with the admiring response: “rascally, well, yes, it is rascally, but it’s clever! … a trick, if you like, but how craftily played, how magnificently done, what impudent audacity!” …


3. We count upon attracting all nations to the task of erecting the new fundamental structure, the project for which has been drawn up by us. This is why, before everything, it is indispensable for us to arm ourselves and to store up in ourselves that absolutely reckless audacity and irresistible might of the spirit which in the person of our active workers will break down all hindrances on our way.


5. TO SECURE THIS WE MUST HAVE EVERYBODY VOTE WITHOUT DISTINCTION OF CLASSES AND QUALIFICATIONS, in order to establish an absolute majority, which cannot be got from the educated propertied classes. In this way, by inculcating in all a sense of self-importance, we shall destroy among the GOYIM the importance of the family and its educational value and remove the possibility of individual minds splitting off, for the mob, handled by us, will not let them come to the front nor even give them a hearing; it is accustomed to listen to us only who pay it for obedience and attention. In this way we shall create a blind, mighty force which will never be in a position to move in any direction without the guidance of our agents set at its head by us as leaders of the mob. The people will submit to this regime because it will know that upon these leaders will depend its earnings, gratifications and the receipt of all kinds of benefits.

6. A scheme of government should come ready made from one brain, because it will never be clinched firmly if it is allowed to be split into fractional parts in the minds of many. It is allowable, therefore, for us to have cognizance of the scheme of action but not to discuss it lest we disturb its artfulness, the interdependence of its component parts, the practical force of the secret meaning of each clause. To discuss and make alterations in a labor of this kind by means of numerous votings is to impress upon it the stamp of all ratiocinations and misunderstandings which have failed to penetrate the depth and nexus of its plotting. We want our schemes to be forcible and suitably concocted. Therefore WE OUGHT NOT TO FLING THE WORK OF GENIUS OF OUR GUIDE to the fangs of the mob or even of a select company.

7. These schemes will not turn existing institutions upside down just yet. They will only effect changes in their economy and consequently in the whole combined movement of their progress, which will thus be directed along the paths laid down in our schemes.


8. Under various names there exists in all countries approximately one and the same thing. Representation, Ministry, Senate, State Council, Legislative and Executive Corps. I need not explain to you the mechanism of the relation of these institutions to one another, because you are aware of all that; only take note of the fact that each of the above-named institutions corresponds to some important function of the State, and I would beg you to remark that the word “important” I apply not to the institution but to the function, consequently it is not the institutions which are important but their functions. These institutions have divided up among themselves all the functions of government – administrative, legislative, executive, wherefore they have come to operate as do the organs in the human body. If we injure one part in the machinery of State, the State falls sick, like a human body, and … will die.

9. When we introduced into the State organism the poison of Liberalism its whole political complexion underwent a change. States have been seized with a mortal illness – blood poisoning. All that remains is to await the end of their death agony.

10. Liberalism produced Constitutional States, which took the place of what was the only safeguard of the GOYIM, namely, Despotism; and A CONSTITUTION, AS YOU WELL KNOW, IS NOTHING ELSE BUT A SCHOOL OF DISCORDS, misunderstandings, quarrels, disagreements, fruitless party agitations, party whims – in a word, a school of everything that serves to destroy the personality of State activity. THE TRIBUNE OF THE “TALKERICS” HAS, NO LESS EFFECTIVELY THAN THE PRESS, CONDEMNED THE RULERS TO INACTIVITY AND IMPOTENCE, and thereby rendered them useless and superfluous, for which reason indeed they have been in many countries deposed. THEN IT WAS THAT THE ERA OF REPUBLICS BECOME POSSIBLE OF REALIZATION; AND THEN IT WAS THAT WE REPLACED THE RULER BY A CARICATURE OF A GOVERNMENT – BY A PRESIDENT, TAKEN FROM THE MOB, FROM THE MIDST OF OUR PUPPET CREATURES, OR SLAVES. This was the foundation of the mine which we have laid under the GOY people, I should rather say, under the GOY peoples.


11. In the near future we shall establish the responsibility of presidents.

12. By that time we shall be in a position to disregard forms in carrying through matters for which our impersonal puppet will be responsible. What do we care if the ranks of those striving for power should be thinned, if there should arise a deadlock from the impossibility of finding presidents, a deadlock which will finally disorganize the country? …

13. In order that our scheme may produce this result we shall arrange elections in favor of such presidents as have in their past some dark, undiscovered stain, some “Panama” or other – then they will be trustworthy agents for the accomplishment of our plans out of fear of revelations and from the natural desire of everyone who has attained power, namely, the retention of the privileges, advantages and honor connected with the office of president. The chamber of deputies will provide cover for, will protect, will elect presidents, but we shall take from it the right to propose new, or make changes in existing laws, for this right will be given by us to the responsible president, a puppet in our hands. Naturally, the authority of the presidents will then become a target for every possible form of attack, but we shall provide him with a means of self-defense in the right of an appeal to the people, for the decision of the people over the heads of their representatives, that is to say, an appeal to that some blind slave of ours – the majority of the mob. Independently of this we shall invest the president with the right of declaring a state of war. We shall justify this last right on the ground that the president as chief of the whole army of the country must have it at his disposal, in case of need for the defense of the new republican constitution, the right to defend which will belong to him as the responsible representative of this constitution.

14. It is easy to understand them in these conditions the key of the shrine will lie in our hands, and no one outside ourselves will any longer direct the force of legislation.

15. Besides this we shall, with the introduction of the new republican constitution, take from the Chamber the right of interpolation on government measures, on the pretext of preserving political secrecy, and, further, we shall by the new constitution reduce the number of representatives to a minimum, thereby proportionately reducing political passions and the passion for politics. If, however, they should, which is hardly to be expected, burst into flame, even in this minimum, we shall nullify them by a stirring appeal and a reference to the majority of the whole people … Upon the president will depend the appointment of presidents and vice-presidents of the Chamber and the Senate. Instead of constant sessions of Parliaments we shall reduce their sittings to a few months. Moreover, the president, as chief of the executive power, will have the right to summon and dissolve Parliament, and, in the latter case, to prolong the time for the appointment of a new parliamentary assembly. But in order that the consequences of all these acts which in substance are illegal, should not, prematurely for our plans, upon the responsibility established by use of the president, WE SHALL INSTIGATE MINISTERS AND OTHER OFFICIALS OF THE HIGHER ADMINISTRATION ABOUT THE PRESIDENT TO EVADE HIS DISPOSITIONS BY TAKING MEASURES OF THEIR OWN, for doing which they will be made the scapegoats in his place … This part we especially recommend to be given to be played by the Senate, the Council of State, or the Council of Ministers, but not to an individual official.

16. The president will, at our discretion, interpret the sense of such of the existing laws as admit of various interpretation; he will further annul them when we indicate to him the necessity to do so, besides this, he will have the right to propose temporary laws, and even new departures in the government constitutional working, the pretext both for the one and the other being the requirements for the supreme welfare of the State.


17. By such measure we shall obtain the power of destroying little by little, step by step, all that at the outset when we enter on our rights, we are compelled to introduce into the constitutions of States to prepare for the transition to an imperceptible abolition of every kind of constitution, and then the time is come to turn every form of government into OUR DESPOTISM.

18. The recognition of our despot may also come before the destruction of the constitution; the moment for this recognition will come when the peoples, utterly wearied by the irregularities and incompetence – a matter which we shall arrange for – of their rulers, will clamor: “Away with them and give us one king over all the earth who will unite us and annihilate the causes of disorders – frontiers, nationalities, religions, State debts – who will give us peace and quiet which we cannot find under our rulers and representatives.”


20. But if we give the nations of the world a breathing space the moment we long for is hardly likely ever to arrive.

Top of Protocols

Protocol XI

1. The State Council has been, as it were, the emphatic expression of the authority of the ruler: it will be, as the “show” part of the Legislative Corps, what may be called the editorial committee of the laws and decrees of the ruler.

2. This, then, is the program of the new constitution. We shall make Law, Right and Justice (1) in the guise of proposals to the Legislative Corps, (2) by decrees of the president under the guise of general regulations, of orders of the Senate and of resolutions of the State Council in the guise of ministerial orders, (3) and in case a suitable occasion should arise – in the form of a revolution in the State.

3. Having established approximately the MODUS AGENDI we will occupy ourselves with details of those combinations by which we have still to complete the revolution in the course of the machinery of State in the direction already indicated. By these combinations I mean the freedom of the Press, the right of association, freedom of conscience, the voting principle, and many another that must disappear for ever from the memory of man, or undergo a radical alteration the day after the promulgation of the new constitution. It is only at the moment that we shall be able at once to announce all our orders, for, afterwards, every noticeable alteration will be dangerous, for the following reasons: if this alteration be brought in with harsh severity and in a sense of severity and limitations, it may lead to a feeling of despair caused by fear of new alterations in the same direction; if, on the other hand, it be brought in a sense of further indulgences it will be said that we have recognized our own wrong-doing and this will destroy the prestige of the infallibility of our authority, or else it will be said that we have become alarmed and are compelled to show a yielding disposition, for which we shall get no thanks because it will be supposed to be compulsory … Both the one and the other are injurious to the prestige of the new constitution. What we want is that from the first moment of its promulgation, while the peoples of the world are still stunned by the accomplished fact of the revolution, still in a condition of terror and uncertainty, they should recognize once for all that we are so strong, so inexpugnable, so super-abundantly filled with power, that in no case shall we take any account of them, and so far from paying any attention to their opinions or wishes, we are ready and able to crush with irresistible power all expression or manifestation thereof at every moment and in every place, that we have seized at once everything we wanted and shall in no case divide our power with them … Then in fear and trembling they will close their eyes to everything, and be content to await what will be the end of it all.


4. The GOYIM are a flock of sheep, and we are their wolves. And you know what happens when the wolves get hold of the flock? ….

5. There is another reason also why they will close their eyes: for we shall keep promising them to give back all the liberties we have taken away as soon as we have quelled the enemies of peace and tamed all parties ….

6. It is not worth to say anything about how long a time they will be kept waiting for this return of their liberties ….

7. For what purpose then have we invented this whole policy and insinuated it into the minds of the GOY without giving them any chance to examine its underlying meaning? For what, indeed, if not in order to obtain in a roundabout way what is for our scattered tribe unattainable by the direct road? It is this which has served as the basis for our organization of SECRET MASONRY WHICH IS NOT KNOWN TO, AND AIMS WHICH ARE NOT EVEN SO MUCH AS SUSPECTED BY, THESE “GOY” CATTLE, ATTRACTED BY US INTO THE “SHOW” ARMY OF MASONIC LODGES IN ORDER TO THROW DUST IN THE EYES OF THEIR FELLOWS.

8. God has granted to us, His Chosen People, the gift of the dispersion, and in this which appears in all eyes to be our weakness, has come forth all our strength, which has now brought us to the threshold of sovereignty over all the world.

9. There now remains not much more for us to build up upon the foundation we have laid.

Top of Protocols

Protocol XII

1. The word “freedom,” which can be interpreted in various ways, is defined by us as follows –

2. Freedom is the right to do what which the law allows. This interpretation of the word will at the proper time be of service to us, because all freedom will thus be in our hands, since the laws will abolish or create only that which is desirable for us according to the aforesaid program.

3. We shall deal with the press in the following way: what is the part played by the press to-day? It serves to excite and inflame those passions which are needed for our purpose or else it serves selfish ends of parties. It is often vapid, unjust, mendacious, and the majority of the public have not the slightest idea what ends the press really serves. We shall saddle and bridle it with a tight curb: we shall do the same also with all productions of the printing press, for where would be the sense of getting rid of the attacks of the press if we remain targets for pamphlets and books? The produce of publicity, which nowadays is a source of heavy expense owing to the necessity of censoring it, will be turned by us into a very lucrative source of income to our State: we shall law on it a special stamp tax and require deposits of caution-money before permitting the establishment of any organ of the press or of printing offices; these will then have to guarantee our government against any kind of attack on the part of the press. For any attempt to attack us, if such still be possible, we shall inflict fines without mercy. Such measures as stamp tax, deposit of caution-money and fines secured by these deposits, will bring in a huge income to the government. It is true that party organs might not spare money for the sake of publicity, but these we shall shut up at the second attack upon us. No one shall with impunity lay a finger on the aureole of our government infallibility. The pretext for stopping any publication will be the alleged plea that it is agitating the public mind without occasion or justification. I BEG YOU TO NOTE THAT AMONG THOSE MAKING ATTACKS UPON US WILL ALSO BE ORGANS ESTABLISHED BY US, BUT THEY WILL ATTACK EXCLUSIVELY POINTS THAT WE HAVE PRE-DETERMINED TO ALTER.


4. NOT A SINGLE ANNOUNCEMENT WILL REACH THE PUBLIC WITHOUT OUR CONTROL. Even now this is already being attained by us inasmuch as all news items are received by a few agencies, in whose offices they are focused from all parts of the world. These agencies will then be already entirely ours and will give publicity only to what we dictate to them.

5. If already now we have contrived to possess ourselves of the minds of the GOY communities to such an extent the they all come near looking upon the events of the world through the colored glasses of those spectacles we are setting astride their noses; if already now there is not a single State where there exist for us any barriers to admittance into what GOY stupidity calls State secrets: what will our positions be then, when we shall be acknowledged supreme lords of the world in the person of our king of all the world ….

6. Let us turn again to the FUTURE OF THE PRINTING PRESS. Every one desirous of being a publisher, librarian, or printer, will be obliged to provide himself with the diploma instituted therefore, which, in case of any fault, will be immediately impounded. With such measures THE INSTRUMENT OF THOUGHT WILL BECOME AN EDUCATIVE MEANS ON THE HANDS OF OUR GOVERNMENT, WHICH WILL NO LONGER ALLOW THE MASS OF THE NATION TO BE LED ASTRAY IN BY-WAYS AND FANTASIES ABOUT THE BLESSINGS OF PROGRESS. Is there any one of us who does not know that these phantom blessings are the direct roads to foolish imaginings which give birth to anarchical relations of men among themselves and towards authority, because progress, or rather the idea of progress, has introduced the conception of every kind of emancipation, but has failed to establish its limits …. All the so-called liberals are anarchists, if not in fact, at any rate in thought. Every one of them in hunting after phantoms of freedom, and falling exclusively into license, that is, into the anarchy of protest for the sake of protest ….


7. We turn to the periodical press. We shall impose on it, as on all printed matter, stamp taxes per sheet and deposits of caution- money, and books of less than 30 sheets will pay double. We shall reckon them as pamphlets in order, on the one hand, to reduce the number of magazines, which are the worst form of printed poison, and, on the other, in order that this measure may force writers into such lengthy productions that they will be little read, especially as they will be costly. At the same time what we shall publish ourselves to influence mental development in the direction laid down for our profit will be cheap and will be read voraciously. The tax will bring vapid literary ambitions within bounds and the liability to penalties will make literary men dependent upon us. And if there should be any found who are desirous of writing against us, they will not find any person eager to print their productions in print the publisher or printer will have to apply to the authorities for permission to do so. Thus we shall know beforehand of all tricks preparing against us and shall nullify them by getting ahead with explanations on the subject treated of.

8. Literature and journalism are two of the most important educative forces, and therefore our government will become proprietor of the majority of the journals. This will neutralize the injurious influence of the privately-owned press and will put us in possession of a tremendous influence upon the public mind …. If we give permits for ten journals, we shall ourselves found thirty, and so on in the same proportion. This, however, must in no wise be suspected by the public. For which reason all journals published by us will be of the most opposite, in appearance, tendencies and opinions, thereby creating confidence in us and bringing over to us quite unsuspicious opponents, who will thus fall into our trap and be rendered harmless.

9. In the front rank will stand organs of an official character. They will always stand guard over our interests, and therefore their influence will be comparatively insignificant.

10. In the second rank will be the semi-official organs, whose part it will be to attack the tepid and indifferent.

11. In the third rank we shall set up our own, to all appearance, off position, which, in at least one of its organs, will present what looks like the very antipodes to us. Our real opponents at heart will accept this simulated opposition as their own and will show us their cards.

12. All our newspapers will be of all possible complexions – aristocratic, republican, revolutionary, even anarchical – for so long, of course, as the constitution exists …. Like the Indian idol “Vishnu” they will have a hundred hands, and every one of them will have a finger on any one of the public opinions as required. When a pulse quickens these hands will lead opinion in the direction of our aims, for an excited patient loses all power of judgment and easily yields to suggestion. Those fools who will think they are repeating the opinion of a newspaper of their own camp will be repeating our opinion or any opinion that seems desirable for us. In the vain belief that they are following the organ of their party they will, in fact, follow the flag which we hang out for them.

13. In order to direct our newspaper militia in this sense we must take special and minute care in organizing this matter. Under the title of central department of the press we shall institute literary gatherings at which our agents will without attracting attention issue the orders and watchwords of the day. By discussing and controverting, but always superficially, without touching the essence of the matter, our organs will carry on a sham fight fusillade with the official newspapers solely for the purpose of giving occasion for us to express ourselves more fully than could well be done from the outset in official announcements, whenever, of course, that is to our advantage.



15. Methods of organization like these, imperceptible to the public eye but absolutely sure, are the best calculated to succeed in bringing the attention and the confidence of the public to the side of our government. Thanks to such methods we shall be in a position as from time to time may be required, to excite or to tranquilize the public mind on political questions, to persuade or to confuse, printing now truth, now lies, facts or their contradictions, according as they may be well or ill received, always very cautiously feeling our ground before stepping upon it …. WE SHALL HAVE A SURE TRIUMPH OVER OUR OPPONENTS SINCE THEY WILL NOT HAVE AT THEIR DISPOSITION ORGANS OF THE PRESS IN WHICH THEY CAN GIVE FULL AND FINAL EXPRESSION TO THEIR VIEWS owing to the aforesaid methods of dealing with the press. We shall not even need to refute them except very superficially.

16. Trial shots like these, fired by us in the third rank of our press, in case of need, will be energetically refuted by us in our semi-official organs.

17. Even nowadays, already, to take only the French press, there are forms which reveal masonic solidarity in acting on the watchword: all organs of the press are bound together by professional secrecy; like the augurs of old, not one of their numbers will give away the secret of his sources of information unless it be resolved to make announcement of them. Not one journalist will venture to betray this secret, for not one of them is ever admitted to practice literature unless his whole past has some disgraceful sore or other …. These sores would be immediately revealed. So long as they remain the secret of a few the prestige of the journalist attacks the majority of the country – the mob follow after him with enthusiasm.

18. Our calculations are especially extended to the provinces. It is indispensable for us to inflame there those hopes and impulses with which we could at any moment fall upon the capital, and we shall represent to the capitals that these expressions are the independent hopes and impulses of the provinces. Naturally, the source of them will be always one and the same – ours. WHAT WE NEED IS THAT, UNTIL SUCH TIME AS WE ARE IN THE PLENITUDE POWER, THE CAPITALS SHOULD FIND THEMSELVES STIFLED BY THE PROVINCIAL OPINION OF THE NATIONS, I.E., OF A MAJORITY ARRANGED BY OUR AGENTUR. What we need is that at the psychological moment the capitals should not be in a position to discuss an accomplished fact for the simple reason, if for no other, that it has been accepted by the public opinion of a majority in the provinces. 19. WHEN WE ARE IN THE PERIOD OF THE NEW REGIME TRANSITIONAL TO THAT OF OUR ASSUMPTION OF FULL SOVEREIGNTY WE MUST NOT ADMIT ANY REVELATION BY THE PRESS OF ANY FORM OF PUBLIC DISHONESTY; IT IS NECESSARY THAT THE NEW REGIME SHOULD BE THOUGHT TO HAVE SO PERFECTLY CONTENDED EVERYBODY THAT EVEN CRIMINALITY HAS DISAPPEARED … Cases of the manifestation of criminality should remain known only to their victims and to chance witnesses – no more.

Top of Protocols

Protocol XIII

1. The need for daily forces the GOYIM to keep silence and be our humble servants. Agents taken on to our press from among the GOYIM will at our orders discuss anything which it is inconvenient for us to issue directly in official documents, and we meanwhile, quietly amid the din of the discussion so raised, shall simply take and carry through such measures as we wish and then offer them to the public as an accomplished fact. No one will dare to demand the abrogation of a matter once settled, all the more so as it will be represented as an improvement … And immediately the press will distract the current of thought towards, new questions, (have we not trained people always to be seeking something new?). Into the discussions of these new questions will throw themselves those of the brainless dispensers of fortunes who are not able even now to understand that they have not the remotest conception about the matters which they undertake to discuss. Questions of the political are unattainable for any save those who have guided it already for many ages, the creators.

2. From all this you will see that in seeming the opinion of the mob we are only facilitating the working of our machinery, and you may remark that it is not for actions but for words issued by us on this or that question that we seem to seek approval. We are constantly making public declaration that we are guided in all our undertakings by the hope, joined to the conviction, that we are serving the common weal.


3. In order to distract people who may be too troublesome from discussions of questions of the political we are now putting forward what we allege to be new questions of the political, namely, questions of industry. In this sphere let them discuss themselves silly! The masses are agreed to remain inactive, to take a rest from what they suppose to be political (which we trained them to in order to use them as a means of combating the GOY governments) only on condition of being found new employments, in which we are prescribing them something that looks like the same political object. In order that the masses themselves may not guess what they are about WE FURTHER DISTRACT THEM WITH AMUSEMENTS, GAMES, PASTIMES, PASSIONS, PEOPLE’S PALACES …. SOON WE SHALL BEGIN THROUGH THE PRESS TO PROPOSE COMPETITIONS IN ART, IN SPORT IN ALL KINDS: these interests will finally distract their minds from questions in which we should find ourselves compelled to oppose them. Growing more and more disaccustomed to reflect and form any opinions of their own, people will begin to talk in the same tone as we because we alone shall be offering them new directions for thought … of course through such persons as will not be suspected of solidarity with us.

4. The part played by the liberals, utopian dreamers, will be finally played out when our government is acknowledged. Till such time they will continue to do us good service. Therefore we shall continue to direct their minds to all sorts of vain conceptions of fantastic theories, new and apparently progressive: for have we not with complete success turned the brainless heads of the GOYIM with progress, till there is not among the GOYIM one mind able to perceive that under this word lies a departure from truth in all cases where it is not a question of material inventions, like a fallacious idea, serves to obscure truth so that none may know it except us, the Chosen of God, its guardians.

5. When, we come into our kingdom our orators will expound great problems which have turned humanity upside down in order to bring it at the end under our beneficent rule.


Top of Protocols

Protocol XIV

1. When we come into our kingdom it will be undesirable for us that there should exist any other religion than ours of the One God with whom our destiny is bound up by our position as the Chosen People and through whom our same destiny is united with the destinies of the world. We must therefore sweep away all other forms of belief. If this gives birth to the atheists whom we see to-day, it will not, being only a transitional stage, interfere with our views, but will serve as a warning for those generations which will hearken to our preaching of the religion of Moses, that, by its stable and thoroughly elaborated system has brought all the peoples of the world into subjection to us. Therein we shall emphasize its mystical right, on which, as we shall say, all its educative power is based …. Then at every possible opportunity we shall publish articles in which we shall make comparisons between our beneficent rule and those of past ages. The blessing of tranquility, though it be a tranquility forcibly brought about by centuries of agitation, will throw into higher relief the benefits to which we shall point. The errors of the GOYIM governments will be depicted by us in the most vivid hues. We shall implant such an abhorrence of them that the peoples will prefer tranquility in a state of serfdom to those rights of vaunted freedom which have tortured humanity and exhausted the very sources of human existence, sources which have been exploited by a mob of rascally adventurers who know not what they do …. USELESS CHANGES OF FORMS OF GOVERNMENT TO WHICH WE INSTIGATED THE “GOYIM” WHEN WE WERE UNDERMINING THEIR STATE STRUCTURES, WILL HAVE SO WEARIED THE PEOPLES BY THAT TIME THAT THEY WILL PREFER TO SUFFER ANYTHING UNDER US RATHER THAN RUN THE RISK OF ENDURING AGAIN ALL THE AGITATIONS AND MISERIES THEY HAVE GONE THROUGH.


2. At the same time we shall not omit to emphasize the historical mistakes of the GOY governments which have tormented humanity for so many centuries by their lack of understanding of everything that constitutes the true good of humanity in their chase after fantastic schemes of social blessings, and have never noticed that these schemes kept on producing a worse and never a better state of the universal relations which are the basis of human life ….

3. The whole force of our principles and methods will lie in the fact that we shall present them and expound them as a splendid contrast to the dead and decomposed old order of things in social life.


5. IN COUNTRIES KNOWN AS PROGRESSIVE AND ENLIGHTENED WE HAVE CREATED A SENSELESS, FILTHY, ABOMINABLE LITERATURE. For some time after our entrance to power we shall continue to encourage its existence in order to provide a telling relief by contrast to the speeches, party program, which will be distributed from exalted quarters of ours …. Our wise men, trained to become leaders of the GOYIM, will compose speeches, projects, memoirs, articles, which will be used by us to influence the minds of the GOYIM, directing them towards such understanding and forms of knowledge as have been determined by us.

Top of Protocols

Protocol XV

1. When we at last definitely come into our kingdom by the aid of COUPS D’ETAT prepared everywhere for one and the same day, after definitely acknowledged (and not a little time will pass before that comes about, perhaps even a whole century) we shall make it our task to see that against us such things as plots shall no longer exist. With this purpose we shall slay without mercy all who take arms (in hand) to oppose our coming into our kingdom. Every kind of new institution of anything like a secret society will also be punished with death; those of them which are now in existence, are known to us, serve us and have served us, we shall disband and send into exile to continents far removed from Europe. IN THIS WAY WE SHALL PROCEED WITH THOSE “GOY” MASONS WHO KNOW TOO MUCH; such of these as we may for some reason spare will be kept in constant fear of exile. We shall promulgate a law making all former members of secret societies liable to exile from Europe as the center of rule.

2. Resolutions of our government will be final, without appeal.

3. In the GOY societies, in which we have planted and deeply rooted discord and protestantism, the only possible way of restoring order is to employ merciless measures that prove the direct force of authority: no regard must be paid to the victims who fall, they suffer for the well-being of the future. The attainment of that well-being, even at the expense of sacrifices, is the duty of any kind of government that acknowledges as justification for its existence not only its privileges but its obligations. The principal guarantee of stability of rule is to confirm the aureole of power, and this aureole is attained only by such a majestic inflexibility of might as shall carry on its face the emblems of inviolability from mystical causes – from the choice of God. SUCH WAS, UNTIL RECENT TIMES, THE RUSSIAN AUTOCRACY, THE ONE AND ONLY SERIOUS FOE WE HAD IN THE WORLD, WITHOUT COUNTING THE PAPACY. Bear in mind the example when Italy, drenched with blood, never touched a hair of the head of Sulla who had poured forth that blood: Sulla enjoyed an apotheosis for his might in him, but his intrepid return to Italy ringed him round with inviolability. The people do not lay a finger on him who hypnotizes them by his daring and strength of mind.


4. Meantime, however, until we come into our kingdom, we shall act in the contrary way: we shall create and multiply free masonic lodges in all the countries of the world, absorb into them all who may become or who are prominent in public activity, for these lodges we shall find our principal intelligence office and means of influence. All these lodges we shall bring under one central administration, known to us alone and to all others absolutely unknown, which will be composed of our learned elders. The lodges will have their representatives who will serve to screen the above-mentioned administration of MASONRY and from whom will issue the watchword and program. In these lodges we shall tie together the knot which binds together all revolutionary and liberal elements. Their composition will be made up of all strata of society. The most secret political plots will be known to us and fall under our guiding hands on the very day of their conception. AMONG THE MEMBERS OF THESE LODGES WILL BE ALMOST ALL THE AGENTS OF INTERNATIONAL AND NATIONAL POLICE since their service is for us irreplaceable in the respect that the police is in a position not only to use its own particular measures with the insubordinate, but also to screen our activities and provide pretexts for discontents, ET CETERA.

5. The class of people who most willingly enter into secret societies are those who live by their wits, careerists, and in general people, mostly light-minded, with whom we shall have no difficulty in dealing and in using to wind up the mechanism of the machine devised by us. If this world grows agitated the meaning of that will be that we have had to stir up in order to break up its too great solidarity. BUT IF THERE SHOULD ARISE IN ITS MIDST A PLOT, THEN AT THE HEAD OF THAT PLOT WILL BE NO OTHER THAN ONE OF OUR MOST TRUSTED SERVANTS. It is natural that we and no other should lead MASONIC activities, for we know whither we are leading, we know the final goal of every form of activity whereas the GOYIM have knowledge of nothing, not even of the immediate effect of action; they put before themselves, usually, the momentary reckoning of the satisfaction of their self- opinion in the accomplishment of their thought without even remarking that the very conception never belonged to their initiative but to our instigation of their thought ….


6. The GOYIM enter the lodges out of curiosity or in the hope by their means to get a nibble at the public pie, and some of them in order to obtain a hearing before the public for their impracticable and groundless fantasies: they thirst for the emotion of success and applause, of which we are remarkably generous. And the reason why we give them this success is to make use of the nigh conceit of themselves to which it gives birth, for that insensibly disposes them to assimilate our suggestions without being on their guard against them in the fullness of their confidence that it is their own infallibility which is giving utterance to their own thoughts and that it is impossible for them to borrow those of others …. You cannot imagine to what extent the wisest of the GOYIM can be brought to a state of unconscious naivete in the presence of this condition of high conceit of themselves, and at the same time how easy it is to take the heart out of them by the slightest ill-success, though it be nothing more than the stoppage of the applause they had, and to reduce them to a slavish submission for the sake of winning a renewal of success …. BY SO MUCH AS OURS DISREGARD SUCCESS IF ONLY THEY CAN CARRY THROUGH THEIR PLANS, BY SO MUCH THE “GOYIM” ARE WILLING TO SACRIFICE ANY PLANS ONLY TO HAVE SUCCESS. This psychology of theirs materially facilitates for us the task of setting them in the required direction. These tigers in appearance have the souls of sheep and the wind blows freely through their heads. We have set them on the hobby-horse of an idea about the absorption of individuality by the symbolic unit of COLLECTIVISM …. They have never yet and they never will have the sense to reflect that this hobby-horse is a manifest violation of the most important law of nature, which has established from the very creation of the world one unit unlike another and precisely for the purpose of instituting individuality ….

7. If we have been able to bring them to such a pitch of stupid blindness is it not a proof, and an amazingly clear proof, of the degree to which the mind of the GOYIM is undeveloped in comparison with our mind? This it is, mainly, which guarantees our success.


8. And how far-seeing were our learned elders in ancient times when they said that to attain a serious end it behooves not to stop at any means or to count the victims sacrificed for the sake of that end …. We have not counted the victims of the seed of the GOY cattle, though we have sacrificed many of our own, but for that we have now already given them such a position on the earth as they could not even have dreamed of. The comparatively small numbers of the victims from the number of ours have preserved our nationality from destruction.

9. Death is the inevitable end for all. It is better to bring that end nearer to those who hinder our affairs than to ourselves, to the founders of this affair. WE EXECUTE MASONS IN SUCH WISE THAT NONE SAVE THE BROTHERHOOD CAN EVER HAVE A SUSPICION OF IT, NOT EVEN THE VICTIMS THEMSELVES OF OUR DEATH SENTENCE, THEY ALL DIE WHEN REQUIRED AS IF FROM A NORMAL KIND OF ILLNESS ….. Knowing this, even the brotherhood in its turn dare not protest. By such methods we have plucked out of the midst of MASONRY the very root of protest against our disposition. While preaching liberalism to the GOY we at the same time keep our own people and our agents in a state of unquestioningly submission.

10. Under our influence the execution of the laws of the GOYIM has been reduced to a minimum. The prestige of the law has been exploded by the liberal interpretations introduced into this sphere. In the most important and fundamental affairs and questions, JUDGES DECIDE AS WE DICTATE TO THEM, see matters in the light wherewith we enfold them for the administration of the GOYIM, of course, through persons who are our tools though we do not appear to have anything in common with them – by newspaper opinion or by other means …. Even senators and the higher administration accept our counsels. The purely brute mind of the GOYIM is incapable of use for analysis and observation, and still more for the foreseeing whither a certain manner of setting a question may tend.

11. In this difference in capacity for thought between the GOYIM and ourselves may be clearly discerned the seal of our position as the Chosen People and of our higher quality of humanness, in contradistinction to the brute mind of the GOYIM. Their eyes are open, but see nothing before them and do not invent (unless perhaps, material things). From this it is plain that nature herself has destined us to guide and rule the world.


12. When comes the time of our overt rule, the time to manifest its blessing, we shall remake all legislatures, all our laws will be brief, plain, stable, without any kind of interpretations, so that anyone will be in a position to know them perfectly. The main feature which will run right through them is submission to orders, and this principle will be carried to a grandiose height. Every abuse will then disappear in consequence of the responsibility of all down to the lowest unit before the higher authority of the representative of power. Abuses of power subordinate to this last instance will be so mercilessly punished that none will be found anxious to try experiments with their own powers. We shall follow up jealously every action of the administration on which depends the smooth running of the machinery of the State, for slackness in this produces slackness everywhere; not a single case of illegality or abuse of power will be left without exemplary punishment.

13. Concealment of guilt, connivance between those in the service of the administration – all this kind of evil will disappear after the very first examples of severe punishment. The aureole of our power demands suitable, that is, cruel, punishments for the slightest infringement, for the sake of gain, of its supreme prestige. The sufferer, though his punishment may exceed his fault, will count as a soldier falling on the administrative field of battle in the interest of authority, principle and law, which do not permit that any of those who hold the reins of the public coach should turn aside from the public highway to their own private paths. FOR EXAMPLES OUR JUDGES WILL KNOW THAT WHENEVER THEY FEEL DISPOSED TO PLUME THEMSELVES ON FOOLISH CLEMENCY THEY ARE VIOLATING THE LAW OF JUSTICE WHICH IS INSTITUTED FOR THE EXEMPLARY EDIFICATION OF MEN BY PENALTIES FOR LAPSES AND NOT FOR DISPLAY OF THE SPIRITUAL QUALITIES OF THE JUDGES …. Such qualities it is proper to show in private life, but not in a public square which is the educationally basis of human life.

14. Our legal staff will serve not beyond the age of 55, firstly because old men more obstinately hold to prejudiced opinions, and are less capable of submitting to new directions, and secondly because this will give us the possibility by this measure of securing elasticity in the changing of staff, which will thus the more easily bend under our pressure: he who wishes to keep his place will have to give blind obedience to deserve it. In general, our judges will be elected by us only from among those who thoroughly understand that the part they have to play is to punish and apply laws and not to dream about the manifestations of liberalism at the expense of the educational scheme of the State, as the GOYIM in these days imagine it to be …. This method of shuffling the staff will serve also to explode any collective solidarity of those in the same service and will bind all to the interests of the government upon which their fate will depend. The young generation of judges will be trained in certain views regarding the inadmissibility of any abuses that might disturb the established order of our subjects among themselves.

15. In these days the judges of the GOYIM create indulgences to every kind of crimes, not having a just understanding of their office, because the rulers of the present age in appointing judges to office take no care to inculcate in them a sense of duty and consciousness of the matter which is demanded of them. As a brute beast lets out its young in search of prey, so do the GOYIM give to them for what purpose such place was created. This is the reason why their governments are being ruined by their own forces through the acts of their own administration.

16. Let us borrow from the example of the results of these actions yet another lesson for our government.

17. We shall root out liberalism from all the important strategic posts of our government on which depends the training of subordinates for our State structure. Such posts will fall exclusively to those who have been trained by us for administrative rule. To the possible objection that the retirement of old servants will cost the Treasury heavily, I reply, firstly, they will be provided with some private service in place of what they lose, and, secondly, I have to remark that all the money in the world will be concentrated in our hands, consequently it is not our government that has to fear expense.


18. Our absolutism will in all things be logically consecutive and therefore in each one of its decrees our supreme will be respected and unquestionably fulfilled: it will ignore all murmurs, all discontents of every kind and will destroy to the root every kind of manifestation of them in act by punishment of an exemplary character.

19. We shall abolish the right of cessation, which will be transferred exclusively to our disposal – to the cognizance of him who rules, for we must not allow the conception among the people of a thought that there could be such a thing as a decision that is not right of judges set up by us. If, however, anything like this should occur, we shall ourselves cassate the decision, but inflict therewith such exemplary punishment on the judge for lack of understanding of his duty and the purpose of his appointment as will prevent a repetition of such cases …. I repeat that it must be born in mind that we shall know every step of our administration which only needs to be closely watched for the people to be content with us, for it has the right to demand from a good government a good official.

20. OUR GOVERNMENT WILL HAVE THE APPEARANCE OF A PATRIARCHAL PATERNAL GUARDIANSHIP ON THE PART OF OUR RULER. Our own nation and our subjects will discern in his person a father caring for their every need, their every act, their every inter-relation as subjects one with another, as well as their relations to the ruler. They will then be so thoroughly imbued with the thought that it is impossible for them to dispense with this wardship and guidance, if they wish to live in peace and quiet, THAT THEY WILL ACKNOWLEDGE THE AUTOCRACY OF OUR RULER WITH A DEVOTION BORDERING ON “APOTHEOSIS,” especially when they are convinced that those whom we set up do not put their own in place of authority, but only blindly execute his dictates. They will be rejoiced that we have regulated everything in their lives as is done by wise parents who desire to train children in the cause of duty and submission. For the peoples of the world in regard to the secrets of our polity are ever through the ages only children under age, precisely as are also their governments.

21. As you see, I found our despotism on right and duty: the right to compel the execution of duty is the direct obligation of a government which is a father for its subjects. It has the right of the strong that it may use it for the benefit of directing humanity towards that order which is defined by nature, namely, submission. Everything in the world is in a state of submission, if not to man, then to circumstances or its own inner character, in all cases, to what is stronger. And so shall we be this something stronger for the sake of good.

22. We are obliged without hesitation to sacrifice individuals, who commit a breach of established order, for in the exemplary punishment of evil lies a great educational problem.

23. When the King of Israel sets upon his sacred head the crown offered him by Europe he will become patriarch of the world. The indispensable victims offered by him in consequence of their suitability will never reach the number of victims offered in the course of centuries by the mania of magnificence, the emulation between the GOY governments.

24. Our King will be in constant communion with the peoples, making to them from the tribune speeches which fame will in that same hour distribute over all the world.

Top of Protocols

Protocol XVI


2. We shall exclude from the course of instruction State Law as also all that concerns the political question. These subjects will be taught to a few dozen of persons chosen for their preeminent capacities from among the number of the initiated. THE UNIVERSITIES MUST NO LONGER SEND OUT FROM THEIR HALLS MILK SOPS CONCOCTING PLANS FOR A CONSTITUTION, LIKE A COMEDY OR A TRAGEDY, BUSYING THEMSELVES WITH QUESTIONS OF POLICY IN WHICH EVEN THEIR OWN FATHERS NEVER HAD ANY POWER OF THOUGHT.

3. The ill-guided acquaintance of a large number of persons with questions of polity creates utopian dreamers and bad subjects, as you can see for yourselves from the example of the universal education in this direction of the GOYIM. We must introduce into their education all those principles which have so brilliantly broken up their order. But when we are in power we shall remove every kind of disturbing subject from the course of education and shall make out of the youth obedient children of authority, loving him who rules as the support and hope of peace and quiet.


4. Classicism as also any form of study of ancient history, in which there are more bad than good examples, we shall replace with the study of the program of the future. We shall erase from the memory of men all facts of previous centuries which are undesirable to us, and leave only those which depict all the errors of the government of the GOYIM. The study of practical life, of the obligations of order, of the relations of people one to another, of avoiding bad and selfish examples, which spread the infection of evil, and similar questions of an educative nature, will stand in the forefront of the teaching program, which will be drawn up on a separate plan for each calling or state of life, in no wise generalizing the teaching. This treatment of the question has special importance.


6. In order that he who rules may be seated firmly in the hearts and minds of his subjects it is necessary for the time of his activity to instruct the whole nation in the schools and on the market places about this meaning and his acts and all his beneficent initiatives.

7. We shall abolish every kind of freedom of instruction. Learners of all ages have the right to assemble together with their parents in the educational establishments as it were in a club: during these assemblies, on holidays, teachers will read what will pass as free lectures on questions of human relations, of the laws of examples, of the philosophy of new theories not yet declared to the world. These theories will be raised by us to the stage of a dogma of faith as a traditional stage towards our faith. On the completion of this exposition of our program of action in the present and the future I will read you the principles of these theories.

8. In a word, knowing by the experience of many centuries that people live and are guided by ideas, that these ideas are imbibed by people only by the aid of education provided with equal success for all ages of growth, but of course by varying methods, we shall swallow up and confiscate to our own use the last scintilla of independence of thought, which we have for long past been directing towards subjects and ideas useful for us. The system of bridling thought is already at work in the so-called system of teaching by OBJECT LESSONS, the purpose of which is to turn the GOYIM into unthinking submissive brutes waiting for things to be presented before their eyes in order to form an idea of them …. In France, one of our best agents, Bourgeois, has already made public a new program of teaching by object lessons.

Top of Protocols

Protocol XVII

1. The practice of advocacy produces men cold, cruel, persistent, unprincipled, who in all cases take up an impersonal, purely legal standpoint. They have the inveterate habit to refer everything to its value for the defense and not to the public welfare of its results. They do not usually decline to undertake any defense whatever, they strive for an acquittal at all costs, caviling over every petty crux of jurisprudence and thereby they demoralize justice. For this reason we shall set this profession into narrow frames which will keep it inside this sphere of executive public service. Advocates, equally with judges, will be deprived of the right of communication with litigant; they well receive business only from the court and will study it by notes of report and documents, defending their clients after they have been interrogated in court on facts that have appeared. They will receive an honorarium without regard to the quality of the defense. This will render them mere reporters on law-business in the interests of justice and as counterpoise to the proctor who will be the reporter in the interests of prosecution; this will shorten business before the courts. In this way will be established a practice of honest unprejudiced defense conducted not from personal interest but by conviction. This will also, by the way, remove the present practice of corrupt bargain between advocation to agree only to let that side win which pays most …..


2. WE HAVE LONG PAST TAKEN CARE TO DISCREDIT THE PRIESTHOOD OF “GOYIM,” and thereby to ruin their mission on earth which in these days might still be a great hindrance to us. Day by day its influence on the peoples of the world is falling lower. FREEDOM OF CONSCIENCE HAS BEEN DECLARED EVERYWHERE, SO THAT NOW ONLY YEARS DIVIDE US FROM THE MOMENT OF THE COMPLETE WRECKING OF THAT CHRISTIAN RELIGION: as to other religions we shall have still less difficulty in dealing with them, but it would be premature to speak of this now. We shall act clericalism and clericals into such narrow frames as to make their influence move in retrogressive proportion to its former progress.

3. When the time comes finally to destroy the papal court the finger of an invisible hand will point the nations towards this court. When, however, the nations fling themselves upon it, we shall come forward in the guise of its defenders as if to save excessive bloodshed. By this diversion we shall penetrate to its very bowels and be sure we shall never come out again until we have gnawed through the entire strength of this place.



6. In general, then, our contemporary press will continue to CONVICT State affairs, religions, incapacities of the GOYIM, always using the most unprincipled expressions in order by every means to lower their prestige in the manner which can only be practiced by the genius of our gifted tribe …

7. Our kingdom will be an apologia of the divinity Vishnu, in whom is found its personification – in our hundred hands will be, one in each, the springs of the machinery of social life. We shall see everything without the aid of official police which, in that scope of its rights which we elaborated for the use of the GOYIM, hinders governments from seeing. In our programs ONE-THIRD OF OUR SUBJECTS WILL KEEP THE REST UNDER OBSERVATION from a sense of duty, on the principle of volunteer service to the State. It will then be no disgrace to be a spy and informer, but a merit: unfounded denunciations, however, will be cruelly punished that there may be development of abuses of this right.

8. Our agents will be taken from the higher as well as the lower ranks of society, from among the administrative class who spend their time in amusements, editors, printers and publishers, booksellers, clerks, and salesmen, workmen, coachmen, lackeys, et cetera. This body, having no rights and not being empowered to take any action on their own account, and consequently a police without any power, will only witness and report: verification of their reports and arrests will depend upon a responsible group of controllers of police affairs, while the actual act of arrest will be performed by the gendarmerie and the municipal police. Any person not denouncing anything seen or heard concerning questions of polity will also be charged with and made responsible for concealment, if it be proved that he is guilty of this crime.


10. Such an organization will extirpate abuses of authority, of force, of bribery, everything in fact which we by our counsels, by out theories of the superhuman rights of man, have introduced into the customs of the GOYIM …. But how else were we to procure that increase of causes predisposing to disorders in the midst of their administration? …. Among the number of those methods one of the most important is – agents for the restoration of order, so placed as to have the opportunity in their disintegrating activity of developing and displaying their evil inclinations – obstinate self-conceit, irresponsible exercise of authority, and, first and foremost, venality.

Top of Protocols

Protocol XVIII

1. When it becomes necessary for us to strengthen the strict measures of secret defense (the most fatal poison for the prestige of authority) we shall arrange a simulation of disorders or some manifestation of discontents finding expression through the co- operation of good speakers. Round these speakers will assemble all who are sympathetic to his utterances. This will give us the pretext for domiciliary prerequisitions and surveillance on the part of our servants from among the number of the GOYIM police ….

2. As the majority of conspirators act of love for the game, for the sake of talking, so, until they commit some overt act we shall not lay a finger on them but only introduce into their midst observation elements …. It must be remembered that the prestige of authority is lessened if it frequently discovers conspiracies against itself: this implies a presumption of consciousness of weakness, or, what is still worse, of injustice. You are aware that we have broken the prestige of the GOY kings by frequent attempts upon their lives through our agents, blind sheep of our flock, who are easily moved by a few liberal phrases to crimes provided only they be painted in political colors. WE HAVE COMPELLED THE RULERS TO ACKNOWLEDGE THEIR WEAKNESS IN ADVERTISING OVERT MEASURES OF SECRETE DEFENSE AND THEREBY WE SHALL BRING THE PROMISE OF AUTHORITY TO DESTRUCTION.

3. Our ruler will be secretly protected only by the most insignificant guard, because we shall not admit so much as a thought that there could exist against him any sedition with which he is not strong enough to contend and is compelled to hide from it.

4. If we should admit this thought, as the GOYIM have done and are doing, we should IPSO FACTO be signing a death sentence, if not for our ruler, at any rate for his dynasty, at no distant date.


5. According to strictly enforced outward appearances our ruler will employ his power only for the advantage of the nation and in no wise for his own or dynastic profits. Therefore, with the observance of this decorum, his authority will be respected and guarded by the subjects themselves, it will receive an apotheosis in the admission that with it is bound up the well-being of every citizen of the State, for upon it will depend all order in the common life of the pack ….


7. Our ruler will always be among the people and be surrounded by a mob of apparently curious men and women, who will occupy the front ranks about him, to all appearance by chance, and will restrain the ranks of the rest out of respect as it will appear for good order. This will sow an example of restraint also in others. If a petitioner appears among the people trying to hand a petition and forcing his way through the ranks, the first ranks must receive the petition and before the eyes of the petitioner pass it to the ruler, so that all may know that what is handed in reaches its destination, that consequently, there exists a control of the ruler himself. The aureole of power requires for is existence that the people may be able to say: “If the king knew of this,” or: “the king will hear it.”

8. WITH THE ESTABLISHMENT OF OFFICIAL DEFENSE, THE MYSTICAL PRESTIGE OF AUTHORITY DISAPPEARS: given a certain audacity, and everyone counts himself master of it, the sedition- monger is conscious of his strength, and when occasion serves watches for the moment to make an attempt upon authority …. For the GOYIM we have been preaching something else, but by that very fact we are enabled to see what measures of overt defense have brought them to ….

9. CRIMINALS WITH US WILL BE ARRESTED AT THE FIRST, more or less, well-grounded SUSPICION: it cannot be allowed that out of fear of a possible mistake an opportunity should be given of escape to persons suspected of a political lapse of crime, for in these matters we shall be literally merciless. If it is still possible, by stretching a point, to admit a reconsideration of the motive causes in simple crimes, there is no possibility of excuse for persons occupying themselves with questions in which nobody except the government can understand anything …. And it is not all governments that understand true policy.

Top of Protocols

Protocol XIX

1. If we do not permit any independent dabbling in the political we shall on the other hand encourage every kind of report or petition with proposals for the government to examine into all kinds of projects for the amelioration of the condition of the people; this will reveal to us the defects or else the fantasies of our subjects, to which we shall respond either by accomplishing them or by a wise rebuttment to prove the shortsightedness of one who judges wrongly.

2. Sedition-mongering is nothing more than the yapping of a lap- dog at an elephant. For a government well organized, not from the police but from the public point of view, the lap-dog yaps at the elephant in entire unconsciousness of its strength and importance. It needs no more than to take a good example to show the relative importance of both and the lap-dogs will cease to yap and will wag their tails the moment they set eyes on an elephant.

3. In order to destroy the prestige of heroism for political crime we shall send it for trial in the category of thieving, murder, and every kind of abominable and filthy crime. Public opinion will then confuse in its conception of this category of crime with the disgrace attaching to every other and will brand it with the same contempt.

4. We have done our best, and I hope we have succeeded to obtain that the GOYIM should not arrive at this means of contending with sedition. It was for this reason that through the Press and in speeches, indirectly – in cleverly compiled school- books on history, we have advertised the martyrdom alleged to have been accredited by sedition-mongers for the idea of the commonweal. This advertisement has increased the contingent of liberals and has brought thousands of GOYIM into the ranks of our livestock cattle.

Top of Protocols

Protocol XX

1. To-day we shall touch upon the financial program, which I put off to the end of my report as being the most difficult, the crowning and the decisive point of our plans. Before entering upon it I will remind you that I have already spoken before by way of a hint when I said that the sum total of our actions is settled by the question of figures.

2. When we come into our kingdom our autocratic government will avoid, from a principle of self-preservation, sensibly burdening the masses of the people with taxes, remembering that it plays the part of father and protector. But as State organization cost dear it is necessary nevertheless to obtain the funds required for it. It will, therefore, elaborate with particular precaution the question of equilibrium in this matter.

3. Our rule, in which the king will enjoy the legal fiction that everything in his State belongs to him (which may easily be translated into fact), will be enabled to resort to the lawful confiscation of all sums of every kind for the regulation of their circulation in the State. From this follows that taxation will best be covered by a progressive tax on property. In this manner the dues will be paid without straitening or ruining anybody in the form of a percentage of the amount of property. The rich must be aware that it is their duty to place a part of their superfluities at the disposal of the State since the State guarantees them security of possession of the rest of their property and the right of honest gains, I say honest, for the control over property will do away with robbery on a legal basis.

4. This social reform must come from above, for the time is ripe for it – it is indispensable as a pledge of peace.


5. The tax upon the poor man is a seed of revolution and works to the detriment of the State which is hunting after the trifling is missing the big. Quite apart from this, a tax on capitalists diminishes the growth of wealth in private hands in which we have in these days concentrated it as a counterpoise to the government strength of the GOYIM – their State finances.

6. A tax increasing in a percentage ratio to capital will give much larger revenue than the present individual or property tax, which is useful to us now for the sole reason that it excites trouble and discontent among the GOYIM.

7. The force upon which our king will rest consists in the equilibrium and the guarantee of peace, for the sake of which things it is indispensable that the capitalists should yield up a portion of their incomes for the sake of the secure working of the machinery of the State. State needs must be paid by those who will not feel the burden and have enough to take from.

8. Such a measure will destroy the hatred of the poor man for the rich, in whom he will see a necessary financial support for the State, will see in him the organizer of peace and well-being since he will see that it is the rich man who is paying the necessary means to attain these things.

9. In order that payers of the educated classes should not too much distress themselves over the new payments they will have full accounts given them of the destination of those payments, with the exception of such sums as will be appropriated for the needs of the throne and the administrative institutions.

10. He who reigns will not have any properties of his own once all in the State represented his patrimony, or else the one would be in contradiction to the other; the fact of holding private means would destroy the right of property in the common possessions of all.

11. Relatives of him who reigns, his heirs excepted, who will be maintained by the resources of the State, must enter the ranks of servants of the State or must work to obtain the right to property; the privilege of royal blood must not serve for the spoiling of the treasury.

12. Purchase, receipt of money or inheritance will be subject to the payment of a stamp progressive tax. Any transfer of property, whether money or other, without evidence of payment of this tax which will be strictly registered by names, will render the former holder liable to pay interest on the tax from the moment of transfer of these sums up to the discovery of his evasion of declaration of the transfer. Transfer documents must be presented weekly at the local treasury office with notifications of the name, surname and permanent place of residence of the former and the new holder of the property. This transfer with register of names must begin from a definite sum which exceeds the ordinary expenses of buying and selling necessaries, and these will be subject to payment only by a stamp impost of a definite percentage of the unit.

13. Just strike an estimate of how many times such taxes as these will cover the revenue of the GOYIM States.


14. The State exchequer will have to maintain a definite complement of reserve sums, and all that is collected above that complement must be returned into circulation. On these sums will be organized public works. The initiative in works of this kind, proceeding from State sources, will blind the working class firmly to the interests of the State and to those who reign. From these same sums also a part will be set aside as rewards of inventiveness and productiveness.

15. On no account should so much as a single unit above the definite and freely estimated sums be retained in the State Treasuries, for money exists to be circulated and any kind of stagnation of money acts ruinously on the running of the State machinery, for which it is the lubricant; a stagnation of the lubricant may stop the regular working of the mechanism.

16. The substitution of interest-bearing paper for a part of the token of exchange has produced exactly this stagnation. The consequences of this circumstance are already sufficiently noticeable.

17. A court of account will also be instituted by us, and in it the ruler will find at any moment a full accounting for State income and expenditure, with the exception of the current monthly account, not yet made up, and that of the preceding month, which will not yet have been delivered.

18. The one and only person who will have no interest in robbing the State is its owner, the ruler. This is why his personal control will remove the possibility of leakages of extravagances.

19. The representative function of the ruler at receptions for the sake of etiquette, which absorbs so much invaluable time, will be abolished in order that the ruler may have time for control and consideration. His power will not then be split up into fractional parts among time-serving favorites who surround the throne for its pomp and splendor, and are interested only in their own and not in the common interests of the State.

20. Economic crises have been producer by us for the GOYIM by no other means than the withdrawal of money from circulation. Huge capitals have stagnated, withdrawing money from States, which were constantly obliged to apply to those same stagnant capitals for loans. These loans burdened the finances of the State with the payment of interest and made them the bond slaves of these capitals …. The concentration of industry in the hands of capitalists out of the hands of small masters has drained away all the juices of the peoples and with them also the States ….

21. The present issue of money in general does not correspond with the requirements per head, and cannot therefore satisfy all the needs of the workers. The issue of money ought to correspond with the growth of population and thereby children also must absolutely be reckoned as consumers of currency from the day of their birth. The revision of issue is a material question for the whole world.



23. With us the standard that must be introduced is the cost of working-man power, whether it be reckoned in paper or in wood. We shall make the issue of money in accordance with the normal requirements of each subject, adding to the quantity with every birth and subtracting with every death.

24. The accounts will be managed by each department (the French administrative division), each circle.

25. In order that there may be no delays in the paying our of money for State needs the sums and terms of such payments will be fixed by decree of the ruler; this will do away with the protection by a ministry of one institution to the detriment of others.

26. The budgets of income and expenditure will be carried out side by side that they may not be obscured by distance one to another.

27. The reforms projected by us in the financial institutions and principles of the GOYIM will be clothed by us in such forms as will alarm nobody. We shall point out the necessity of reforms in consequence of the disorderly darkness into which the GOYIM by their irregularities have plunged the finances. The first irregularity, as we shall point out, consists in their beginning with drawing up a single budget which year after year grows owing to the following cause: this budget is dragged out to half the year, then they demand a budget to put things right, and this they expend in three months, after which they ask for a supplementary budget, and all this ends with a liquidation budget. But, as the budget of the following year is drawn up in accordance with the sum of the total addition, the annual departure from the normal reaches as much as 50 per cent in a year, and so the annual budget is trebled in ten years. Thanks to such methods, allowed by the carelessness of the GOY States, their treasuries are empty. The period of loans supervenes, and that has swallowed up remainders and brought all the GOY States to bankruptcy.

28. You understand perfectly that economic arrangements of this kind, which have been suggested to the GOYIM by us, cannot be carried on by us.

29. Every kind of loan proves infirmity in the State and a want of understanding of the rights of the State. Loans hang like a sword of Damocles over the heads of rulers, who, instead of taking from their subjects by a temporary tax, come begging with outstretched palm of our bankers. Foreign loans are leeches which there is no possibility of removing from the body of the State until they fall off of themselves or the State flings them off. But the GOY States do not tear them off; they go on in persisting in putting more on to themselves so that they must inevitably perish, drained by voluntary blood-letting.


30. What also indeed is, in substance, a loan, especially a foreign loan? A loan is – an issue of government bills of exchange containing a percentage obligation commensurate to the sum of the loan capital. If the loan bears a charge of 5 per cent, then in twenty years the State vainly pays away in interest a sum equal to the loan borrowed, in forty years it is paying a double sum, in sixty – treble, and all the while the debt remains an unpaid debt.

31. From this calculation it is obvious that with any form of taxation per head the State is baling out the last coppers of the poor taxpayers in order to settle accounts with wealth foreigners, from whom it has borrowed money instead of collecting these coppers for its own needs without the additional interest.

32. So long as loans were internal the GOYIM only shuffled their money from the pockets of the poor to those of the rich, but when we bought up the necessary person in order to transfer loans into the external sphere, all the wealth of States flowed into our cash- boxes and all the GOYIM began to pay us the tribute of subjects.

33. If the superficiality of GOY kings on their thrones in regard to State affairs and the venality of ministers or the want of understanding of financial matters on the part of other ruling persons have made their countries debtors to our treasuries to amounts quite impossible to pay it has not been accomplished without, on our part, heavy expenditure of trouble and money.

34. Stagnation of money will not be allowed by us and therefore there will be no State interest-bearing paper, except a one per- cent series, so that there will be no payment of interest to leeches that suck all the strength out of the State. The right to issue interest-bearing paper will be given exclusively to industrial companies who will find no difficulty in paying interest out of profits, whereas the State does not make interest on borrowed money like these companies, for the State borrows to spend and not to use in operations.

35. Industrial papers will be bought also by the government which from being as now a paper of tribute by loan operations will be transformed into a lender of money at a profit. This measure will stop the stagnation of money, parasitic profits and idleness, all of which were useful for us among the GOYIM so long as they were independent but are not desirable under our rule.

36. How clear is the undeveloped power of thought of the purely brute brains of the GOYIM, as expressed in the fact that they have been borrowing from us with payment of interest without ever thinking that all the same these very moneys plus an addition for payment of interest must be got by them from their own State pockets in order to settle up with us. What could have been simpler than to take the money they wanted from their own people?

37. But it is a proof of the genius of our chosen mind that we have contrived to present the matter of loans to them in such a light that they have even seen in them an advantage for themselves.

38. Our accounts, which we shall present when the time comes, in the light of centuries of experience gained by experiments made by us on the GOY States, will be distinguished by clearness and definiteness and will show at a glance to all men the advantage of our innovations. They will put an end to those abuses to which we owe our mastery over the GOYIM, but which cannot be allowed in our kingdom.

39. We shall so hedge about our system of accounting that neither the ruler nor the most insignificant public servant will be in a position to divert even the smallest sum from its destination without detection or to direct it in another direction except that which will be once fixed in a definite plan of action.

40. And without a definite plan it is impossible to rule. Marching along an undetermined road and with undetermined resources brings to ruin by the way heroes and demigods.

41. The GOY rulers, whom we once upon a time advised should be distracted from State occupations by representative receptions, observances of etiquette, entertainments, were only screens for our rule. The accounts of favorite courtiers who replaced them in the sphere of affairs were drawn up for them by our agents, and every time gave satisfaction to short-sighted minds by promises that in the future economics and improvements were foreseen …. Economics from what? From new taxes? – were questions that might have been but were not asked by those who read our accounts and projects.

42. You know to what they have been brought by this carelessness, to what pitch of financial disorder they have arrived, notwithstanding the astonishing industry of their peoples.

Top of Protocols

Protocol XXI

1. To what I reported to you at the last meeting I shall now add a detailed explanation of internal loans. Of foreign loans I shall say nothing more, because they have fed us with national moneys of the GOYIM, but for our State there will be no foreigners, that is, nothing external.

2. We have taken advantage of the venality of administrators and slackness of rulers to get our moneys twice, thrice and more times over, by lending to the GOY governments moneys which were not at all needed by the States. Could anyone do the like in regard to us? …. Therefore, I shall only deal with the details of internal loans.

3. States announce that such a loan is to be concluded and open subscriptions for their own bills of exchange, that is, for their interest-bearing paper. That they may be within the reach of all the price is determined at from a hundred to a thousand; and a discount is made for the earliest subscribers. Next day by artificial means the price of them goes up, the alleged reason being that everyone is rushing to buy them. In a few days the treasury safes are as they say overflowing and there’s more money than they can do with. The subscription, it is alleged, covers many times over the issue total of the loan; in this lies the whole stage effect – look you, they say, what confidence is shown in the government’s bills of exchange.

4. But when the comedy is played out there emerges the fact that a debit and an exceedingly burdensome debit has been created. For the payment of interest it becomes necessary to have recourse to new loans, which do not swallow up but only add to the capital debt. And when this credit is exhausted it becomes necessary by new taxes to cover, not the loan, BUT ONLY THE INTEREST ON IT. These taxes are a debit employed to cover a debit ….

5. Later comes the time for conversions, but they diminish the payment of interest without covering the debt, and besides they cannot be made without the consent of the lenders; on announcing a conversion a proposal is made to return the money to those who are not willing to convert their paper. If everybody expressed his unwillingness and demanded his money back, the government would be hooked on their own files and would be found insolvent and unable to pay the proposed sums. By good luck the subjects of the GOY governments, knowing nothing about financial affairs, have always preferred losses on exchange and diminution of interest to the risk of new investments of their moneys, and have thereby many a time enabled these governments to throw off their shoulders a debit of several millions.

6. Nowadays, with external loans, these tricks cannot be played by the GOYIM for they know that we shall demand all our moneys back.

7. In this way in acknowledged bankruptcy will best prove to the various countries the absence of any means between the interest of the peoples and of those who rule them.

8. I beg you to concentrate your particular attention upon this point and upon the following: nowadays all internal loans are consolidated by so-called flying loans, that is, such as have terms of payment more or less near. These debts consist of moneys paid into the savings banks and reserve funds. If left for long at the disposition of a government these funds evaporate in the payment of interest on foreign loans, and are placed by the deposit of equivalent amount of RENTS.

9. And these last it is which patch up all the leaks in the State treasuries of the GOYIM.

10. When we ascend the throne of the world all these financial and similar shifts, as being not in accord with our interests, will be swept away so as not to leave a trace, as also will be destroyed all money markets, since we shall not allow the prestige of our power to be shaken by fluctuations of prices set upon our values, which we shall announce by law at the price which represents their full worth without any possibility of lowering or raising. (Raising gives the pretext for lowering, which indeed was where we made a beginning in relation to the values of the GOYIM.)

11. We shall replace the money markets by grandiose government credit institutions, the object of which will be to fix the price of industrial values in accordance with government views. These institutions will be in a position to fling upon the market five hundred millions of industrial paper in one day, or to buy up for the same amount. In this way all industrial undertakings will come into dependence upon us. You may imagine for yourselves what immense power we shall thereby secure for ourselves.

Top of Protocols

Protocol XXII

1. In all that has so far been reported by me to you, I have endeavored to depict with care the secret of what is coming, of what is past, and of what is going on now, rushing into the flood of the great events coming already in the near future, the secret of our relations to the GOYIM and of financial operations. On this subject there remains still a little for me to add.


3. Surely there is no need to seek further proof that our rule is predestined by God? Surely we shall not fail with such wealth to prove that all that evil which for so many centuries we have had to commit has served at the end of ends the cause of true well- being – the bringing of everything into order? Though it be even by the exercise of some violence, yet all the same it will be established. We shall contrive to prove that we are benefactors who have restored to the rent and mangled earth the true good and also freedom of the person, and therewith we shall enable it to be enjoyed in peace and quiet, with proper dignity of relations, on the condition, of course, of strict observance of the laws established by us. We shall make plain therewith that freedom does not consist in dissipation and in the right of unbridled license any more than the dignity and force of a man do not consist in the right of everyone to promulgate destructive principles in the nature of freedom of conscience, equality and a like, that freedom of the person in no wise consists in the right to agitate oneself and others by abominable speeches before disorderly mobs, and that true freedom consists in the inviolability of the person who honorably and strictly observes all the laws of life in common, that human dignity is wrapped up in consciousness of the rights and also of the absence of rights of each, and not wholly and solely in fantastic imaginings about the subject of one’s EGO.

4. One authority will be glorious because it will be all-powerful, will rule and guide, and not muddle along after leaders and orators shrieking themselves hoarse with senseless words which they call great principles and which are noting else, to speak honestly, but utopian …. Our authority will be the crown of order, and in that is included the whole happiness of man. The aureole of this authority will inspire a mystical bowing of the knee before it and a reverent fear before it of all the peoples. True force makes no terms with any right, not even with that of God: none dare come near to it so as to take so much as a span from it away.

Top of Protocols

Protocol XXIII

1. That the peoples may become accustomed to obedience it is necessary to inculcate lessons of humility and therefore to reduce the production of articles of luxury. By this we shall improve morals which have been debased by emulation in the sphere of luxury. We shall reestablish small master production which will mean laying a mine under the private capital of manufactures. This is indispensable also for the reason that manufacturers on the grand scale often move, though not always consciously, the thoughts of the masses in directions against the government. A people of small masters knows nothing of unemployment and this binds him closely with existing order, and consequently with the firmness of authority. For us its part will have been played out the moment authority is transferred into our hands. Drunkenness also will be prohibited by law and punishable as a crime against humanness of man who is turned into a brute under the influence of alcohol.

2. Subjects, I repeat once more, give blind obedience only to the strong hand which is absolutely independent of them, for in it they feel the sword of defense and support against social scourges …. What do they want with an angelic spirit in a king? What they have to see in him is the personification of force and power.

3. The supreme lord who will replace all now existing ruler, dragging in their existence among societies demoralized by us, societies that have denied even the authority of God, from whose midst breads out on all sides the fire of anarchy, must first of all proceed to quench this all-devouring flame. Therefore he will be obliged to kill off those existing societies, though he should drench them with his own blood, that he may resurrect them again in the form of regularly organized troops fighting consciously with every kind of infection that may cover the body of the State with sores.

4. This Chosen One of God is chosen from above to demolish the senseless forces moved by instinct and not reason, by brutishness and humanness. These forces now triumph in manifestations of robbery and every kind of violence under the mask of principles of freedom and every kind of violence under the mask of principles of freedom and rights. They have overthrown all forms of social order to erect on the ruins of the throne of the King of the Jews; but their part will be played out the moment he enters into his kingdom. Then it will be necessary to sweep them away from his path, on which must be left no knot, no splinter.

5. Then will it be possible for us to say to the peoples of the world: Give thanks to God and bow the knee before him who bears on his front the seal of the predestination of man, to which God himself has led his star that none other but Him might free us from all the before-mentioned forces and evils.

Top of Protocols

Protocol XXIV

1. I pass now to the method of confirming the dynastic roots of King David to the last strata of the earth.

2. This confirmation will first and foremost be included in that which to this day has rested the force of conservatism by our learned elders of the conduct of the affairs of the world, in the directing of the education of thought of all humanity.

3. Certain members of the seed of David will prepare the kings and their heirs, selecting not by right of heritage but by eminent capacities, inducting them into the most secret mysteries of the political, into schemes of government, but providing always that none may come to knowledge of the secrets. The object of this mode of action is that all may know that government cannot be entrusted to those who have not been inducted into the secret places of its art ….

4. To these persons only will be taught the practical application of the aforenamed plans by comparison of the experiences of many centuries, all the observations on the politico-economic moves and social sciences – in a word, all the spirit of laws which have been unshakably established by nature herself for the regulation of the relations of humanity.

5. Direct heirs will often be set aside from ascending the throne if in their time of training they exhibit frivolity, softness and other qualities that are the ruin of authority, which render them incapable of governing and in themselves dangerous for kingly office.

6. Only those who are unconditionally capable for firm, even if it be to cruelty, direct rule will receive the reins of rule from our learned elders.

7. In case of falling sick with weakness of will or other form of incapacity. kings must by law hand over the reins of rule to new and capable hands.

8. The king’s plan of action for the current moment, and all the more so for the future, will be unknown, even to those who are called his closest counselors.


9. Only the king and the three who stood sponsor for him will know what is coming.

10. In the person of the king who with unbending will is master of himself and of humanity all will discern as it were fate with its mysterious ways. None will know what the king wishes to attain by his dispositions, and therefore none will dare to stand across an unknown path.

11. It is understood that the brain reservoir of the king must correspond in capacity to the plan of government it has to contain. It is for this reason that he will ascend the throne not otherwise than after examination of his mind by the aforesaid learned elders.

12. That the people may know and love their king, it is indispensable for him to converse in the market-places with his people. This ensures the necessary clinching of the two forces which are now divided one from another by us by the terror.

13. This terror was indispensable for us till the time comes for both these forces separately to fall under our influence.

14. The king of the Jews must not be at the mercy of his passions, and especially of sensuality: on no side of his character must he give brute instincts power over his mind. Sensuality worse than all else disorganizes the capacities of the mind and clearness of views, distracting the thoughts to the worst and most brutal side of human activity.

15. The prop of humanity in the person of the supreme lord of all the world of the holy seed of David must sacrifice to his people all personal inclinations.

16. Our supreme lord must be of an exemplary irreproachable.



Authenticity of Protocols of Zion Substantiated by Top Writer/Scholars (Jan. 6, 2006)

The Protocols of Zion Toolkit by Paul Myers (Nov 25, 2004)

The Protocols are dismissed as a forgery, but they do bear an uncanny resemblance to the way the Zionists have operated and still do!


The protocols are either a forgery or they are not. If they are they would surely be dismissed as a forgery, and if they are not they would even more certainly be dismissed as a forgery. Imagine the global response if Israel and Zionists openly claimed that the Protocols served as inspiration for their conduct!

The editor of the article, Ken Adachi, does make a reasonable case that the Protocols are genuine. I’m not saying that the case is conclusive, but it does deserve to be considered along with the various arguments that they are a forgery. And as you point out, it is in the actual behavior of Israel and Zionists that we find the strongest evidence that the Protocols accurately characterize the Zionist agenda –  even if they are a forgery. In that case, the forger evidently understood what Zionism was about, and was seeking to expose the agenda. If one must decide if something is true, do so by their actions, not their words.


State Sovereignty: America’s Final Solution to Tyranny


 Thursday, November 24, 2011 – by Ron Holland

Ron Holland

At the end of this article is a copy of the proposed state sovereignty amendment that Ron and Donnie Kennedy are promoting as the final solution to federal abuse. They believe that anything less will only continue the course of federal supremacy and the ultimate destruction of real American liberty. I sadly agree with them.

Just following Congress, the 2012 presidential campaign and the inability of citizens to influence government policy makes it clear to every American how broken the US political system has become. A few powerful interests run the entire show and the American people are being forced down a dark road to economic destruction. History shows us that Washington is immune to conventional national political action under the present system. What can freedom loving Americans do?

• We can’t change Washington because Congress is owned and controlled by special interests.

• Neither can we take over the establishment control of either political party as the media elites can break, sideline or ignore any candidate that threatens the elite interests.

• Third party efforts at the national level are doomed to failure and an ineffective tool for promoting freedom principles when compared to the successful Ron Paul campaign effort inside the GOP.

• Finally, education, although important, is not a fast enough solution to save our nation when more than 50% of the electorate lives off the looting of taxpayers through government benefits or make-work jobs.

So do freedom advocates just give up or wait for the eventual collapse of the economy and the US political system? While this is a prevalent view in freedom circles, hyperinflation and economic collapse even if you are invested to financially benefit from this outcome is certainly not a recipe for restoring limited government and liberty to our country. Fascism and wealth confiscation are the probable result, just look at what followed the failed German Weimar Republic in the 1930’s.

There is only one effective, democratic and peaceful tool left to Americans to defend their liberties and restore the original republic of our founding fathers. It is the right of state sovereignty and nullification, so effectively explained by Tom Woods in his book Nullification: How To Resist Federal Tyranny in the 21st Century.

Many other freedom advocates have proposed nullification and state sovereignty, including the Kennedy Brothers who have developed a State Sovereignty Amendment strategy that should be launched in all 50 states. Although the elites ruling our nation have total control over the federal government and the two-party system nationally, they have neglected to extend this top-down control to the state level. This is because over the last 50 years states have become mere powerless appendages of Washington without influence – and this is an opportunity for the Freedom movement.

Americans can, of course, continue feeling important and wasting time, money and efforts on establishment candidates for Congress and presidential campaigns claiming to represent our free-market views. But if we do, we are just playing in a rigged game to keep productive Americans busy at doing nothing that matters and does not threaten those in charge.

A decentralized national movement focused state-by-state at the legislature level is the only game left for us to play if we wish to be effective. When a state or states vote to nullify a congressional bank bailout, the sovereign debt of Washington or the Fed’s dollar policy, this will attract media attention, especially uncontrolled foreign journalists and the alternative freedom media. Media coverage attracts investor and market attention and as we see today in the European sovereign debt crisis originally born on Wall Street with Goldman Sachs, markets move politicians and governments.

This is our last and final solution available to restore freedom and limited government to these United States. Following the 2012 elections – regardless of whether Romney or Obama win or which corrupt political party controls Congress – this is the only real game left in town that matters.

What do you think?

After reviewing the sample sovereignty amendment below, you can reach Ron and Donnie Kennedy on their website at Remember, a return to state sovereignty and nullification is our last chance.

Feel free to improve on the proposed amendment and make it more appropriate for the unique needs and situation of your state, but do something now before it is too late! – Ron Holland, email: skironholland [at]


These United States of America are a Republic of Republics deriving its authority from the consent of the governed residing within their Sovereign State. Each Sovereign State is the agent of the people thereof. The federal government formed by the compact of the United States Constitution is the agent of the Sovereign States. Federal authority shall be supreme in all areas specifically delegated to it by the Constitution. All acts or legislation enacted pursuant to the Constitution shall be the supreme law of the land. The Sovereign State reserves an equal right to judge for itself as to the constitutionality of any act of the federal government.

Section I. The Sovereign State specifically reserves the right to interpose its sovereign authority between acts of the federal government and the liberties, property, and interests of the citizens of the state, thereby nullifying federal acts judged by the state to be an unwarranted infringement upon the reserved rights of the state and the people thereof.

1. State nullification of a federal act must be approved by a convention of the state.

2. Upon passage of an act of nullification, all federal authority for the enumerated and nullified act(s) shall be suspended.

3. Upon formal acceptance of nullification by three-fourths of the conventions of the states, including the original nullifying state, the enumerated federal act(s) shall be prohibited in the United States of America or its territories.

4. Upon formal rejection of nullification by three-fourths of the conventions of the states, the enumerated federal act(s) shall be presumed to be constitutional, notwithstanding any judgment of any federal or state court.

5. Until or unless there is a formal approval or rejection by the conventions of the states, the nullified federal act(s) shall remain non-operative as to the original and any additional nullifying states. A state that in its convention ratifies a particular act of nullification shall be construed to have nullified the same act as enumerated in the initiating state’s nullification.

6. No federal elected official, agent, or any individual working within or associated with any branch of the federal government may harass or attempt to harass, intimidate, or threaten a Sovereign State or the people thereof for exercising their rights under this amendment. No federal elected official, agent, or any individual working within or associated with any branch of the federal government shall attempt to influence or use their office to attempt to influence the deliberations of the people regarding the nullification of a federal act(s) or the acceptance or rejection of a nullified federal act(s).

7. Any United States military officer, noncommissioned officer or federal official or agent who carries out or attempts to carry out any order by a federal official, officer or agent to deny or hinder the people of a Sovereign State from exercising their rights under this amendment shall be subject to the offended state’s laws and may be tried accordingly. Jurisdiction in such cases is specifically denied to all federal courts, military courts, or any other court other than the courts of the offended state.

Section II. The government and people of these United States approve the principle that any people have a right to abolish the existing government and form a new one that suits them better. This principle illustrates the American idea that government rests on the consent of the governed and that it is the right of a people to alter or abolish it at will whenever it becomes destructive of the ends for which it was established. Therefore, the right of a Sovereign State to secede peacefully from the union voluntarily created by the compact of the Constitution is hereby specifically reserved to each state.

1. An act of secession shall be executed by a convention of the people of the state.

2. The seceded state shall appoint representatives to negotiate settlement of all debts owed the federal government, the purchase of federal properties within the Sovereign State, and the removal of federal military installations and personnel.

3. Upon acceptable arrangement for the payment of sums owed the federal government, the representatives may negotiate treaties of friendship, common defense, and commercial relations. Said treaties are subject to the same constitutional ratification as other treaties.

4. Readmission of a seceded state shall follow the same constitutional requirements as for any new state.

5. No federal elected official, agent, or any individual working within or associated with any branch of the federal government shall attempt to influence the people of the Sovereign State regarding their decision to secede from, remain with, or join this union.

6. Any United States military officer, noncommissioned officer, or federal official or agent who carries out or attempts to carry out any order by a federal official, officer, or agent to deny or hinder the people of a Sovereign State from exercising their rights under this amendment shall be subject to the offended state’s laws and may be tried accordingly. Jurisdiction in such cases is specifically denied to all federal courts, military courts, or any other court other than the courts of the offended state.

7. The inalienable right of the people of each Sovereign State to govern themselves is a right that existed before this formation of the federal government, and therefore nothing in this amendment shall be interpreted in such a manner as to deem the federal government to be the donor of the rights enumerated herein.


This action must be preceded by the installation of a State Banking Administration in each State, and State issued commodity indexed currency, or the Nationalization of the federal reserve, treasury, and IRS, other wise the feds will call in the debt and choke off the money supply, and virtually everything will come to a screeching halt. No State can survive on it’s own without control of its currency.

New Executive Order — Iran Sanctions


11 22 11 The following is excerpted from President Barak Obama‘s November 21, 2011 Press Release: Recent Executive Order.  The transcript of that release can be accessed at

“For Immediate Release November 21, 2011


(First paragraph) “Pursuant to the International Emergency Economic Powers Act (50 U.S.C. 1701 et seq.) (IEEPA), I hereby report that I have issued an Executive Order (the “order”) that takes additional steps with respect to the national emergency declared in Executive Order 12957 of March 15, 1995.

(Last paragraph) “I have delegated to the Secretary of the Treasury the authority, in consultation with the Secretary of State, to take such actions, including the promulgation of rules and regulations, and to employ all powers granted to the President by IEEPA as may be necessary to carry out the purposes of section 3 of the order. All agencies of the United States Government are directed to take all appropriate measures within their authority to carry out the provisions of the order.”

Here is a transcript of that EO for your consideration.  It reads as follows:

The White House

Office of the Press Secretary

For Immediate Release

November 21, 2011

Executive Order — Iran Sanctions


By the authority vested in me as President by the Constitution and the laws of the United States of America, including the International Emergency Economic Powers Act (50 U.S.C. 1701 et seq.) (IEEPA), the National Emergencies Act (50 U.S.C. 1601 et seq.), and section 301 of title 3, United States Code, and in order to take additional steps with respect to the national emergency declared in Executive Order 12957 of March 15, 1995,

I, BARACK OBAMA, President of the United States of America, hereby order:

Section 1. The Secretary of State, in consultation with the Secretary of the Treasury, the Secretary of Commerce, and the United States Trade Representative, and with the President of the Export-Import Bank, the Chairman of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, and other agencies and officials as appropriate, is hereby authorized to impose on a person any of the sanctions described in section 2 or 3 of this order upon determining that the person:

(a) knowingly, on or after the effective date of this order, sells, leases, or provides to Iran goods, services, technology, or support that has a fair market value of $1,000,000 or more or that, during a 12-month period, has an aggregate fair market value of $5,000,000 or more, and that could directly and significantly contribute to the maintenance or enhancement of Iran’s ability to develop petroleum resources located in Iran;

(b) knowingly, on or after the effective date of this order, sells, leases, or provides to Iran goods, services, technology, or support that has a fair market value of $250,000 or more or that, during a 12-month period, has an aggregate fair market value of $1,000,000 or more, and that could directly and significantly contribute to the maintenance or expansion of Iran’s domestic production of petrochemical products;

(c) is a successor entity to a person referred to in subsection (a) or (b) of this section;

(d) owns or controls a person referred to in subsection (a) or (b) of this section, and had actual knowledge or should have known that the person engaged in the activities referred to in that subsection; or

(e) is owned or controlled by, or under common ownership or control with, a person referred to in subsection (a) or (b) of this section, and knowingly participated in the activities referred to in that subsection.

Sec. 2. When the Secretary of State, in accordance with the terms of section 1 of this order, has determined that a person meets any of the criteria described in section 1 and has selected any of the sanctions set forth below to impose on that person, the heads of relevant agencies, in consultation with the Secretary of State, shall take the following actions where necessary to implement the sanctions imposed by the Secretary of State:

(a) the Board of Directors of the Export-Import Bank shall deny approval of the issuance of any guarantee, insurance, extension of credit, or participation in an extension of credit in connection with the export of any goods or services to the sanctioned person;

(b) agencies shall not issue any specific license or grant any other specific permission or authority under any statute that requires the prior review and approval of the United States Government as a condition for the export or reexport of goods or technology to the sanctioned person;

(c) with respect to a sanctioned person that is a financial institution:

(i) the Chairman of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System and the President of the Federal Reserve Bank of New York shall take such actions as they deem appropriate, including denying designation, or terminating the continuation of any prior designation of, the sanctioned person as a primary dealer in United States Government debt instruments; or

(ii) agencies shall prevent the sanctioned person from serving as an agent of the United States Government or serving as a repository for United States Government funds; or

(d) agencies shall not procure, or enter into a contract for the procurement of, any goods or services from the sanctioned person.

(e) The prohibitions in subsections (a)-(d) of this section apply except to the extent provided by statutes, or in regulations, orders, directives, or licenses that may be issued pursuant to this order, and notwithstanding any contract entered into or any license or permit granted prior to the effective date of this order.

Sec. 3. (a) When the Secretary of State, in accordance with the terms of section 1 of this order, has determined that a person has engaged in the activities described in section 1 and has selected any of the sanctions set forth below to impose on that person, the Secretary of the Treasury, in consultation with the Secretary of State, shall take the following actions where necessary to implement the sanctions imposed by the Secretary of State:

(i) prohibit any United States financial institution from making loans or providing credits to the sanctioned person totaling more than $10,000,000 in any 12-month period unless such person is engaged in activities to relieve human suffering and the loans or credits are provided for such activities;

(ii) prohibit any transactions in foreign exchange that are subject to the jurisdiction of the United States and in which the sanctioned person has any interest;

(iii) prohibit any transfers of credit or payments between financial institutions or by, through, or to any financial institution, to the extent that such transfers or payments are subject to the jurisdiction of the United States and involve any interest of the sanctioned person;

(iv) block all property and interests in property that are in the United States, that come within the United States, or that are or come within the possession or control of any United States person, including any foreign branch, of the sanctioned person, and provide that such property and interests in property may not be transferred, paid, exported, withdrawn, or otherwise dealt in; or

(v) restrict or prohibit imports of goods, technology, or services, directly or indirectly, into the United States from the sanctioned person.

(b) I hereby determine that, to the extent section 203(b)(2) of IEEPA (50 U.S.C. 1702(b)(2)) may apply, the making of donations of the type of articles specified in such section by, to, or for the benefit of any sanctioned person whose property and interests in property are blocked pursuant to subsection (a)(iv) of this section would seriously impair my ability to deal with the national emergency declared in Executive Order 12957, and I hereby prohibit such donations as provided by subsection (a)(iv) of this section.

(c) The prohibitions in subsection (a)(iv) of this section include, but are not limited to:

(i) the making of any contribution or provision of funds, goods, or services by, to, or for the benefit of any sanctioned person whose property and interests in property are blocked pursuant to this order; and

(ii) the receipt of any contribution or provision of funds, goods, or services from any such sanctioned person.

(d) The prohibitions in subsection (a) of this section apply except to the extent provided by statutes, or in regulations, orders, directives, or licenses that may be issued pursuant to this order, and notwithstanding any contract entered into or any license or permit granted prior to the effective date of this order.

Sec. 4. (a) Any transaction by a United States person or within the United States that evades or avoids, has the purpose of evading or avoiding, causes a violation of, or attempts to violate any of the prohibitions set forth in this order is prohibited.

(b) Any conspiracy formed to violate any of the prohibitions set forth in this order is prohibited.

Sec. 5. For the purposes of this order:

(a) the term “person” means an individual or entity;

(b) the term “entity” means a partnership, association, trust, joint venture, corporation, group, subgroup, or other organization;

(c) the term “United States person” means any United States citizen, permanent resident alien, entity organized under the laws of the United States or any jurisdiction within the United States (including foreign branches), or any person in the United States;

(d) the term “financial institution” includes (i) a depository institution (as defined in section 3(c)(1) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act) (12 U.S.C. 1813(c)(1)), including a branch or agency of a foreign bank (as defined in section 1(b)(7) of the International Banking Act of 1978) (12 U.S.C. 3101(7)); (ii) a credit union; (iii) a securities firm, including a broker or dealer; (iv) an insurance company, including an agency or underwriter; and (v) any other company that provides financial services;

(e) the term “United States financial institution” means a financial institution (including its foreign branches) organized under the laws of the United States or any jurisdiction within the United States or located in the United States;

(f) the term “sanctioned person” means a person on whom the Secretary of State, in accordance with the terms of section 1 of this order, has determined to impose sanctions pursuant to section 1;

(g) the term “to develop” petroleum resources means to explore for, or to extract, refine, or transport by pipeline, petroleum resources;

(h) the term “Iran” means the Government of Iran and the territory of Iran and any other territory or marine area, including the exclusive economic zone and continental shelf, over which the Government of Iran claims sovereignty, sovereign rights, or jurisdiction, provided that the Government of Iran exercises partial or total de facto control over the area or derives a benefit from economic activity in the area pursuant to international arrangements;

(i) the term “Government of Iran” includes the Government of Iran, any political subdivision, agency, or instrumentality thereof, and any person owned or controlled by, or acting for or on behalf of, the Government of Iran;

(j) the term “knowingly,” with respect to a conduct, a circumstance, or a result, means that the person has actual knowledge, or should have known, of the conduct, the circumstance, or the result;

(k) the term “petroleum resources” includes petroleum, oil, natural gas, liquefied natural gas, and refined petroleum products;

(l) the term “refined petroleum products” means diesel, gasoline, jet fuel (including naptha-type and kerosene-type jet fuel), and aviation gasoline; and

(m) the term “petrochemical products” includes any aromatic, olefin, and synthesis gas, and any of their derivatives, including ethylene, propylene, butadiene, benzene, toluene, xylene, ammonia, methanol, and urea.

Sec. 6. For those persons whose property and interests in property are blocked pursuant to this order who might have a constitutional presence in the United States, I find that because of the ability to transfer funds or other assets instantaneously, prior notice to such persons of measures to be taken pursuant to section 3(a)(iv) of this order would render those measures ineffectual. I therefore determine that for these measures to be effective in addressing the national emergency declared in Executive Order 12957, there need be no prior notice of an action taken pursuant to section 3(a)(iv) of this order.

Sec. 7. The Secretary of the Treasury, in consultation with the Secretary of State, is hereby authorized to take such actions, including the promulgation of rules and regulations, and to employ all powers granted to the President by IEEPA as may be necessary to carry out the purposes of section 3 of this order. The Secretary of the Treasury may redelegate any of these functions to other officers and agencies of the United States Government consistent with applicable law. All agencies of the United States Government are hereby directed to take all appropriate measures within their authority to carry out the provisions of this order.

Sec. 8. This order is not intended to, and does not, create any right or benefit, substantive or procedural, enforceable at law or in equity by any party against the United States, its departments, agencies, or entities, its officers, employees, or agents, or any other person.

Sec. 9. The measures taken pursuant to this order are in response to actions of the Government of Iran occurring after the conclusion of the 1981 Algiers Accords, and are intended solely as a response to those later actions.

Sec. 10. This order is effective at 12:01 a.m. eastern standard time on November 21, 2011.


November 20, 2011.

More at


Dump your bonds, cash, and stocks, then buy gold and silver coins and keep them in your possession, we’re about to get involved with the big boy’s this time.



Obama continues to travel giving speeches planning for his next election.  He still has not consented and allowed any of the payments to patriotic Americans, which will get this country and the world economies back on track.

The Obamas on Wednesday, November 9th, 2011, were hand delivered the document below by high level government officials.   It contains an IRS Report regarding the misappropriated funds.   We want all readers to specifically note that per investigation and the document below, a large amount of funds were transferred to the Royal Bank of Canada into an account of Michelle Obama.   In addition to the information the White Hats have previously reported and this document, we can further confirm that since November 9th, The Obamas have already illegally moved funds again out of these accounts.

We anticipate that Geithner will simply bury this legally filed report in a drawer.  What will Obama and Michelle say when the account history of these funds is distributed to the White House staff, Congress, world leaders, our global readers and delivered into other legal authorities?  The filing of this report alone to the IRS, if properly addressed, should sink him.

While we are musing over The Obamas, let us further entertain what the Bush family will think when someone begins to push to destroy the George H.W. Bush legacy over his own ill-gotten funds.  These funds exceed 350 Billion Dollars deposited in various banks throughout the world, and the history of these funds is being prepared for distribution to legal authorities and for reporting to the world.

Senior’s state of mind may not let him fully understand, but now that his wife Barbara and son Jeb are taking over, how will they react to the fact that the Bush family legacy is destroyed as they suffer and pay for the actions of the father?   How will they feel when the Bush name is removed from public places, airports, etc?

More to come…


BUSH SR. – THE ‘KING’ IS LOSING HIS MIND – How can a Stage Two Alzheimer Patient continue to terrorize American and  World Leaders!?

America is in grave danger by Washington Autocracy who have continued to fail to address the criminal actions of Bush Senior’s Dark Cabal who are in collusion with renegade bankers to destroy not only America’s, but the entire World’s financial system.  America is not immune to the collateral damage from other countries, because our financial systems and currencies have become homogeneous and interdependent. An unchecked system has allowed the greed, self interest, and criminal activities of a few to prosper while the rest of the world collapses.  JP Morgan Chase, Goldman Sachs, Bank of America, Citibank and Wall Street stand ready to fall, as they are cross invested in the European Union with substantial loans and trading portfolios.   America is in a free-fall led by a clueless President who is involved in vast criminal manipulations, a puppet on a string controlled by Bush Senior’s Cabal and George Soros.

As the global financial system spirals faster and faster to a bankrupt state, Bush Senior and Obama plan for their next move.  Obama is preparing for his exit as a failed one term President, with Senior allowing him to spend more time congregating his stolen offshore bank funds, which we last reported exceeded 11 Billion Dollars.  He has degradated America with the ultimate scam.  And a long time ago Bush Senior started to make plans for his escape.  Hence, the Bush family, Soros and cohorts over the last several weeks have been flying in mass equipment and assets to their heavily fortified 100,000 plus acre Paraguay Ranches.  As the World’s major financial system collapses, their plan is to take all their stolen assets and escape to the old Nazi Safe Haven immune from extradition. The Paraguayan newspapers have already announced the future arrival of the Bush family.   Our justice system is neutered to stop and apprehend them.  The world looks at America aghast with disbelief.

By the end of next week investigators will have completed a comprehensive report on Bush Senior, exposing the location of his stolen global banking funds.  Upon completion we will also detail an expose of Obama’s fraudulent funds.  Furthermore, this information will be made available to the proper global authorities for future criminal investigations.

As the G20 countries struggle for a global financial solution, Chancellor Angela Merkel and Nicholas Sarkozy now realize their own survival is being threatened and entrapped with the sinking ship.  They see the demise of Bush Senior’s power and the disintegration of the old Cabal.   Although they both understand that Bush Senior’s Dark Cabal still has some power,  the encroaching reality that Bush Senior has entered the second phase of dementia is now perceived that it is time to review Geo Political loyalties.   Simply stated, “The King is losing his mind,” but make no mistake that even now Senior is still calling all the shots.   Obama, Geithner, Bush Junior, the Clintons and other of the co-conspirators are still moving to the will of the puppet master.

As an example of Bush Senior’s control, as we have viewed from recent European Union events, we are very concerned that the present actions of Chancellor Merkel may possibly reveal that Bush Senior or his co-conspirators may be bribing or threatening Merkel if she does not prevent or derail by any means a solution to the European financial crisis.  Remember the Cabal’s new world order can only succeed with the failure of the global financial system.

Even though Bush Senior maintains control over some of the political powers, we are seeing signs of his collapse.  We have reported that Josef Ackermann played a focal role in conjunction with Bush Senior, but due to Josef Ackermann’s clear criminal exposure and visibility via the White Hats, the Bilderbergs have now severed their relationship with Ackermann in hopes of preventing criminal activities encroaching on them.  Ackermann’s wheels are coming off.   Dr. Michael Herzog has threatened to tell all when he is arraigned over the Falcone fraud executed by Ackermann, Mitt Romney, Bush Senior and other co-conspirator’s associates.   We can now report from further investigation that Bush Senior, Mitt Romney and Josef Ackermann made approximately 3 Billion Dollars together with their criminal partners Dr. Michael Herzog and Paul Guenette stealing from Edward Falcone.  The CIA was also a recipient of Falcone’s stolen funds.   Ben Bernanke tracked this transaction following Falcone’s stolen funds, but later took no action due to pressure from Bush Senior.   How will the new CIA director, an honorable man and true patriot, react to this?

Now that we see signs of the collapse of the Dark Cabal, a demented King slowly losing his mind to Stage Two Alzheimers and a President perceived by the world as greatly inept with his moral authority lost and his moral compass destroyed, the World is ready for a financial and political reset.   We have reported that money exists via the World Global Settlements and lawful obligations by the United States Treasury to patriotic individuals which would more than suffice to regenerate the World Global economies.

The United States Treasury and Federal Reserve have been offered a simple and fast way out of our dilemma:

  1. Return the long overdue funds rightfully owed to patriotic Americans.
  2. Release the World Global Settlements.
  3. Repay what was stolen from Tropos Capital and all other missing funds.

The Federal tax revenue alone will eliminate our national debt.  This responsible action will immediately channel major US humanitarian and global infrastructure projects.  This will immediately help resolve the Euro financial dilemma, create millions of jobs through industrial projects and new technologies, while building a new foundation that will not only benefit America, but financially stabilize the World.

Edward Falcone is another American Investor ruthlessly betrayed in a Bush Senior fraudulent transaction.  Falcone has planned substantial construction investment projects to develop and aid communities in Florida and other US states, which would create jobs and income security for Americans.  Via an audit review, over 800 Billion Dollars has been created by inter-Bank compound trading with Falcone’s stolen funds.  Based on Falcone’s stolen funds, the British Tax Authority may have missed 160 Billion (US Dollars) in tax revenue.  This does not include all the other transactions that could possibly run into the trillions of dollars in tax revenue owed to the British Government.  The largest beneficiary of these funds was the CIA, and secondly Bush Senior, whose accounts we are presently tracking.  Instead of Falcone’s earned capital going as planned to help America, it has triggered theft and bribery of corrupt Politicians.

Remember, we reported a Two Hundred Million Dollar bribe taken by Vice President Joe Biden, offered by Hillary Clinton, acting for Bush Senior.   Of the 3 Billion dollars reported above, Mitt Romney alone, acting with Bush Senior was paid over $1 Billion to front for Bush Senior.  This money was stolen from Falcone’s program.  Falcone and his associates have already communicated with key Republican Senators and their plan to remove Romney as a Presidential candidate by filing a Federal lawsuit against Romney, Bush Senior and his associates.  Falcone is using the same strategy now as he did when Romney was a Vice Presidential candidate for John McCain.  Just when he is most vulnerable and a likely candidate, Falcone will share the incriminating evidence and have Romney removed.  The White Hats will make sure that all opposition parties are aware of the details of Romney’s corruption. Romney cannot be allowed to be elected as yet another corrupt and bribe-taking United States President.

This whole saga of Political and Banking corruption was predicated upon large scale use of London Banking, operating via nominee and hidden offshore accounts.  Trillions of dollars have been traded in a series of bank programs making a total mockery of the humanitarian intent of these programs.  Political entities and persons in high level positions have been bought off.  Even the Bank of England itself is implicated in the Falcone affair along with Barclays, Deutsche Bank and HSBC Bank.

This corrupt practice has now been exposed to the House of Lords and the Parliamentary Audit Committee under Margaret Hodge.  While pressures and roadblocks will be imposed to delay investigations, once this gets into the hands of the opposition MP’s, Unions and media, exposure will create a Tsunami of redress consequences.  It will blow the lid off in a fire storm of retribution.   There are possibly Trillions in withholding Taxes which have been avoided, and will face enforced collection by the Revenue Commissioners in London once appraised.  The UK’s own Fiscal dilemmas can be resolved by simple Tax enforcement and conspiring Bankers being brought to justice.   Murdoch’s own media interests will be well served to expose this as Political dynamite but that has a lot to do with what the Bildeberg’s direct him to do.    The Federal Reserve Bank of New York has no idea of the extent of their files being held, corruption activities becoming known and being systematically tracked.   As this is exposed to the European Union and British media, IT’S GAME OVER!   Watergate will look like a Kindergarten birthday party.

THE WORLD GLOBAL SETTLEMENTS MUST BE RELEASED TODAY!   Also, the Iraqi Dinar revaluation is a cross-linked element of the solution, but compromised by Bush family interests and co-conspirators who have demanded and received twenty percent (20%) of the Forex differential, when exchange valuations are set to underpin the new currency.   In demonstration of the collusion between Bush and Obama, Obama has agreed to this “fee” for the Bush family.  Yet Obama, nor any one person in the Administration, is willing to provide a justifiable and legal position for this “fee”.

Will Obama finally realize he is being cut loose and that Senior has no more use for him?  Does he realize that he is expendable and will take the major part of the fall?  Can Obama be so blind or is Valarie Jarret not serving the interests of the President and thereby the interests of the American people?   Senior has allowed him to steal in excess of 11 Billion dollars in fraudulent funds.  Will Obama wake up and realize that Senior will never allow him to use these funds?  THE ONLY CHOICE FOR OBAMA IS TO USE HIS EXECUTIVE POWERS AND RELEASE ALL THE WORLD GLOBAL SETTLEMENTS IMMEDIATELY!   He still has the power to do what is right, but will his moral compass continue to be self edifying?  Obama alone will take the final punishment and be the end of his own demise.

All this and so much more has and will continue to be unveiled.  Pay what is lawfully owed and get Americans back to work.  Let real Patriots get Projects started.  Investigate and start the political and banking clean-up NOW!

What happens in the next few days may be the most important events in the history of mankind.

Federal Reserve System audit forfeits franchise for securities fraud and embezzlement of $16 trillion.



Federal Reserve System audit forfeits franchise for securities fraud and embezzlement of $16 trillion.

Posted by PAUL W KINCAIDWorld news Thursday, November 17th, 2011

An audit of the Federal Reserve System has revealed in the Sanders Report that the privately owned Federal Reserve secretly and unlawfully doled out more than $16 trillion in zero interest loans and concealed electronic funds transfers to some of the largest financial institutions and corporations in the United States and throughout the world.  The non-partisan, investigative arm of Congress determined that the Federal Reserve acted illegally.  In fact, according to the report, the Federal Reserve knew their financial transactions were illegal and provided conflict of interest waivers to its employees and private contractors so they could keep investments in the same financial institutions and corporations that were given emergency loans.  The report is evidence that reveals major securities fraud in the embezzlement of $16 trillion by the Federal Reserve.  Securities fraud and embezzlement are both felony criminal offenses.  Any criminal offense committed by the Federal Reserve forfeits the Federal Reserve franchise – U.S. Code TITLE 12 CHAPTER 3 SUBCHAPTER IX § 341. Second

Embezzlement is the act of dishonestly appropriating or secreting assets by one or more individuals to whom such assets have been entrusted.  Embezzlement is performed in a manner that is premeditated, systematic and/or methodical, with the explicit intent to conceal the activities from other individuals, usually because it is being done without their knowledge or consent. U.S. Code TITLE 18 > PART I > CHAPTER 31 – EMBEZZLEMENT AND THEFT § 644. Banker receiving unauthorized deposit of public money

Whoever, not being an authorized depositary of public moneys, knowingly receives from any disbursing officer, or collector of internal revenue, or other agent of the United States, any public money on deposit, or by way of loan or accommodation, with or without interest, or otherwise than in payment of a debt against the United States, or uses, transfers, converts, appropriates, or applies any portion of the public money for any purpose not prescribed by law is guilty of embezzlement and shall be fined under this title or not more than the amount so embezzled, whichever is greater, or imprisoned not more than ten years, or both; but if the amount embezzled does not exceed $1,000, he shall be fined not more than $1,000 or imprisoned not more than one year, or both.

$16 trillion is 10 times more than what the U.S. Congress authorized and Bush ($700 billion) and Obama ( $787 billion) signed off on.  The Federal Reserve was only authorized by Congress to disburse $1.487 trillion in federal tax dollars in bailouts.  The Federal Reserve embezzled another $14.5 trillion.

The Congressional report determined that the Fed secretly hide most of the embezzled money into their own banks.  The rest the Fed unilaterally transfered trillions of dollars to foreign banks and corporations from South Korea to Scotland.  Foreign banks and corporations which the Federal Reserve bankers had a personal financial interest or stake in.

The report reveals that the CEO of JP Morgan Chase served on the New York Fed’s board of directors at the same time that his bank received more than $390 billion in federal money from the Fed – conflict of interest.  Moreover, JP Morgan Chase served as one of the clearing banks (money laundering banks) for the Fed’s emergency loans programs (aka – embezzlement schemes).

In another disturbing finding, the Government Accountability Office said that on Sept. 19, 2008, William Dudley, who is now the New York Fed president, was granted a waiver to let him keep investments in AIG and General Electric at the same time AIG and GE were given federal funds.  One reason the Fed did not make Dudley sell his holdings, according to the audit, was that it would have exposed the Fed’s conflict of interest and major securities fraud in the embezzlement of $16 trillion.

The investigation also revealed that the Fed outsourced most of its embezzling to private contractors, many of which were rewarded with extremely low-interest and then-secret loans.

The Fed outsourced virtually all of the operations of their $16 trillion embezzlement scheme to private contractors like JP Morgan Chase, Morgan Stanley, and Wells Fargo.  For their part the same firms also received trillions of dollars in Fed loans at near-zero interest rates. Morgan Stanley helped the Federal Reserve banker launder embezzled $trillions into AIG.

A more detailed Government Accountability Office investigation into corruption charges, securities fraud, embezzlement, money-laundering and conflicts of interest at the Fed was due on Oct. 18.

The Sanders Report on the GAO Audit on Major Conflicts of Interest at the Federal Reserve

Did you know that the $14.5 trillion the Federal Reserve embezzled (US Congress only authorized $1.487 trillion) could pay the entire U.S. national debt – $14.346 trillion.  To avert default the U.S. government need only to seize the assets of the Federal Reserve banks (the big six U.S. banks collectively hold about $9.399 trillion in assets) and get back the $trillions that the Federal Reserve illegally embezzled and money laundered to their foreign banks and corporations.

The U.S. government can recover $trillions from the Federal Reserve and their banks through asset forfeiture.  Asset forfeiture is confiscation, by the State, of assets which are either (a) the alleged proceeds of crime or (b) the alleged instrumentalities of crime, and more recently, alleged terrorism.  Proceeds of crime means any economic advantage derived from or obtained directly or indirectly from a criminal offense or criminal offenses.  Crimes committed by the Federal Reserve banks against the United States and its people include; conflict of interest, securities fraud, embezzlement, fraud, money laundering, hoarding, profiteering, larceny, racketeering . . .

In 1982, a criminal forfeiture provision was enacted as part of the Racketeering Influenced and Corrupt Organizations Act (“RICO”), 18 U.S.C. § 1961, which provided for the forfeiture of all property over which the RICO organization exercised an influence.

The Money Laundering Control Act of 1986 added new felony provisions at 18 U.S.C. § 1956 for the laundering of the proceeds of certain defined “specified unlawful activity,” as well as prohibiting structuring transactions under 31 U.S.C. § 5324 (with the intent to evade certain reporting requirements). The law also added civil and criminal forfeiture provisions at 18 U.S.C. §§ 981 and 982 for confiscating the property involved in money laundering.

According to the Legislative Guide to the United Nations Convention against Transnational Organized Crime and the Protocols Thereto, “Criminalizing the conduct from which substantial illicit profits are made does not adequately punish or deter organized criminal groups. Even if arrested and convicted, some of these offenders will be able to enjoy their illegal gains for their personal use and for maintaining the operations of their criminal enterprises. Despite some sanctions, the perception would still remain that crime pays. . . . Practical measures to keep offenders from profiting from their crimes are necessary. One of the most important ways to do this is to ensure that States have strong confiscation regimes

Top 10 Banks in the United States

  Institution Headquarters


1. Bank of America Corp. Charlotte, N.C.


2. J. P. Morgan Chase & Company New York, N.Y.


3. Citigroup New York, N.Y


4. Wells Fargo & Company San Francisco, C.A.


5. Goldman Sachs Group, Inc. New York, N.Y.


6. Morgan Stanley New York, N.Y.


7. Metlife, Inc. New York, N.Y.


8. Barclays Group US, Inc. Wilmington, Del.


9. Taunus Corporation New York, N.Y.


10. HSBC North America Inc. New York, N.Y



As of Mar. 31, 2010.
Source: Federal Reserve System, National Information Center.

According to United States Code, TITLE 12 CHAPTER 3 SUBCHAPTER IX § 341. Second. states that the U.S. Federal Reserve Banks are to be dissolved today by “forfeiture of franchise for violation of law.” Securities fraud and embezzlement by the Federal Reserve Bank is cause for immediate forfeiture and imprisonment of the Federal Reserve and its bankers.

List of banks involved in the $16 trillion + securities fraud and embezzlement

The Federal Reserve Bank of New York provides an up to date list of “Primary Dealers” obligated to implement the Federal Reserve fraud and embezzlement scheme.

“Primary dealers serve as trading counterparties of the New York Fed in its implementation of (Fed) monetary policy. This role includes the obligations to: (i) participate consistently in open market operations to carry out U.S. monetary policy pursuant to the direction of the Federal Open Market Committee (FOMC); and (ii) provide the New York Fed‘s trading desk with market information and analysis (non-public stock market information – aka insider trading) helpful in the formulation and implementation of monetary policy (so that the Fed can profit from this insider information).

Primary dealers are also required to participate in all auctions of U.S. government debt (acquiring wealth generated from the transactions of the illicit funds – aka money laundering for the Fed) and to make reasonable markets for the New York Fed when it transacts on behalf of its foreign official account-holders. (the New York Fed is stating who they are working for – on behalf of its foreign official account- holders)”

List of Primary Dealers (Fed’s money laundering banks.  Listed in alphabetical order only.)

Bank of Nova Scotia, New York Agency (the third largest bank in Canada. Opened New York Agency in 1907)

BMO Capital Markets Corp. (the fourth largest Canadian bank)

BNP Paribas Securities Corp. (Paris, France)

Barclays Capital Inc. (London, United Kingdom)

Cantor Fitzgerald & Co. (United States)

Citigroup Global Markets Inc. (CIA drug money laundering bank, United States)

Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC (Zurich, Switzerland)

Daiwa Capital Markets America Inc. (Tokyo, Japan)

Deutsche Bank Securities Inc. (Frankfurt, Germany.)

Goldman, Sachs & Co. (United States)

HSBC Securities (USA) Inc. (founded in Hong Kong, headquarters London, United Kingdom)

Jefferies & Company, Inc. (United States)

J.P. Morgan Securities LLC (United States)

Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated (United States)

Mizuho Securities USA Inc. (Tokyo, Japan)

Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC (United States)

Nomura Securities International, Inc. (Tokyo, Japan)

RBC Capital Markets, LLC (a Canadian investment bank, part of Royal Bank of Canada)

RBS Securities Inc. (Royal Bank of Scotland Group)

SG Americas Securities, LLC (United States)

UBS Securities LLC. (Zürich & Basel, Switzerland.  Rothschild controlled.  The Rothschild family hold the popes purse strings from this bank – the keys of the Vatican is a predominate part of their logo.)

All of the above named banks (includes both U.S. and foreign banks) money launder the over $16 trillion (U.S) that the Federal Reserve embezzled.  These banks money launder the Fed embezzled U.S. Tax Dollars in three steps:

1) the illicit funds are introduced into the financial system by “placement”,

2) the “Primary Dealers” carrying out complex financial transactions in order to camouflage the illicit funds (“layering”), and

3) they acquire wealth generated from the transactions (loans, mortgages, stock market trading) of the illicit funds (“integration”).

All listed banks are controlled by the European Central Bank (Rothschild family) which controls it all for the Vatican, which is headed by the Nazi German Pope.  All are working to enslave the World under a New World Order, aka Fourth Reich, aka Fourth unHoly Roman Empire.


  1. 1.                            PAUL W KINCAID

November 12, 2011 – 12:03 pm

The “List of Primary Dealers” listed in this article comes directly from the Federal Reserve Bank of New York website.

The list is listed in the exact same order as listed by the Fed New York Bank. I just added the nationality to the listed banks.

The fact that the Federal Reserve Bank of New York states that all named “Primary Dealers” are obligated and are required to participate means the named banks are now controlled by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. The Federal Reserve Bank of New York makes this fact perfectly clear with their policy statement – “The primary dealers “serve”, first and foremost, as trading counterparties of the Federal Reserve Bank of New York (The New York Fed) in its implementation of monetary policy.”

“This policy sets the standards for primary dealers (Standards). Each primary dealer must meet the Standards, initially and on an on-going basis. ”

The current United States Secretary of the Treasury, Timothy Geithner, was the 9th President of the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. November 17, 2003 – January 26, 2009. Geithner, as president of the New York Fed, was the syndicate’s boss. He created the primary dealers group to money launder the money he and the United States Secretary of the Treasury predecessor and Goldman Sachs CEO Henry Paulson stole from the American people.

  1. 2.                            PAUL W KINCAID

November 12, 2011 – 12:11 pm

“It is well that the people of the nation do not understand our banking and monetary system, for if they did, I believe there would be a revolution before tomorrow morning.” — Henry Ford

  1. 3.                            PAUL W KINCAID

November 12, 2011 – 12:11 pm

“The regional Federal Reserve banks are not government agencies. …but are independent, privately owned and locally controlled corporations.” — Lewis vs. United States, 680 F. 2d 1239 9th Circuit 1982

  1. 4.                            PAUL W KINCAID

November 12, 2011 – 12:17 pm

“I believe that banking institutions are more dangerous to our liberties than standing armies. Already they have raised up a monied aristocracy that has set the government at defiance. The issuing power (of money) should be taken away from the banks and restored to the people to whom it properly belongs.” — Thomas Jefferson, U.S. President.

  1. 5.                            PC

November 12, 2011 – 12:39 pm

The second report on the Government Accountability Office investigation into corruption charges, securities fraud, embezzlement, money-laundering and conflicts of interest at the Federal Reserve has been made public.

The Sanders Report on the GAO Audit on Major Conflicts of Interest at the Federal Reserve

The U.S. Federal Reserve Banks can be dissolved today by “forfeiture of franchise for violation of law.” The Sanders Report presents concrete indictable evidence that the Federal Reserve willingly and knowingly violated the law and as per United States Code, TITLE 12 CHAPTER 3 SUBCHAPTER IX § 341. the Federal Reserve is hereby forfeited.

  1. 6.                            PC

November 12, 2011 – 4:53 pm

Prime Minister Stephen Harper said Friday that Europe must sort out its own economic mess — and flatly stated that Canada will not provide any funds to bail out the continent. This is a flat out lie. Harper is lying to the Canadian people. Canada is already working on transferring Canadian funds to the European bailout fund. Bank of Canada governor Mark Carney was appointed head of the Vatican created Financial Stability Board (FSB) – reported by CBC News on November 4, 2011.

As leader of the FSB, Carney is endorsing U.S. controlled International Monetary Fund (IMF) to redistribute global liquidity (redistribution of the Global wealth – aka communism). Carney is allowed to remain head of Canada’s central bank while also being head of the FSB. A major conflict of interest now exists because the primary role of the Bank of Canada is to “promote the economic and financial well-being of Canada.” Today the Bank of Canada mandate has been severely compromised as its leader is now head of the FSB – an organization that was set up to promote the economic and financial well-being of the Vatican. The role of the FSB is to create a World central bank with the Pope holding the money for the entire world.

On October 25, 2011 the Vatican made public its intent. “A “global public authority” should be established to impose fresh curbs on financial institutions, including a tax on financial instruments”. The Vatican wants a financial transactions tax (FTT) to be imposed on all financial transactions – World wide. The new tax will be imposed on the customers of the institutions rather than the owners of the institutions. Where will this tax revenue go to? To the pedophilic Vatican of course.

The Vatican urged the G20 and the UN to create “a kind of central world bank” to discipline markets and, later on, a world government or “public authority with universal jurisdiction”.

The The National Post (Canadian publication) quoted the Vatican as saying,

“Of course, this transformation will be made at the cost of a gradual, balanced transfer of a part of each nation’s powers to a world authority and to regional authorities, but this is necessary at a time when the dynamism of human society and the economic and the progress of technology are transcending borders, which are in fact already very eroded in a globalised world.”

This central World bank has already been created – The Financial Stability Board or FSB ~ a public authority with universal jurisdiction – or so the pedophiles at that Vatican claim. The Vatican report was released in Canada because the head of the Bank of Canada is also now the head of the Vatican’s FSB.

  1. 7.                            PAUL W KINCAID

November 15, 2011 – 3:10 pm

On the Federal Reserve Bank of New York website under “Administration of Relationships with Primary Dealers’ it defines the role of the “Primary Dealers”. “The primary dealers serve, first and foremost, as trading counterparties of the Federal Reserve Bank of New York (The New York Fed) in its implementation of monetary policy.

A counterparty is a legal and financial term. It means a party to a contract. That means all of the listed “Primary Dealers” are under contract with the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. The contract requires all “Primary Dealers” to serve, first and foremost, as trading agents of the Fed. The Fed is their boss. That means foreign banks, including listed Canadian banks are required to implement the polices of the United States Central bank – the Fed. Canadian banks listed are aiding and abetting a foreign government. Any Canadian or corporation who spies for a foreign power, or reveals state secrets to a foreign power in peacetime is committing the crime of “treason”. Canadian banks listed as “Primary Dealers” for the United States Federal Reserve Bank of New York are spying for the United States. They are disclosing, without lawful authority, financial records and statements to agents (Federal Reserve Bank of New York) of a foreign state (the United States). They know or should know that the material being transferred to the Federal Reserve Bank of New York may be used to impair Canada’s economic independence and prosperity.

  1. 8.                            PAUL W KINCAID

November 15, 2011 – 3:38 pm

The U.S. government bailouts of the Federal Reserve banks are nothing more than an elaborate money laundering scheme. They are criminal acts perpetrated by the presidents of the United States against its investors – the US people. Both Bush and Obama declared that it was in the best interest of the people to invest $trillions to save a handful of banks owned by the Federal Reserve. Their investment of tax dollars was guaranteed by both Bush and Obama. Each and every bank was given more money (tax dollars) than was actually needed. Instead of helping to fix the US financial crisis the governments of Bush and Obama added to the crisis by literally giving away money that in most cases were 4 to 6, even 10 times the entire yearly earnings reported by the banks.

According to a study on executive compensation released by New York State Attorney General Andrew Cuomo:

• Goldman Sachs, which earned $2.3 billion for the entire year 2008 and received approximately 4 times their net earnings or $10 billion in TARP funding, paid out $4.8 billion in bonuses in 2008 – more than double their net 2008 income.

• Morgan Stanley, which earned $1.7 billion in 2008 and received approximately 6 times their net earnings or $10 billion in bailout funds, handed out $4.475 billion in bonuses, nearly three times their net income.

• JPMorgan Chase, which earned $5.6 billion in 2008 and received approximately 4 times their net 2008 earnings or $25 billion from the government, paid out $8.69 billion in bonus money.

• Citigroup and Merrill Lynch lost a combined $54 billion in 2008. They received a total of $55 billion in bailouts which they used to wipe out their entire $54 billion debt from their book then put themselves back in debt by handing out $9 billion in combined bonuses. ($5.33 billion for Citigroup; $3.6 billion for Merrill Lynch, which was subsequently acquired by Bank of America.)

• Bank of America earned $4 billion in 2008 and paid out $3.3 billion in bonuses in 2008 immediately after the bank received $45 billion in TARP funds. They were given over 10 times their net earning for 2008. Bank of America used the bailout money to buy up banks including Merrill Lynch which they paid $50 billion for. Bank of America actually money laundered federal aid money – used to purchase high-value items (other banks) to change the form of the money – took tax payers’ dollars and bought other banks.

• AIG was given more than $173 billion in Bush / Obama bailout scheme money. The Wall Street Journal reported that about $50 billion of more than $173 billion that the U.S. government has poured into American International Group Inc since last fall has been paid to at least two dozen U.S. and foreign financial institutions. The newspaper reported that some of the banks paid by AIG since the insurer started getting taxpayer funds were: Goldman Sachs Group Inc, Deutsche Bank AG, Merrill Lynch, Societe Generale, Calyon, Barclays Plc, Rabobank, Danske, HSBC, Royal Bank of Scotland, Banco Santander, Morgan Stanley, Wachovia, Bank of America, and Lloyds Banking Group. American International Group Inc. lost $62 billion in just 92 days or so they declared in order to get $173 billion from the US people. AIG was used by Bush and Obama to money launder more US tax dollars to banks that had already received $billions. They went through AIG to intentionally hide money transactions that were obtained illegally by faked and or falsified bank quarterly financial reports.

Both Bush and Obama actions are criminal, idiotic to say the least. Its a classic case of dumb and dumber. Both have got to be either the dumbest people on the planet when it comes to leadership and handling a crisis or the craftiest criminal masterminds in the world. How they handled the US economic crisis proves this.

Both Bush and Obama were given an amount that would be needed to fix the problem but they both paid 4 to 6 times the asking price. If you were shopping to buy a good used vehicle and you found one and the asking price was $10,000 would you give $40 – 60,000 to the seller? Of course you wouldn’t. But that is exactly what both Bush and Obama have done. They’ve given away 4 to 6 times the asking price for a lemon. They both illegally took large sums of money from the American people (tax dollars) and poured it into allegedly failing Federal Reserve owned or controlled banks which they (the reported failing banks) used the legitimate banking system to launder the Bush / Obama money to other banks. The US tax dollars were suppose to be used to buy up all the failing banks’ worthless bad debt (no evidence exists or has ever been presented to actually verify that the money was ever actually used to buy up any bad debt). Instead the money was actually used illegally to buy other banks and write big fat bonus checks to each and every money laundering conspirator – including Bush and Obama.

No sooner had Obama signed his $787 billion bonus plan check to the Federal Reserve bankers in February 2009 than the first major disclosure of corruption were reported by federal investigators in April 2009. The LA Times reported that federal investigators had opened at least 20 criminal probes into possible securities fraud, tax violations, insider trading and other crimes.

The disclosures reinforce fears that the hastily designed and rapidly changing bailout program run by the Treasury Department and Federal Reserve is going to carry a heavy price.

What started out as a $787 billion effort only to buy toxic securities has morphed into at least 12 separate programs that cover up over $16 trillion in direct financial transfers, zero interest loans, loan guarantees and bank bonuses by and to the Federal Reserve bankers.



by Steven Wayne Pattison, ©2011

Thomas Hobbes’s “Leviathan” advocates a strong central government for any political entity so as to avoid war and civil unrest

(Nov. 15, 2011) — [Editor’s Note:  The following essay is a continuation of the State Sovereignty discussion published on October 31, 2011.]


How many different types of states are there?  Starting on page 4405 of Black’s Law Dictionary (8th ed. 2004), you will find more than one definition for the term ‘state’ and the following different types of states – ‘client state’; ‘imperial state’; ‘nonsovereign state’; ‘part-sovereign state’; ‘police state’; ‘receiving state’; ‘satellite state’; ‘sending state’; ‘simple state’; ‘social-service state’; ‘sovereign state’; and ‘unitary state’ with different definitions.

Now for a simpler definition for the De jure States of the Union where you will find the following definition – “8. The district of Columbia and the territorial districts of the United States, are not states within the meaning of the constitution and of the judiciary act, so as to enable a citizen thereof to sue a citizen of one of the states in the federal courts. 2 Cranch, 445; 1 Wheat. 91.” The following found within Page 538 of the THIRD EDITION 1848 of volume II – ‘A LAW DICTIONARYADAPTED TO THE CONSTITUTION AND LAWS OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA AND OF THE SEVERAL STATES OF THE AMERICAN UNION’ by John Bouvier.

STATE, government. This word is used in various senses. In its most enlarged sense, it signifies a self-sufficient body of persons united together in one community for the defence of their rights, and to do right and justice to foreigners. In this sense, the state means the whole people united into one body politic; (q. v.) and the state, and the people of the state, are equivalent expressions. 1 Pet. Cond. Rep. 37 to 39; 3 Dall. 93; 2 Dall. 425; 2 Wilson’s Lect. 120; Dane’s Appx. §50, p. 63 1 Story, Const. §361. In a more limited sense, the word `state’ expresses merely the positive or actual organization of the legislative, or judicial powers; thus the actual government of the state is designated by the name of the state; hence the expression, the state has passed such a law, or prohibited such an act. State also means the section of territory occupied by a state, as the state of Pennsylvania.

2. By the word state is also meant, more particularly, one of the commonwealths which form the United States of America. The constitution of the United States makes the following provisions in relation to the states.

3. Art. 1, s. 9, §5. No tax or duty shall be laid on articles exported from any state. No preference shall be given by any regulation of commerce or re-venue to the ports of one state over those of another, nor shall vessels bound to or from one state be obliged to enter, clear, or pay duties in another.

4. – §6. No money shall be drawn from the treasury but in consequence of appropriations made by law; and a regular statement and account of the receipts and expenditures of all public money shall be published from time to time.

5. – §7. No title of nobility shall be granted by the United States, and no person holding any office of profit or trust under them shall, without the consent of congress, accept of any present, emolument, office, or title of any kind whatever, from, any king, prince, or foreign state.

6. – Art. 1, s. 10, §1. No state shall enter into any treaty, alliance, or confederation; grant letters of marque and reprisal; coin money; emit bills of credit; make anything but gold and silver coin a tender in payments of debts; pass any bill of attainder, ex-post-facto, or law impairing the obligation of contracts; or grant any title of nobility.

7. – §2. No state shall, without the consent of congress, lay any imposts or duties on imports or exports, except what may be absolutely necessary for executing its inspection laws; and the net produce of all duties and imposts laid by any state on imports or exports shall be for the use of the treasury of the United States, and all such laws shall be subject to the revision and control of congress. No state, shall, without the consent of congress, lay any duty on tonnage, keep troops or ships of war in time of peace, enter into any agreement or compact with another state, or with a foreign power, or engage in war, unless actually invaded, or in such imminent danger as will not admit of delay.

8. The District of Columbia and the territorial districts of the United States, are not states within the meaning of the constitution and of the judiciary act, so as to enable a citizen thereof to sue a citizen of one of the states in the federal courts. 2 Cranch, 445; 1 Wheat. 91.

Vide, generally, Mr. Madison’s report in the legislature of Virginia, January, 1800; 1 Story’s Com. on Const. § 208; 1 Kent, Com. 189, note b; Grotius, B. 1, c. 1, s. 14; Ib. B. 3, c. 3, s. 2; Burlamaqui, vol. 2, pt. 1, c. 4, s. 9; Vattel, B. 1, c. 1; 1 Toull. N. 202, note (1); Nation; Cicer. de Repub. 1. 1, s. 25.

The Revised Sixth Edition contains the part beginning with ‘Vide’ above as found on site page added to number 9 as stated in the following. It is questionable that from 1848 to 1856, only eight years, they would have had to add the following. The Federal Constitution was adopted on September 17, 1787, and by 1848, they would have had all this worked out, one would think.  What happened sometime after 1848 for them to identify “things not surrendered to the national government by the constitution”? There is only one large event before 1856 which will take another webpage to fully cover. It can be called the ‘Conspiracy’ to ‘Divide’ the People. As reported within ‘A Time for Choosing, Part III’, Lincoln explains a ‘Conspiracy’ to ‘Divide’ the People which had started long before 1856.

The first ten amendments were reportedly adopted for this reason as stated within the Preamble – “in order to prevent misconstruction or abuse of its powers, that further declaratory and restrictive clausesshould be added: And as extending the ground of public confidence in the Government, will best ensure the beneficent ends of its institution.” Also found on the Preamble website – “These amendments were ratified December 15, 1791 from what is known as the “Bill of Rights.” Here I have to object, and you should, also, if you read what is reported:  they were “declaratory and restrictive clauses” just like the rest of the Federal Constitution, which are instructions for the elected and appointed officials of their required duties when they took their required Oath of Office.  The act of Congress of June 1, 1789, 1 Story’s L. U. S. p. 1, regulates the time and manner of administering certain oaths and is explained within LAW DICTIONARY by John Bouvier  The first ten amendments were presented to Congress as a Bill to amend, but they were never a list of Rights.  When adopted, they were no longer a Bill. When time allows, research on what a ‘Bill of Rights’ really is will be added as a separate URL.

For the record, there is no reason that the following was added to the definition of ‘STATE’ within the ‘Revised Sixth Edition, 1856’ of LAW DICTIONARY by John Bouvier.  I do not know of anything covered within ‘Constitution for the United States of America’ because it is “declaratory and restrictive clauses” instructing what our servants can and cannot do. There were things required of the national government such as “to form a more perfect Union, establish Justice, insure domestic Tranquility, provide for the common defence, promote the general Welfare, and secure the Blessings of Liberty to ourselves and our Posterity”. Do you think someone failed or was there a conspiracy afoot?

It is important that a man who became President within a speech exposed a conspiracy identifying the following four men:

Stephen Arnold Douglas (April 23, 1813 – June 3, 1861) was an American politician from the western state of Illinois, and was the Northern Democratic Party nominee for President in1860. He lost to the Republican Party‘s candidate, Abraham Lincoln, whom he had defeated two years earlier in a Senate contest following a famed series of debates.

President Franklin Pierce (November 23, 1804 – October 8, 1869) was the 14th President of the United States (1853-1857)

Roger Brooke Taney (pronounced /ˈtɔːni/ taw-nee; March 17, 1777 – October 12, 1864) was the fifthChief Justice of the United States, holding that office from 1836 until his death in 1864.

President James Buchanan, Jr. (April 23, 1791 – June 1, 1868, English pronunciation: /bjuːˈkænən/) was the 15th President of the United States (1857–1861). He is the only president from Pennsylvania, the only president who remained a lifelong bachelor and the last to be born in the 18th century.

9. The several states composing the United States are sovereign and independent, in all things not surrendered to the national government by the constitution, and are considered, on general principles, by each other as foreign states, yet their mutual relations are rather those of domestic independence, than of foreign alienation. 7 Cranch, 481; 3 Wheat. 324; 1 Greenl. Ev. §489, 504. Vide, generally, Mr. Madison’s report in the legislature of Virginia, January, 1800; 1 Story’s Com. on Const. §208; 1 Kent, Com. 189, note b; Grotius, B. 1, c. 1, s. 14; Id. B. 3, c. 3, s. 2; Burlamaqui, vol. 2, pt. 1, c. 4, s. 9; Vattel, B. 1, c. 1; 1 Toull. n. 202, note 1 Nation; Cicer. de Repub. 1. 1, s. 25.

Everyone needs to become knowledgeable with his or her state constitution and the Federal Constitution so that we collectively will know what is Constitutional or not. The four men identified above did things that were unconstitutional, causing over 31 million people to die needlessly.

CONSTITUTIONAL. That which is consonant to, and agrees with the constitution. – ‘Revised Sixth Edition, 1856’ of LAW DICTIONARY by John Bouvier.

2. When laws are made in violation of the constitution, they are null and void: but the courts will not declare such a law void unless there appears to be a clear and unequivocal breach of the constitution. 4 Dall. R. 14; 3 Dall. R. 399; 1 Cranch, R. 137; 1 Binn. R. 415 6 Cranch, R. 87, 136; 2 Hall’s Law Journ. 96, 255, 262; 3 Hall’s Law Journ. 267; Wheat. Dig. tit. Constitutional Law; 2 Pet. R. 522; 2 Dall. 309; 12 Wheat. R. 270; Charlt. R. 175, .235; 1 Breese, R. 70, 209; 1 Blackf. R. 206 2 Porter, R. 303; 5 Binn. 355; 3 S. & R. 169; 2 Penn. R. 184; 19 John. R. 58; 1 Cowen, R. 550; 1 Marsb. R. 290 Pr. Dec. 64, 89 2 Litt. R. 90; 4 Monr R. 43; 1 South. R. 192; 7 Pick. R. 466; 13 Pick. R. 60 11 Mass. R. 396; 9 Greenl. R. 60; 5 Hayw. R. 271; 1 Harr. & J. 236; 1 Gill & J. 473; 7 Gill & J. 7; 9 Yerg. 490; 1 Rep. Const. Ct. 267; 3 Desaus. R. 476; 6 Rand. 245; 1 Chip. R. 237, 257; 1 Aik. R. 314; 3 N. H. Rep. 473; 4 N. H. Rep. 16; 7 N. H. Rep. 65; 1 Murph. R. 58. See 8 Law Intell. 65, for a list of decisions made by the supreme court of the United States, declaring laws to be unconstitutional.


Mickey Huff on Project Censored, the Reality of World Government and the Masquerade of a “Free Press”



 Sunday, November 13, 2011 – with Anthony Wile

Mickey Huff

The Daily Bell is pleased to present an exclusive interview with Mickey Huff.

Introduction: Mickey Huff is Associate Professor of History at Diablo Valley College and a Director of Project Censored and the Media Freedom Foundation. He has been interviewed by many radio stations and news sources throughout the country, including NPR, Air America, Pacifica, Republic Broadcasting, Progressive Radio Network, The Santa Rosa Press Democrat, New Standard News and others, and has been published on numerous media and news websites from Global Research, Buzzflash and Counterpunch to Z Mag, Truthout and even a few corporate media outlets(which he routinely critiques). He is co-author with Peter Phillips on a number of academic articles to be published throughout 2010-11 and co-edited two books with Phillips over the past three years. His latest work with Project Censored, the bookCensored 2012: Sourcebook for the Media Revolution, is out now on Seven Stories Press. When he has time he blogs at Mickey is also a musician and composer of over 20 years and lives with his family just outside Berkeley, CA. We are also working with Abby Martin of on various projects with common goals and she is a recent member of our board.

Daily Bell: Thanks for sitting down with us. Let’s jump right in. What is Project Censored? Can you give us a background, some history?

Mickey Huff: Project Censored (PC) is a media research organization that operates on a growing number of college campuses. With the oversight of the Media Freedom Foundation non-profit, the Project engages in media research that works toward establishing a truly free press. The Project was founded at Sonoma State University (SSU) in 1976 by communications professor Dr. Carl Jensen. Top censored stories in the US corporate press were highlighted in annual reports. After 1993, the Project published an annual book about its findings. The Project is now in its 35th year, and Seven Stories Press in NY still publishes our annual book. We now work in conjunction with dozens of colleges and universities across the US and in several European and South American countries. Our main objectives are to train students in media literacy and First Amendment issues while bringing to light information that has been under reported or censored in some way. We think that free press rights are imperative for a democratic culture to function and, with the students, faculty and community members, we work to advocate for those rights and really be a model for media democracy in action.

Over the past three decades, we’ve trained over 2,000 students in investigative research and media literacy. PC student interns, currently about 60 of them, come from the Sociology of Media and Sociology of Censorship classes at SSU; these students get credit for their work with PC, doing research and writing. There are also many more students across the US at places like Diablo Valley College, San Francisco State University, and many more (all listed in our annual publications and online at The students and faculty have also organized public events through lectures called “The Modern Media Censorship Lecture Series” during fall semesters and work on up to date media analysis for our websites and blog. Currently, we get several million unique views a year at the site and that number is rising.

PC’s former director, Dr. Peter Phillips, and I also speak to diverse groups quite often about media censorship and First Amendment issues, and the role of PC in advocating for free press rights.

Every year we receive as many as 1,000 article submissions, all of which must be read and considered for inclusion at the PC website and, ultimately, for the annual volume of the year’s top 25 censored stories. We review submissions for coverage, content, reliability of sources and national significance. Our group of 200-plus expert reviewers is made up of student interns, faculty and community members. Those articles chosen for the annual volume then go before our national judges who rank the stories in order of importance. Many prominent people from academic and journalistic arenas have made up this panel, including Noam Chomsky and Howard Zinn to name a couple.

As for a brief history, again, PC was founded in 1976 and our first director was Carl Jenson. Peter Phillips became director when Carl retired in 1996 and I took over from Peter as director in 2010 after being associate director for two years. Peter and I continue to work together very closely, and he remains on the board as president of the Media Freedom Foundation, and is integrally involved with PC.

Daily Bell: How did you first get involved with Project Censored?

Mickey Huff: I’ve been following the work of Project Censored for almost 20 years. In 1993 I began reading the annual books, and I became a faculty evaluator for submitted stories in 2004. I co-authored two chapters, one with Dr. Paul Rea, for Censored 2009, then co-authored and co-edited Censored 2010 and Censored 2011 as associate director working with Peter Phillips, and I was the sole editor as director for the 2012 book just out. But, to go back further, I became fiercely interested in censorship in news and the arts as a teen, and really followed up on that in college and beyond. I have always been interested in pursuing the truth and strongly believe in the rights of all people to have access to accurate information, factual news, about which people can freely organize their lives in the best manor seen fit. This process must be based on factual reality, not on half-truths and establishment propaganda.

In addition to directing Project Censored, I and an associate professor of history and teach courses at Diablo Valley College in the San Francisco Bay area on US history, critical reasoning, sociology of media and propaganda studies, with special topics courses on “Money, Power, and Politics” and contemporary historiography, more specifically on America, 9/11 and the War on Terror: Case Studies in Media Myth-Making and the Propaganda of Historical Construction.

I’m also on the board of Media Freedom Foundation and No Lies Radio, was previously a co-director at the alternative polling organization Retropoll, and gave presentations last year at the Kent State Truth Tribunal and keynoted the Northern California 9/11 Film Festival, I also present on panels at numerous academic conferences. So, I’m involved in a pretty broad selection of efforts, but at the core they’re all about propaganda and censorship. I’m not going to run down a list here, but Peter and I speak all over the country regularly, we sponsor many like-minded authors and activists for talks and series in the Bay area, and have a weekly radio show on KPFA, Pacifica radio our of Berkeley, CA which airs Friday, 8 A.M. Pacific time. I have a wonderful family and try to spend as much time with them as I can as one of the reasons I do all this is for them, for my kids, to try to make the world a better, more informed place. I was a professional musician for over 20 years, and that also is a big part of who I am, how I see things, part of my creative outlook on life.

Daily Bell: Give us some personal background, if you would. Why do you feel so strongly about these issues?

Mickey Huff: See above, and please read the intros and preface to Censored 2012 for more detailed responses. But really, a free and vibrant press is the life’s blood of democracy. Without access to accurate information, people cannot successfully be their own governors. That said, our current system in the US is quite off the rails in terms of being a functional democracy, but perhaps we can get into that later.

Daily Bell: What’s your definition of censored? Is it mostly government censorship you’re after? Do you believe that private entities can “censor” or that the word strictly implies government activities – as has been pointed out to us several times.

Mickey Huff: Our definition of censorship is the subtle yet constant and sophisticated manipulation of reality in our mass media outlets. Basically, decisions as to what subjects are included in the corporate media (or any other media for that matter), or not included, is media censorship at work. We focus on news censorship; of course, there are other forms of censorship in life that are not our focal point which are also important. But, we state, “… censorship refers to the intentional non-inclusion of a news story – or piece of a news story – based on anything other than a desire to tell the truth.” Simply put, censorship takes many insidious guises outside of outright redaction or cutting room floor antics. Censorship uses framing, slighting of content, attacking, labeling, false balancing and more (as political scientist and former PC judge Dr. Michael Parenti has pointed out in many books).

Certainly, private entities can be and are involved in censorship, evident in that definition. When one compares those news stories that reported by various media outlets and those omitted, there is often glaring inconsistency. If we look at the patterns of these inclusions and omissions it often becomes quite clear that it depends on who owns or significantly financially sponsors these outlets, and what entities influence that decision.

Naturally, Rupert Murdoch’s NewsCorp comes to mind immediately, because of his recent scandal with cell phones, spying, etc., but another good example of this kind of corporate censorship emerges when we look at ownership of channels viewers think of as offering documentaries, a term that implies accurate or truthful in most people’s minds, such as the History Channel, National Geographic, Discovery, and so on. In reality, these offer mainly a sort of “authorized history” or the “official narrative” so to speak.

So again, consider who in society own these media outlets and thus influence what is and is not presented. It’s hardly a radical notion, nor an outlandish “conspiracy theory,” to state such, which I do state quite purposefully here given this all is a conspiracy quite literally by definition. It’s not an accident some things get reported and others do not. The term “conspiracy” has been used – especially since the 1960s in America where the term was born out of CIAefforts to taint critics of the Warren Commission about the JFK assassination – as a pejorative label aiming to dismiss arguments that run counter to official narratives of current and historical events a priori. That in and of itself is a form of censorship. It is a technique aimed at preventing open discourse about events that matter most for society and aims to cover state crimes against democracy.

Several organizations have highlighted the problems of media ownership consolidation. Columbia Journalism Review, NYU Prof. Mark Crispin Miller, have all put together charts (your readers can view one or at the CJR site here) that show who owns the leases to the so-called “public” airwaves. Ownership of the US corporate media has been concentrated into a handful of companies like General Electric, Walt Disney, News Corp., Time Warner, Viacom and the like. Keep in mind, this refers to ALL news media in the US – television, cable, books, magazines, newspapers, radio, even telecommunications companies. So yes, censorship is definitely carried out by corporations, not just governments. Often those in government regulatory posts, which are cast as prime culprits of intrusion in society, come directly from the private industries they are then tasked to oversee in government and thus do not actually represent a public voice.

An example of direct government censorship would be the directive to news outlets prohibiting them from photographing caskets of dead military service members being returned to the United States. Of course, we know the government censors news through more covert means, especially by advocating propaganda by placing CIA agents or taking on journalists as CIA assets in news offices which began in the 1960s under Operation Mockingbird(and recently there’s been a spate of articles revealing CIA agents working on the New York Times staff and CNN, for instance). Publishers are privately “requested” to not cover certain stories or forced to run others written and/or approved by the CIA. Also, retribution for coverage of “off-limits” issues would be another obvious instance of censorship and the price of not following the top-down, managed news protocol. Dan Rather‘s dismissal from CBS following his coverage of George W. Bush‘s no-show National Guard service comes to mind, and Rather himself has come out about this, about what happened. Greg Palast of the BBC had already covered the story, but Rather didn’t use it. Apparently he couldn’t. He was attacked and sacked for daring to state inconvenient facts exposing the lies of the establishment.

Daily Bell: How would you characterize yourself – as a Libertarian, a Progressive, … or do you?

Mickey Huff: I find that to be a false paradigm … really, I could go off on this for some time. At the risk of oversimplifying given the constraints here, Left, Right is an illusion hiding the real problem of the top and the bottom. I’m not trying to be dismissive here. Again, books have been written about this, I teach courses on it, there isn’t space here to elaborate in the time I was given. Basically, I disagree with the premise of the question in terms of conventional establishment labels. If I were to come out and say I lean toward libertarian socialism, that likely wouldn’t help most people as again it doesn’t fit neatly into the prefabricated constructs that act to winnow American ideologies. At PC, we favor a truly free press, free speech, and support an active and informed citizenry. I’m not sure what character that may be.

Daily Bell: We believe that there is an overarching power elite – a group of banking families and their enablers and associates, including religious, corporate and military leaders, who are trying to move toward one-world government. We think they’re based out of the West but have cooperation around the world with other political leaders and top businesspeople in most countries. Do you agree? Disagree?

Mickey Huff: Absolutely there’s no question that there exists such an influence – an incredibly strong influence, in fact – and media censorship, as I discussed earlier, is a perfect example of this group’s reach. We refer to it as the Global Dominance Group and have written about this extensively. Peter Phillips has studied under William Domhoff and has specifically written about the Power Elite, as exposed by C. Wright Mills in the 1950s, and we are currently updating our list of top corporate board of directorship overlaps, and their connections to Congress, further illustrating the small cabal of people who dominate decision-making posts in our society. We have written of this at length over the past decade in our books. Again, Peter has written of this at length, and we touch on it in our Truth Emergency publications as well, which are in our books and other academic journals and publications.

Daily Bell: We think a lot of the authoritarianism we’re seeing these days comes from a speeded-up effort to consolidate power in countries so as to make world governance an increasingly viable option. You need to control countries and populations before you can manipulate them into a global community. Agree? Disagree?

Mickey Huff: I’d refer readers again to our writings on the Global Dominance Group for our position on this issue.

Daily Bell: Can you sum up YOUR paradigm? And Project Censored’s? You must believe there is some sort of pattern to all these stories – or don’t you? What’s your criteria, in other words?

Mickey Huff: Again, look at corporate ownership and influence of those in the Global Dominance Group. The pattern is simple in terms of what information the public is and is not given ready access to in a system that masquerades as a free press. Stories about wrongdoing by government and corporate entities are typically not “allowed” unless in “bad apple” fashion, which reinforces establishment biases that the system “works,” i.e., works for the people. It doesn’t. But the private sector is clearly part of this establishment, especially the biggest corporations and banks, not so much the small businesses, certainly not the co-ops or collective ones.

We are trying to change how this bias permeates the media landscape through Project Censored and Media Freedom International by making people more aware of what is going on in the US, in the power structures, in the media. Our criteria for what’s included, if that’s what you meant, is defined at our site as important national news stories that are underreported, ignored, misrepresented, or censored by the US corporate media. Of course, we validate accuracy, sources, as I mentioned before, as students and faculty read and research the story submissions. The pattern continues in our Censored News Clusters this year in the 2012 book where we group the top censored stories by theme, or subject, which include the Human Cost of War and Violence; Social Media and Internet Freedom; Economics and Inequality; Power, Abuse, and Accountability; Health and the Environment; Women and Gender Issues; and Collaboration and the Common Good. These illustrate a clear trend in stories that expose the powerful, that call out the hypocrites and charlatans, that give the people news they can use to empower communities to uphold principles of liberty and justice.

Daily Bell: Do you see censorship getting better or worse?

Mickey Huff: Because of efforts of organizations like Project Censored (and many others that we highlight in our book and online) and the many alternative independent news sources we highlight and often work with, and because of broader access due to the Internet, people particularly in the US have a wider selection of non-corporate sources now. Our efforts also include a blog called, which is run by our webmaster, and a non-corporate RSS daily news feed site We continue to educate about censorship in the corporate so-called “mainstream” media and why people should consider other sources so that they become aware of and eventually begin to turn to these better outlets first. That’s the focus of our Media Freedom International newswire and Daily Independent News Feeds list. We vet the sources included in those so that people can feel comfortable and look to those first when they look for news, rather than the controlled sources that used to be considered “news.” You’ll also note I used “mainstream” in quotes. We the people are the mainstream, not corporate pseudo persons. And, another major problem is the proliferation of Junk Food News (titillating tripe that fills the airwaves about celebrities, sex scandals, etc., that really is not news). Also, News Abuse as framing, or propaganda, is a contributor to the worsening of censorship and I discuss this with colleague Adam Bessie again in this year’s book. As media scholar Neil Postman of NYU said over 25 years ago, America is the most entertained, least informed society in the modern world, and that trend has sadly continued.

Daily Bell: What do you think of the warfare in the world? Do you have an explanation for why it’s increasing?

Mickey Huff:  Treatises have been written about this. I can’t get in to that here other than to say our goal has been to inform the public about the realities of war, oft hidden by the war makers in the military industrial media complex. The second most decorated marine in US history, Smedley Butler, said in his 1935 book, “War is a Racket.” And it is just that. Wars are fought oft for industrial capitalism, its resources, including subjugated labor. It is the most destructive force on the planet, and media propaganda furthers the ends of the war makers, while ignoring the increased civilian casualties of such wars of conquest. In WWI, 15% of casualties were civilians, and now the number is over 75%. That’s barbarism, not progress, and any free press ought to call it just that. The media function, as some in the CIA hoped, as a Mighty Wurlitzer, playing the people, constructing public opinions in effort to support state and major corporate agendas. This is hardly news and began in earnest with the Hearst papers and the outbreak of Yellow Journalism in the early 1900s, but was institutionalized by government in the Committee on Public Information in the US. It was the propaganda arm of the government tasked with building support for American involvement in the Great War, WWI. Virtually every war we have been in involves this propagandistic element, not only in government agencies, but the corporate media as well. They work in concert creating a literal Truth Emergency in our culture, distorting facts and manipulating the public mind in effort to create the illusion of democracy. It’s all based on cajolery and outright lies. From the Gult of Tonkin to WMDs, all lies to serve the interest of the warfare state. Enemies can be made out of thin air, and oft are, and the people are governed by fear. That’s no way to have democracy, but the elites in this country have been running it that way since the McKinley and Wilson years. Somehow, we need war for peace, which Orwell later remarks upon after WWII as being tacitly absurd. The power elite need to manipulate and control the language and images we the people see in order to preserve the illusions of participation and freedom in the US as a means of fulfilling their objectives, which so often are not those of a vast majority of citizens.

The grandfather of spin, public relations, Edward Bernays (Sigmund Freud’s nephew) summed it up best in his 1928 book Propaganda when he wrote (and this is a long quote with ellipses, I strongly urge people to read this text), “The conscious and intelligent manipulation of the organized habits and opinions of the masses is an important element in democratic society. Those who manipulate this unseen mechanism of society constitute an invisible government which is the true ruling power of our country . . . We are governed, our minds are molded, our tastes formed, our ideas suggested, largely by men we have never heard of. This is a logical result of the way in which our democratic society is organized. Vast numbers of human beings must cooperate in this manner if they are to live together as a smoothly functioning society . . . In almost every act of our daily lives, whether in the sphere of politics or business, in our social conduct or our ethical thinking, we are dominated by the relatively small number of persons…who understand the mental processes and social patterns of the masses. It is they who pull the wires which control the public mind.” That was the plan and the status by 1928 and we have well established and honed this structure of propaganda by now. Again, this is the subject of tomes, not really well suited for interviews I suppose.

Daily Bell: How about the economic downturn?

Mickey Huff: I’m not an economist, so I think I’ll mainly leave that for others to explain (Ellen Brown, Stephen Lendman, Dean Baker, Michael Hudson come to mind), other than to say centralized control of monetary and economic policy leads to centralized money and top-down control (like with the Fed) – this creates more for a small group and less for everybody else. That kind of wraps it up in its simplest form, in my mind. There really is no downturn for the 1%, is there? It’s for the rest of us. That is all part of the corporate media propaganda. The under reporting of unemployment, which is closer to 20% in the US and varies by community, is another part of this story. The top-down government and corporatist cries of austerity for the public ring hollow as the military budgets and bank bailouts tally into the trillions of dollars. This austere tightening of the belts is more analogous to a tourniquet for democracy than some return to fiscally prudent times.

Daily Bell: Are the manifold disasters afflicting our world the result, in some sense, of a pattern? Is the idea that the elites can so damage the world of human affairs that people will beg for more centralization – and ultimately world government?

Mickey Huff: This sounds like a great topic for a dissertation, which I’ll let go for now. Really, I don’t think that question can be summarized in a paragraph or two. I do think there are problems with terms that are used equivocally. We have centralization already, under the Fed, banks, the state and federal government. We have a type world government already that touts its interests as the interests for all. It’s called globalization; but its real goals are just concealed by its many propagandistic outlets of departments of state and organizations like the IMF, WTO, World Bank, some parts of the UN. I mean, the US and G20 nations themselves act like a global government. I don’t know why some warn of Obama‘s “socialist” global government agenda, as they have long been realized under America’s two party duopolistic façade. I use the word “socialist” in quotes as the way the term is used in the US is laughably inaccurate. And in some cases, people that decry that term interchangeably used other terms that have totally different meanings, but one would never know it as unlike terms are used interchangeably (Nazism, socialism, Marxism, communism– the one real descriptive phrase that applies to US government is almost never employed, that of corporate state capitalism). But, again, I digress, as so much of this really depends on agreed upon definitions, so I refer to my original reply.

Daily Bell: Are you generally optimistic or pessimistic these days?

Mickey Huff: Optimistic. I just had a new baby – I have to be. I do remain optimistic that we will make a difference – in fact, that we are making a significant difference right now – and that our work has real value and potential to change the global dynamic through limiting the reach of this censorship. It’s gradual but definitely the impact of people telling, talking about and acting upon “unacceptable” or “under reported” issues will change the world. We need to do this collectively and we must not rely on so-called “reform” measures. Attenuating the current forms of control in our society is not going to solve the problems of our decaying republic. We, the people, the public, must act to create the kind of world we want to live in, not politely ask politicians or government or CEOs to do it for us. Kenn Burrows, of San Francisco State University, writes a great chapter for us each year on signs of real hope and change, not the faux elixirs peddled by lobbyist-owned politicians on the campaign trail.

Daily Bell: We think the Internet, like the Gutenberg Press before it, is causing a kind of ‘Net Reformation around the world. People are waking up to their manipulation and beginning to fight back. We think movements like Occupy Wall Street are evidence of this – though we believe both OWS and the Tea Party are manipulated movements at the moment, at least at the top. However, over time we have hope that they won’t be. What’s your take?

Mickey Huff: I certainly agree with you that the Internet has opened up a whole new world of information to people and they are able to make better choices because they’ve begun to see, as you said, how so much of their lives is being manipulated. And yes, beginning to fight back is inevitable, especially when so many people now have so little to lose.

As for Occupy Wall Street and the Tea Party being manipulated, I might agree that some elements at the top of these are trying to manipulate those ‘on the street,’ but as for OWS, there’s no way that will work. lists occupations happening now on all seven continents in something like 2,600 cities. The thought that this disparate group of “the 99%” can be somehow managed is ludicrous, in my mind. History shows that truly leaderless peoples’ movements have succeeded throughout the world in creating change.

We talk about the astroturfing of the Tea Party by the Koch Bros. in our new book, Censored 2012, in a chapter by a great scholar, Anthony DiMaggio, who has a book out on the topic – it’s another great example of “managed” news reporting. The Tea Party phenomenon is money and big media-driven based on co-opting local populist ideals, which in turn render them impotent politically as they are subsumed by the Republican Party (and further manifest by how more actual libertarian concerns raised by Rep. Ron Paul are ignored or distorted by corporate media as they are not interested in libertarian politics anymore than Karl Rove was interested in evangelical Christians – other than for the vote, or for manipulating public opinion).

My understanding is the concept actually began, recently, when 9/11 truth groups across the US re-enacted the Tea Party by dumping copies of the 9/11 Commission Report into harbors, rivers, etc., and that Restore the Republic followed up on that with some concept of Tea Parties. That group was quickly usurped by the right wing and corporate media outlets (having people like Michelle Malkin and Glenn Beck, in particular, speak as if they were part of the movement). And what happened to the original people’s movement after that, well, the corporate media sure didn’t look into did they? They took the theme and ran with it, and many politicians followed suit running on Tea Party tickets only to sell out their constituents in large part when they got to Congress. Hardly a change, is it?

Corporate media tried to ignore Occupy Wall Street, denigrated it, attacked it, and still tries to marginalize it, regardless of its real nature. The OWS movement has been depicted in the corporate media as a bunch of hippies, socialists, sex offenders, drug addicts, homeless, violent criminals, degenerate campers, jobless sloth, and recently FOX claimed they were a front group for Islamic jihadists, and then claimed OWS was an ACORN conspiracy. All I can say about that is WOW. No evidence required, let’s just over generalize and negatively label people without actually looking at what’s going on seems to be a dominant approach. That’s because corporate media, the mouthpiece of the 1%, are alien to and likely afraid of the 99%. The OWS has not been co-opted yet, but keep watching as we near the 2012 election. The Democrats will do what they can to be sure to try to sympathize with the movement, all the while not realizing they are part of the problem. The Tea Party has been co-opted. There is no real party or organization overall. If three people show up with media announcements, a hundred corporate media people are there to film it in total disproportion to real numbers (meanwhile, other protests about war, torture, and other issues, even when well attended, are ignored or downplayed by the corporate media – I could go on with examples here, but again, this is getting long as it is). It appears to me that the Tea Party is now definitely being manipulated – otherwise, corporate news wouldn’t be focusing on it so much, I don’t think (and note that instead of focusing on average Americans, the corporate media began focusing on so-called Tea Party leaders, wannabe elites) – but again, we need access to accurate, uncensored information in order to make that determination. It exists, and DiMaggio points it out well in our book, and in his most recent one.

The entire section on propaganda studies in our book this year is instrumental in understanding these problems, and we have great contributors in that section including Randal Marlin, Jacob Van Vleet, and Elliot D. Cohen among others.

Daily Bell: How do you see the world evolving in this decade? For better or worse? More freedom or less? More censorship or less?

Mickey Huff: Well, it depends upon who one asks. The 1% are reeling in massive amounts of wealth while everyone else floats, languishes, or declines. It is not a sustainable economic model and it is antithetical to democratic principles. The economy, the media, they are managed top-down, and the way things have been going the past few decades have continued the past ten years where the commonwealth of people has been systematically stolen, Of course, this has been happening over the last century, but it’s been exacerbated as of late. We have more access to information if we know how to find it, but we also have more and more top down propaganda and managed news from the big media players and government, which is like a big PR machine. We live in interesting times to say the least.

Daily Bell: OK. Thanks for these answers. Now we’d like to list your choices of top ten censored stories of 2010-11, as you’ve compiled for the recently released annual volume – Censored 2012: Sourcebook for the Media Revolution. Why do you feel these are so important and is there an overarching theme that draws these together?

1. More US Soldiers Committed Suicide Than Died in Combat

2. US Military Manipulates the Social Media

3. Obama Authorizes International Assassination Campaign

4. Global Food Crisis Expands

5. Private Prison Companies Fund Anti–Immigrant Legislation

6. Google Spying

7. U.S. Army and Psychology’s Largest Experiment–Ever

8. The Fairytale of Clean and Safe Nuclear Power

9. Government Sponsored Technologies for Weather Modification

10. Real Unemployment: One Out of Five in US

Mickey Huff: The short answer is buy the book! It’s pretty evident why these stories were considered to be so important when you read each one. They really are riveting. More soldiers committing suicide than dying in combat? Obama assassinating America citizens in foreign countries rather than arresting them and putting them on trial? Google spying on people and the CIA manipulating social media sites? These are big stories the corporate media don’t oft discuss (though the Obama one was discussed recently as it actually happened, but the story was ignored when the policy came about allowing it). We could have another interview just about the stories. As I said, we review stories submitted throughout the year to determine the 25 most important to be included in the book, according to the criteria I mentioned earlier. Then a panel of judges, media experts and academics, determines their ranking.

Do they reveal a pattern? Yes, they do. I mentioned this earlier. And, I deal with that extensively in the introduction; so again, I encourage people to read the book. I’d love to take time to address each of these but honestly, I spent the better part of half a year writing, compiling, and editing this book that has so many wonderful contributors, so it’s difficult to do here briefly and under such time restrictions.

You’ll notice in this year’s subtitle it’s called the “Sourcebook for the Media Revolution.” As it’s compiled, all the people here, the story authors and everyone working on the process, are pieces of a mosaic working toward a truly free press in the matrix of maintenance of a truly free society. This is a step in working toward that goal.

Really, Project Censored and the annual volume are a response to the current, top-down model of control, a concerted effort to conceal information that would be empowering to the public or would expose the corruption of people in power. That’s a simple pattern, but that’s what all the stories expose.

This mosaic I describe is about moving beyond reform, beyond attenuating the switches of our culture, believing that will fix the situation. It’s the system itself that is not in sync with the common good of the people. We must have free access to information as we discuss things like our right to health, our right to life – and part of that is the right to access information about the maintenance of life, education about what’s a good life, a healthy life, etc. – education, a place to live, food, the ability to make a contribution to society outside one’s own myopic interest. As we consider these things, part of this conversation must be about media freedom, about our right to know, to express our views, to disagree when that’s the case. The current mass media system is not that.

With the Internet Reformation, as you’ve called it, more people have access to such information now. And with more access to communication tools we see more clearly the massive private sector collusion with government – the same people within the Global Dominance Group who are in the communication industry, the military-industrial complex, pharmaceutical and prison complexes, HMOs, etc. Individuals representing the interests of these groups dominate government and government regulatory agencies to benefit themselves at the expense of the public. When we look at this collusion, it’s pretty easy to understand why they wouldn’t tell people what’s going on, why they wouldn’t reveal their actual interests, their own ideologies – it doesn’t benefit them to do so, and in fact, would be counterproductive for their interests.

Information, knowledge, respect for expression, speech, assembly – these are the core of civil society and we should do a better job of maintaining our society and put these at the center of our discussion. We shouldn’t just be talking about economics – we need to be talking about political economy, access to the “system,” how people have access to information, how free or not they are to act on the system in meaningful ways, in such a way that what they do and how they contribute can have real impact. All these issues are critical but omitted from the “mainstream” communication industry’s dialogue and so inaccessible to people who turn to that for information, which is still where most people turn on a regular basis, but we are working to change that.

With the Occupy Wall Street people “on the streets,” for example, we’re seeing a large group, with very diverse backgrounds, all noticing similar problems with the current system. The biggest problem is that they’re not part of it, other than as widgets or bystanders. The current structure is not a recipe for a pro-active, robust democratic culture. It’s spectatorship, oppression – and it’s degenerative, authoritarian, fascistic – it’s the opposite of the direction we’d need to go for robust democratic culture. We currently have the hallmarks of a fascistic culture. No, there aren’t jackboots or the same kind of “holocaust” people think of in fascistic Europe, but the US did wipe out millions of indigenous peoples, the US has been responsible for over a million deaths in Iraq over the past eight years, and has something like 1,000 military bases in 130 countries, outspending all other countries combined in military expenditures. That’s an empire, not a robust democracy. And even if the US does have relative democratic trapping compared to some places in the world, that does not address the utter lack of democratic tendencies when it acts as an empire around the globe.

These issues are all in the book. When you look at all these stories, summarized in the first chapter, with what we’ve done in the propaganda section, we’re talking about a Truth Emergency – about connecting dots. Project Censored has connected dots for years that corporate media refuse to acknowledge.

And as Emma Goldman said, “The most unpardonable sin in society is independence of thought.” We don’t want people to read Censored 2012 and say, “Now I know truth.” A substantial portion of those seeking knowledge are left out and don’t have access to information. Without information. one can’t even begin to connect the dots, or participate in this dialogue that’s critical to a civil society, as I said. As a country that has a supposedly “free press,” people have a right to know, and to agree or disagree freely. Each of these chapters – the entire book – contributes to that dialogue in a powerful way. That’s a somewhat rambling summary of the “overarching theme” of what draws these stories together, but the book speaks for itself.

Daily Bell: Please take the opportunity to make a final statement about Project Censored. Do you need donations or interns? Resources? Maybe some of our viewers can help.

Mickey Huff: Well, of course we’re grateful to receive support in any way readers wish to help. We’re in a fundraising push right now and have offered Censored 2012 as a gift to supporters who subscribe to a $5/month donation. We are a non-profit and we don’t take corporate money. We have gotten grants in the past, but mostly, we rely on individual donations. We would appreciate such financial assistance greatly as it’s how we are able to continue the work we do.

Our interns come in the form of students mostly, and we work with many faculty members around the country, but we are always welcoming people from all walks of life who are interested and have skill sets to share.  We can be contacted via our website.

Daily Bell: Any other points you want to make? And how can people get the book, Censored 2012?

Mickey Huff: I think this has been a pretty far-ranging discussion and I don’t think of anything else to add here. Censored 2012 can be ordered from our site, at the store page.

Daily Bell: Any other material, resources or publications you want to point to?

Mickey Huff: We’ve been publishing the annual Censored volume in one guise or another for 35 years now. The stories in previous years’ editions are, sadly, still mainly censored from general knowledge so we encourage people to look back at these. Of course, all the stories are published at, which is a great resource for 35 years’ worth of information. And our compilation of investigative research articles, including some of the topics we’ve talked about here, are also there.

As mentioned already, Project Censored manages a daily news site called “The Daily Censored: Underreported News and Commentary,” which readers will find useful. I’m on the board of Media Freedom International, so obviously I think that’s a critically important and valuable resource as a newswire from validated independent news sources. And we have a list called “Daily Independent News Feeds We Trust” at We are now also working on restoring the commons, highlighting the historical importance of the commons in our society. More can be seen at

In December, 2010 Peter Phillips and I began hosting a weekly radio show on Fridays called “The Morning Mix with Project Censored” on KPFA community radio in Berkeley, also carried on Progressive Radio Network . The show is permanently archived at and is being added to Project, as well.

Daily Bell: Thanks, again, for sitting down with us and keep up the great work.

Mickey Huff: You’re welcome. Thank you for allowing me to share Project Censored and our other work with your readers. We hope people will pick up the book Censored 2012, as there is so much in it we couldn’t get into here. We greatly appreciate it, and will definitely keep doing what we can to fight censorship and support a truly free press as long until we are no longer needed!


Trilateral Commission influence in the Eurozone



Posted on 11 November 2011

by Patrick Wood

Speaking of his Tri­lat­eral Commission’s influ­ence in the orig­inal cre­ation of the Euro­pean Union, David Rock­e­feller wrote in 1998,

“Back in the early Sev­en­ties, the hope for a more united EUROPE was already full-blownthanks in many ways to the indi­vidual ener­gies pre­vi­ously spent by so many of the Tri­lat­eral Commission’s ear­liest mem­bers.” [Cap­i­tals in orig­inal] (Rock­e­feller, David; In the Begin­ning; The Tri­lat­eral Com­mis­sion at 25, 1998, p.11)

Some argued that “that was then and this is now,” and that the Commission’s influ­ence had waned with the passing of the older generation.

Non­sense. It was Tri­lat­eral Com­mis­sioner Vallery d’Estaing who authored the EU’s Con­sti­tu­tion in 2002 – 2003 when he was Pres­i­dent of the Con­ven­tion on the Future of Europe.

On November 10, 2011, Robert Wenzel, Editor & Pub­lisher of the Eco­nomic Policy Journal, wrote the fol­lowing short report:

And the Big Time Banksters Come Marching In

“Here’s what you need to know about the cur­rent crisis in the Euro­zone. The big time banksters are get­ting direct hands on control:

“Mario Drgahi has become pres­i­dent of the Euro­pean Cen­tral Bank as of November 1. He was vice chairman and man­aging director of Goldman Sachs Inter­na­tional and a member of the firm-wide man­age­ment com­mittee. He was the Italian Exec­u­tive Director at the World Bank. He has been a Fellow of the Insti­tute of Pol­i­tics at the John F. Kennedy School of Gov­ern­ment, Har­vard University.

“Lucas Papademos takes over today as Prime Min­ister of Greece. He was an econ­o­mist at the Fed­eral Reserve Bank of Boston. He was a vis­iting pro­fessor of public policy at the Kennedy School of Gov­ern­ment at Har­vard Uni­ver­sity. And, he was pre­vi­ously a vice pres­i­dent of the Euro­pean Cen­tral Bank. He has been a member of the Tri­lat­eral Com­mis­sion since 1998.

“Indi­ca­tions are that Mario Monti will suc­ceed Silvio Berlus­coni as prime min­ister of Italy, within in days. Monti com­pleted grad­uate studies at Yale Uni­ver­sity, where he studied under James Tobin (see the Tobin Tax). He is a member of the Euro­pean Com­mis­sion. He is Euro­pean Chairman of the Tri­lat­eral Com­mis­sion and and member of the Bilder­berg Group.

“If you get the sense that the elitist banksters are going to take this finan­cial crisis and push it in what­ever direc­tion they want, you are prob­ably very right.”

As you can see, little has changed since 1973, and the same Tri­lat­eral Com­mis­sion mem­ber­ship keeps pop­ping up in the most hal­lowed posi­tions of power and influ­ence. The Commission’s defense is that it was simply coin­ci­dental for their mem­bers to be picked for var­ious high-level posi­tions because of their supe­rior tal­ents and abil­i­ties. This isnot hearsay: I have had this spoken directly to me by mem­bers of the Commission.

Con­sid­ering that the mem­ber­ship hovers around 300 – 350 at any given time,  it is sta­tis­ti­cally impos­sible that they could have been ran­domly picked at such a high fre­quency over such a long period of time. In the U.S. alone since 1973, Com­mis­sion mem­bers held

  • 8 out of 10 U.S. Trade Rep­re­sen­ta­tive appointments
  • 6 our of 8 World Bank presidencies
  • 6 out of 7 President/Vice Pres­i­dent elections

Could any sane person think that they Tri­lat­erals just stum­bled into all of these posi­tions?  Of course not.

The his­tor­ical evi­dence declares that the Tri­lat­eral Com­mis­sion hijacked the global polit­ical system for the exact pur­poses it stated in 1973. That is, to “foster a New Inter­na­tional Eco­nomic Order.”

Just who rules the world economy?

When Antony Sutton and myself studied the Tri­lat­eral Com­mis­sion in 1978, one ana­lyt­ical tech­nique we used was a deriv­a­tive of soci­ology called “net­work topology.” We assem­bled names of direc­tors, exec­u­tives and major share­holders of com­pa­nies asso­ci­ated with the Tri­lat­erals and then dia­grammed them to show over­laps and other non-obvious asso­ci­a­tions. Our results were stun­ning. We found a tight inter­locking net­work that was far stronger than a bunch of inde­pen­dent com­pa­nies. In graph­ical form, the net­work was clearly vis­ible. (See Tri­lat­erals Over Wash­ington, Volume I)

Recently, three researchers in Switzer­land (S. Vitali, J.B. Glat­tfelder, and S. Bat­tiston) have released a sim­ilar and modern study called “The net­work of global cor­po­rate con­trol.” In the abstract they state,

“We find that transna­tional cor­po­ra­tions form a giant bow-tie struc­ture and that a large por­tion of con­trol flows to a small tightly-knit core of finan­cial insti­tu­tions. This core can be seen as an eco­nomic “super-entity” that raises new impor­tant issues both for researchers and policy makers.”

This is an under­state­ment. In Table S1 buried in the appendix, they list the “top 50 control-holders,” where share­holders are ranked according to their level of net­work con­trol. These are the com­pa­nies who com­prise the inner-core of global control.

Of the 50 com­pa­nies, 45 are banks, insur­ance or other finan­cial insti­tu­tions. From the U.S. we see the usual: State Street, JP Morgan Chase, B of A, Goldman Sachs, Morgan Stanley and others.

In short, this core of banks/financials are the real rulers of the world economy. There is no spec­u­la­tion here: This is hard and com­pelling evidence.

This is also the exact same con­clu­sion that Sutton and I reached in 1978 with more rudi­men­tary, non-computerized analysis.

The report concludes,

“This is the first time a ranking of eco­nomic actors by global con­trol is pre­sented. Notice that many actors belong to the finan­cial sector (NACE codes starting with 65,66,67) and many of the names are well-known global players. The interest of this ranking is not that it exposes unsus­pected pow­erful players. Instead, it shows that many of the top actors belong to the core. This means that they do not carry out their busi­ness in iso­la­tion but, on the con­trary, they are tied together in an extremely entan­gled web of con­trol. This finding is extremely impor­tant since there was no prior eco­nomic theory or empir­ical evi­dence regarding whether and how top players are con­nected. Finally, it should be noted that gov­ern­ments and nat­ural per­sons are only fea­tured fur­ther down in the list.” [emphasis added]

Zbig­niew Brzezinski, co-founder of the Tri­lat­eral Com­mis­sion with David Rock­e­feller in 1973, summed up the “net­work” in his 1970 Between Two Ages: America’s Role in the Tech­netronic Era:

“The nation-­state as a fun­da­mental unit of man’s orga­nized life has ceased to be the prin­cipal cre­ative force:Inter­na­tional banks and multi­na­tional cor­po­ra­tions are acting and plan­ning in terms that are far in advance of the polit­ical con­cepts of the nation-state.” [emphasis added]

Unfor­tu­nately, this is the reality of the matter. With inter­na­tional banks at the center and var­ious multi­na­tional com­pa­nies in the periphery, the net­work con­tinues to dom­i­nate and con­trol the course of world events. The cit­i­zens of the respec­tive coun­tries are little more than objects to be taxed and manipulated.

In Europe, the finan­cial demise of Italy and Greece threatens to melt down the Euro­pean region, if not the entire global economy. That Tri­lat­eral bankers Papademos and Monti, respec­tively, would take the helm as Prime Min­ister of their own nation-state should be likened to be a receiver­ship move designed to pro­tect the assets of the banks (the “Net­work”) they rep­re­sent. If nothing else, it cer­tainly shows that the Tri­lat­eral hege­mony over Europe is alive and well.

Until this hege­mony is somehow dis­solved, the game of national polit­ical elec­tions (In the U.S. or Europe) is largely an exer­cise in futility. Elec­tors are simply deceived when they fail to rec­og­nize and address the real power behind the political/economic system.






by Steven Wayne Pattison©2011

President John F. Kennedy indicated that he suspected a conspiracy

(Nov. 2, 2011) — By reading the following, you will learn the reason for our current situation and how it took place in other countries with the same results we will have soon.

Some will not believe what they are about to read!  Others such as J. Edgar Hoover and President John F. Kennedy have reported about the fact that there is a conspiracy:

J. Edgar Hoover – The Elks Magazine (August 1956):

“The individual is handicapped by coming face to face with a conspiracy so monstrous he cannot believe it exists.”

President John F. Kennedy address before ‘The American Newspaper Publishers Association’ at Waldorf-Astoria Hotel on April 27, 1961:

“For we are opposed around the world by a monolithic and ruthless conspiracy that relies primarily on covert means for expanding its sphere of influence on infiltration instead of invasion, on subversion instead of elections, on intimidation instead of free choice, on guerrillas by night instead of armies by day.”

A sign of the present, and just what does the future hold for America?

A JOYOUS FUTURE, yes there will be, if you get involved!

America is “Temporarily” out of order!

All ‘We the People’ need is to get in Order so you can be a service to our country.

To get into Order, all anyone has to do is learn the truth and the Plan will happen with all the good people working collectively. It will never work any other way, for it took the banklords over 200 years to totally take over our Country. The following presentation of history may not be completely accurate, but it will connect the dots leading most of us to a better understanding of what is going on today.   For that reason I implore you to just read this document before going to any web links.

I would have to believe there are a lot of people even today that just want to be left alone, which was the reason most people came to America in 1643, the beginning of our Country. The people who came to America were running from what was happening in Great Britain involving the King of England, Parliament, the aristocracy, the middle classes, the commoners, and the army, called the English Civil War of the mid-17th Century. It was part of a wider series of conflicts that spanned the entire British Isles, involving Scotland and Ireland as well as England, Wales and the division of the Catholic Church which occurred over whether or not Jesus Christ was a spirit. The English Civil War was also called “The Great Rebellion,” “The English Revolution” and “The Wars of the Three Kingdoms.”

The British Civil Wars and Commonwealth period witnessed the trial and execution of a king, the formation of a republic in England, a theocracy in Scotland and the subjugation of Ireland. The first attempt was made to unite the three nations under a single government, and the foundations of the modern British constitution were laid. As the oldest branch of Christianity, along with Eastern Orthodoxy, the history of the Catholic Church plays an integral part of the History of Christianity as a whole and the execution of a king. The history that covers a period of over 2,000 years reveals an overwhelming fight for Freedom and the Preamble to the Constitution for the United States of America is a statement in an attempt to stop all the fighting in the world at that time:

We the People of the United States, in Order to form a more perfect Union, establish Justice, insure domestic Tranquility, provide for the common defence, promote the general Welfare, and secure the Blessings of Liberty to ourselves and our Posterity, do ordain and establish this Constitution for the United States of America.

And the First Amendment to the Constitution provided that there would be freedom of religion along with the other listed Rights:

Congress shall make no law respecting an establishment of religion, or prohibiting the free exercise thereof; or abridging the freedom of speech, or of the press; or the right of the people peaceably to assemble, and to petition the Government for a redress of grievances.

What is happening today is a continuous struggle in the Fight for Freedom and  not just a repeat of history where the People wanted their Freedom with Laws to protect them from others as in early Roman times.  The Roman legal system was characterized by a formalism that lasted for more than 1,000 years, drawn from custom and statutes, a form of Common Law. Later, during the times of the empire, the emperor asserted his authority as the ultimate source of law known as Roman Civil Codes, causing everyone to be subject to the Emperor. Roman Civil Codes are similar to the Napoleonic Code established under Napoléon I in 1804 and the Lieber Codes installed in 1863 with the General Orders No. 100 here in our Country. Both are Codes by a dictator.

If it were not for dictators, emperors, Kings and Presidents causing most all the wars in history by obtaining the authority to change the laws from Common Law to Roman Civil Codes which converted all the people into ‘Subjects,’ requiring everyone within their jurisdiction to have to use ‘Debt Money’ controlled by the banklords, our Country with Freedom for all could have lasted forever. Changing of the Law to Codes has happened in many countries throughout history, destroying Freedom for the People inhabiting those Countries. See the list of Countries that are in trouble with the debt money which they have been forced to use, and don’t be surprised that the United States is listed first:   List of countries by external debt in the World Factbook.

The United States officially ended in 1968 when the redemption of pre-1963 Federal Reserve notes for gold or silver officially ended. Without Lawful Money, a country by the People, for the People and of the People cannot exist except as a dictatorship under the control of whoever supplies the money used within the country. The plan to spend all the money backed by gold and silver is exposed in 1958 in this video by Robert Welch, Founder of The John Birch Society (Watch this nine minute video now.). Once the people behind this scheme spent all the money backed by gold and silver, the only option was to print IOUs, which is what we still have today. All we have in our pockets are IOUs, which means that we really don’t own a thing; even our homes are owned by the government. We even have to pay interest to the banklords to use these IOUs, and this was all accomplished by the changing of our Law.

Congressional Record, March 9, 1933 on HR 1491 p. 83. “Under the new law the ‘debt’ money is issued to the banks in return for government obligations, bills of exchange, drafts; notes; trade acceptances; and bankers acceptances. The ‘debt’ money will be worth 100 cents on the dollar, because it is backed by the credit of the nation. It will represent a mortgage on all the homes, and other property of all the people of the nation.” Internet search

The Great Society was a set of domestic programs in the United States promoted in the 1960s by President Lyndon B. Johnson with a goal of spending all the money they could as reported by Robert Welch in 1958. What everyone was told were the two main goals of the Great Society simply never worked: social reforms to eliminate poverty, and racial injustice! If they had worked then the following would not be headline news in 2011:

Nearly Half of U.S. Lives in Household Receiving Government Benefit by Sara Murray – Posted October 5, 2011 in The Wall Street Journal. See the timeline that shows the spending of the government de facto.

These numbers will continue upward until we restore the lawful Union States. If we do not fix the problem, something major is going to happen. What, I do not know! Please understand that many people knew about these events and some of them leading up to 2007 are reported on this website,including:

Henry Ford, Sr. in 1921 stated that if we removed the power of money from the banklords, we would stop all wars. This knowledge caused further research which is posted on this webpage – A Time Line focusing on Taxes, Money and War.

There are a lot of problems with the schemes presented to fix our money problem which will have to be addressed at some point, but first we have to regain our sovereignty so the money can be owned collectively by the People.  Then and only then will we not have to pay interest to our foreign enemies.



by Steven Wayne Pattison, ©2011

King James VI of Scotland became King James I of England, uniting the two kingdoms under one monarchy

(Nov. 9, 2011) —Editor’s Note:  The following essay is a continuation of the ideas presented in Part 1 of this series.

The major systems of law in European history were Roman law, feudal law, canon law, civil law, English common law and the Napoleonic Code. The use of international law in the twentieth century was for the purpose of the banks having control over trade. Napoleonic Code is the laws of Louisiana and Roman Civil Codes titled here in our Country as ‘United States Codes’ which are what every State of the Union is using, making them all de facto, a point which will be covered later.

Today there is nowhere to run to escape what is happening to our Country because the banklords control all the money of the other countries through the IMF. If you don’t get involved now, our Country will continue down the path of corruption under the current Conspiracy. Even the Congress of the United States reports the same facts of our destruction within its Congressional Findings:

(a) Findings Relating to Federal Income Tax- Congress finds the Federal income tax–

(1) retards economic growth and has reduced the standard of living of the American public;

(2) impedes the international competitiveness of United States industry;

(3) reduces savings and investment in the United States by taxing income multiple times;

(4) slows the capital formation necessary for real wages to steadily increase;

(5) lowers productivity;

(6) imposes unacceptable and unnecessary administrative and compliance costs on individual and business taxpayers;

(7) is unfair and inequitable;

(8) unnecessarily intrudes upon the privacy and civil rights of United States citizens;

(9) hides the true cost of government by embedding taxes in the costs of everything Americans buy;

(10) is not being complied with at satisfactory levels and therefore raises the tax burden on law abiding citizens; and

(11) impedes upward social mobility.

The following is documented information leading to the fact we have to collectively act to restore what we once had, our Freedom:

The Articles of Confederation were the first constitution governing the 13 original colonies

The Articles of Confederation of the United Colonies of New England; May 19, 1643

The Articles of Confederation between the Plantations under the Government of Massachusetts, the Plantations under the Government of New Plymouth, the Plantations under the Government of Connecticut, and the Government of New Haven with the Plantations in Combination therewith:

Whereas we all came into these parts of America with one and the same end and aim, namely, to advance the Kingdom of our Lord Jesus Christ and to enjoy the liberties of the Gospel in purity with peace; and whereas in our settling (by a wise providence of God) we are further dispersed upon the sea coasts and rivers than was at first intended, so that we can not according to our desire with convenience communicate in one government and jurisdiction; and whereas we live encompassed with people of several nations and strange languages which hereafter may prove injurious to us or our posterity. And forasmuch as the natives have formerly committed sundry Insolence and outrages upon several Plantations of the English and have of late combined themselves against us: and seeing by reason of those sad distractions in England which they have heard of, and by which they know vie are hindered from that humble way of seeking advice, or reaping those comfortable fruits of protection, which at other times we might well expect. We therefore do conceive it our bounder duty, without delay to enter into a present Consociation amongst ourselves, for mutual help and strength in all our future concernments: That, as in nation and religion, so in other respects, we be and continue one according to the tenor and true meaning of the ensuing articles: Wherefore it is fully agreed and concluded by and between the parties or Jurisdictions above named, and they jointly and severally do by these presents agree and conclude that they all be and henceforth be called by the name of the United Colonies of New England.

Things have not changed much, have they?

They knew they had to join forces to help one another against foreign influence and corruption as President George Washington warned us about during his farewell speech. His whole speech was a warning against the ‘Political Parties’ that were being manipulated just like today with foreign influence and corruption which also controls the Media.  An example is the Federalist party that became the Whig party; their scheme is covered later in this document.  There was also Jefferson’s democratic republican party. President George Washington’s farewell speech even included mention of the problems that emerged with the American Civil War. Today it is all about a book written approximately in 475 B. C., meaning “Before Christ,” titled ‘The Art Of War’ which is all about dividing and conquering your enemy.

Washington’s farewell speech:

Without looking forward to an extremity of this kind (which nevertheless ought not to be entirely out of sight), the common and continual mischiefs of the spirit of party are sufficient to make it the interest and duty of a wise people to discourage and restrain it.

It serves always to distract the public councils and enfeeble the public administration. It agitates the community with ill-founded jealousies and false alarms, kindles the animosity of one part against another, foments occasionally riot and insurrection. It opens the door to foreign influence and corruption, which finds a facilitated access to the government itself through the channels of party passions. Thus the policy and the will of one country are subjected to the policy and will of another.

This control over all Political Parties is still going on today!

The Colonies of New England in 1643 knew, just as Ronald Reagan warned us on 27 October 1964, known as – “A Time For Choosing” when he stated:

We’re at war with the most dangerous enemy that has ever faced mankind.

Full Transcript in part states:

Now, one side in this campaign has been telling us that the issues of this election are the maintenance of peace and prosperity. The line has been used, “We’ve never had it so good.”

But I have an uncomfortable feeling that this prosperity isn’t something on which we can base our hopes for the future.

When will you get that ‘uncomfortable feeling’ and get involved? You need to Choose:   Will it be Freedom or Slavery for the rest of your life? This is not rocket science but a simple conspiracy where you get to choose either to be a Freeman or Freewoman, a sovereign under Common Law, or a slave under Roman Civil Codes because the people who made all of this happen did it without lawful authority. They never destroyed the lawful governments, so they are all still in place and could be restored with very little effort with lawful money of, for and by the People, not the banklords.

You will have to figure out what the truth is for yourself and your family starting with which law applies to you. The following is part of the last paragraph of a Law Book from 1871 whose cover page addressed itself to the ‘ALUMNI OF THE LAW DEPARTMENT OF COLUMBIAN COLLEGE.’ The book was being used to educate the students of law, newly called ‘Attorneys’:

When our forefathers established governments in America they laid their foundations on the common law. And when difficulties grew up between them and the mother country, they acted as their English ancestors had always acted in their political troubles – interposed the common law as the shield against arbitrary power. When the United Colonies met in Congress, in 1774, they claimed the common law of England as a branch of those “indubitable rights and liberties to which the respective colonies are entitled.” And the common law, like a silent providence is still the preserver of our liberties (emphasis mine).

If our Founding Fathers used common law, don’t you think we should also? Were you taught anything about ‘common law’ in any schools you attended? The ‘Congressional Records’ from 1941 report the “Subversion of Textbooks in American Public Schools,” and there is no evidence that the history books were ever corrected by anyone. Please go to the Articles of Confederation website and answer these questions. Why is the following part of what they wanted, “preserving and propagating the truth”? Was the truth of our history being changed?

Why is the term “Jurisdiction” used so many times?

Things to ponder – Do a search within this webpage for the word ‘jurisdiction’ to find the following:

“A judgment would be null, if the judge had not jurisdiction of the matter.”

“There is nothing in the constitution of the United States to forbid or prevent the legislature of a state from exercising judicial functions but a state legislature cannot annul the judgments, nor determine the jurisdiction of the courts of the United States.” NOTE: The only time the state legislature would want to argue a case against the ‘courts of the United States’ would only be when the ‘courts of the United States’ did not have jurisdiction in the defined borders of their Union state.

“Every act of jurisdiction exercised by a judge without his territory, either by pronouncing sentence or carrying it into execution, is null. An inferior court has no jurisdiction beyond what is expressly delegated. 1 Salk. 404, n.; Gilb. C. P. 188; 1 Saund. 73; 2 Lord Raym. 1311; and see Bac. Ab. Courts, &c., C, et seq; Bac. Ab. Pleas, E 2.”

“It is the law which gives jurisdiction; the consent of, parties, cannot, therefore, confer it, in a matter which the law excludes. 1 N. & M. 192; 3 M’Cord, 280; 1 Call. 55; 1 J. S. Marsh. 476; 1 Bibb, 263; Cooke, 27; Minor, 65; 3 Litt. 332; 6 Litt. 303; Kirby, 111; 1 Breese, 32; 2 Yerg. 441; 1 Const. R. 478. But where the court has jurisdiction of the matter, and the defendant has some privilege which exempts him from the jurisdiction, he may wave the privilege. 5 Cranch, 288; 1 Pet. 449; 8 Wheat. 699; 4 W. C. C. R. 84; 4 M’Cord, 79; 4 Mass. 593; Wright, 484. See Hardin, 448; 2 Wash. 213.”

Have you unknowingly waived your privilege by going to a court where they use something other than ‘Common Law’? Go to this webpage and do a search for ‘common law’ to find the following:

LIBERTY OF SPEECH – “The greatest latitude is allowed by the common law to counsel.”

“It is a maxim of the common law, that a right never dies and, as far as contracts were concerned, there was no time of limitation to actions on such contracts.”

“LOCUS REI SITAE. The place where a thing is situated. In proceedings in rem, in real actions in the civil law, or: those which have for their object the recovery of a thing; and in real actions in the common law, or those for the recovery of land, the proper forum is the locus rei sitae. 2 Gall. R. 191.”

LAW, COMMON. The common law is that which derives its force and authority from the universal consent and immemorial practice of the people. It has never received the sanction of the legislature, by an express act, which is the criterion by which it is distinguished from the statute law. It has never been reduced to writing; by this expression, however, it is not meant that all those laws are at present merely oral, or communicated from former ages to the present solely by word of mouth, but that the evidence of our common law is contained in our books of Reports, and depends on the general practice and judicial adjudications of our courts.

2. The common law is derived from two sources, the common law of England, and the practice and decision of our own courts. In some states the English common law has been adopted by statute. There is no general rule to ascertain what part of the English common law is valid and binding. To run the line of distinction is a subject of embarrassment to courts, and the want of it a great perplexity to the student. Kirb. Rep. Pref. It may, however, be observed generally, that it is binding where it has not been superseded by the constitution of the United States, or of the several states, or by their legislative enactments, or varied by custom, and where it is founded in reason and consonant to the genius and manners of the people.

Missouri was admitted to the Union in 1821 as the 24th state

An example of one Union state that ‘adopted by statute’ common law – Missouri Revised Statutes,Chapter 1, Laws in Force and Construction of Statutes – Section 1.010:

Common law in force — effect on statutes.

1.010. The common law of England and all statutes and acts of parliament made prior to the fourth year of the reign of James the First, of a general nature, which are not local to that kingdom and not repugnant to or inconsistent with the Constitution of the United States, the constitution of this state, or the statute laws in force for the time being, are the rule of action and decision in this state, any custom or usage to the contrary notwithstanding, but no act of the general assembly or law of this state shall be held to be invalid, or limited in its scope or effect by the courts of this state, for the reason that it is in derogation of, or in conflict with, the common law, or with such statutes or acts of parliament; but all acts of the general assembly, or laws, shall be liberally construed, so as to effectuate the true intent and meaning thereof.

(RSMo 1939 § 645, A.L. 1957 p. 587)

Prior revisions: 1929 § 645; 1919 § 7048; 1909 § 8047

If you do any real research about ‘James the First’ you will learn why it was made prior to the fourth year of his reign! It was the year that their Law started to change to Roman Civil Codes. It was also one of the reasons for many to leave the country for America.

3. The phrase “common law” occurs in the seventh article of the amendments of the constitution of the United States. “In suits at common law, where the value in controversy shall exceed twenty dollars says that article, “the right of trial by jury shall be preserved. The “common law” here mentioned is the common law of England, and not of any particular state. 1 Gallis. 20; 1 Bald. 558; 3 Wheat. 223; 3 Pet. R. 446; 1 Bald. R. 554. The term is used in contradistinction to equity, admiralty, and maritime law. 3 Pet. 446; 1 Bald. 554.

Section 2 of Article III of the ‘Constitution for the United States of America you will find the judicial Power listed:

Section. 2 – The judicial Power shall extend to all Cases, in Law and Equity, arising under this Constitution, the Laws of the United States, and Treaties made, or which shall be made, under their Authority; — to all Cases affecting Ambassadors, other public Ministers and Consuls; — to all Cases of admiralty and maritime Jurisdiction; — to Controversies to which the United States shall be a Party; — to Controversies between two or more States; — between a State and Citizens of another State [Modified by Amendment XI]; — between Citizens of different States; — between Citizens of the same State claiming Lands under Grants of different States, and between a State, or the Citizens thereof, and foreign States, Citizens or Subjects. (Please note the distension of “Citizens thereof meaning one of the Union ‘States’ vs. ‘foreign States, Citizens or Subjects’.)

The term “Common Law” is used in contradistinction to equity, admiralty, and maritime law. 3 Pet. 446; 1 Bald. 554 which has to mean that the term “in Law” in ‘Section. 2’ above can only mean ‘Common Law’ for there was no other law in our Country at that time and place than ‘Common Law’.

The Laws of the United States applies only to a person as defined in their Codes and only if the person is within their jurisdiction. For more information, please read the first paragraph in the Introduction of the book posted here which states, in part:

There have grown up in the history of nations only two great systems of law, the civil law of ancient Rome, and the common law of England. All the most civilized nations in the world are governed by either of these two great schemes of justice. Though the civil law and the common law have much in common, yet in many important particulars they are the opposites of each other. In the course of his studies, the student of law finds so much said, in an incidental way, about the civil law, that is calculated to mislead his judgment in regard to the true character of that scheme of justice, that it is important, at the outset of his walks over the fields of the common law, to give him some account of the civil law, and point out in what it differs essentially from the common law. This is a matter of much importance to every student who aspires to a comprehensive and enlightened knowledge of jurisprudence (emphasis mine).

The above was a law book used to teach attorneys and has very important information you should be aware of such as this statement:

…that is calculated to mislead his judgment in regard to the true character of that scheme of justice…

Yes the conspiracy started out as a ‘Scheme’ to misinform the attorneys of the real reason for Common Law! Doesn’t this tell you that today’s attorneys have been misled? Now for more facts on how and when they started to change our Common Law to Roman Civil Codes – ‘PREFACE’ where it states:

The love of innovation induced the State of New York, some years ago, to abrogate common-law pleading, and introduce a code of procedure for the regulation of litigation in her courts; and notwithstanding the lamentable confusion and uncertainty, and the greatly increased expense which has thereby been brought into the administration of justice in that State, other States have followed in her track of barbaric empiricism. Mr. Justice Grier has, from the bench of the Supreme Court of the United States, rebuked the folly of abolishing common-law pleading, and substituting the common-sense practice, as it may be called, in its stead. “This system, (says that able judge,) matured by the wisdom of ages, founded on principles of truth and sound reasonhas been ruthlessly abolished in many of our States, who have rashly substituted in its place the suggestions of sciolists, who invent new codes and systems of pleading to order. But this attempt to abolish species and establish a single genus is found to be beyond the power of legislative omnipotence. The result of these experiments, so far as they have come to our knowledge, has been to destroy the certainty and simplicity of all pleadings, and to introduce on the record an endless wrangle in writing, perplexing the court, delaying and impeding the administration of justice.” This strong condemnation is more than justified by the experience of the New York courts, as may be seen in the chaos of the reports of the code practice in that State. And the evil effects of the code on the administration of law in New York has been signalized in a recent letter from Mr. Charles O’Conor, published in the Albany Law Journal. It is stated in that letter, as the effect of the decisions of the courts, that because of the mixture of law and equity by the code, a case may begin as a common-law case, with a jury impanneled to try it, and if, at the close of the testimony, a case in equity instead of a common-law case, is proved, the judge may dismiss the jury and try the case himself, as chancellor. And the confusion in practice is increased by the want of logical skill in the lawyers trained in the code practice. “All the lawyers (says Mr. O’Conor) who have been admitted to practice in this State for the last twenty years are conversant with the code, and, of course, are not experts in the old common-law practice and pleading. Most of them are entirely ignorant of it, and you may imagine that the code could not easily be displaced by any attempt at reaction. The courts of the United States do not recognize the code, but adhere to the old practice, with its settled distinction between law and equity. This circumstance often leads to much confusion, as you may see illustrated in some reported decisions of the Supreme Court. It is truly laughable, to one conversant with both systems, to see the blunders into which lawyers of great ability, who have come to the bar within the last ten or fifteen years, sometimes fail in framing a declaration, plea, or subsequent pleading at common law in the circuit court of the United States (emphasis mine).

They changed the Laws in the State of New York without any delegated authority by, of and for the People inhabiting the State of New York. The reason for changing from Common Law to Roman Civil Codes was to do away with our sovereignty, because Roman Civil Codes were rules for persons who were subject to the government of Rome.  Soon thereafter, all persons inhabiting all of the Union States became subjects to the Codes.

Now back to this webpage to continue the search for ‘common law’:

4. The common law of England is not in all respects to be taken as that of the United States, or of the several states; its general principles are adopted only so far as they are applicable to our situation. 2 Pet, 144; 8 Pet. 659; 9 Cranch, 333; 9 S. & R. 330; 1 Blackf 66, 82, 206; Kirby, 117; 5 Har. & John. 356; 2 Aik. 187; Charlt. 172; 1 Ham. 243. See 5 Cow. 628; 5 Pet. 241; 1 Dall. 67; 1 Mass. 61; 9 Pick. 532; 3 Greenl. 162; 6 Greenl. 55; 3 Gill & John. 62; Sampson’s Discourse before the Historical Society of New York; 1 Gallis. R. 489; 3 Conn. R. 114; 2 Dall. 2, 297, 384; 7 Cranch, R. 32; 1 Wheat. R. 415; 3 Wheat. 223; 1 Blackf. R. 205; 8 Pet. R. 658; 5 Cowen, R. 628; 2 Stew. R. 362.

Everyone needs to use Common Law because it is still in force. Everyone using Common Law will have ‘Standing’ as ‘Freemen’ and ‘Freewomen’ so that they can protect their Unalienable Rights. Unalienable means “The state of a thing or right which cannot be sold.”  But our ‘Unalienable Rights’ over time were stolen from all of us. Yes, I know what you are going to say, but please continue reading.



by Steven Wayne Pattison, ©2011

Thomas Jefferson opposed Alexander Hamilton regarding the creation of a national bank

(Nov. 11, 2011) — Editor’s Note:  The following essay is the final in a three-part series regarding the topics of common law, statutory law, liberty, global monetary and financial conspiracy, and individual and state sovereignty.  Parts 1 and 2 can be found here and here, respectively.


‘WE’ all allowed Common Law to be taken from us without a thing being said. Our State and National Constitutions are not understandable without Common Law, as HENRY BALDWIN, an Associate Justice of the Supreme Court of the United States explained in his book published in 1837:

I have long since been convinced that there are better and safer guides to professional and judicial inquiries after truth, on constitutional questions, than those which have been so often resorted to, without effecting the desired result; a clear and settled understanding of the terms and provisions of an instrument of writing, which operates with supreme authority wherever it applies. To me it seems that it can be made intelligible in all its parts, by applying to it those established rules and maxims of the common law, in the construction of statutes, and those accepted definitions of words, terms, and language, in which they had been used, and been received, as well known and understood, in their ordinary, or legal sense, according to the subject matter. In appealing to the common law, as the standard of exposition, in all doubts as to the meaning of written instruments; there is safety, certainty, and authority. The institution of the colonies were based upon it; it was their system of jurisprudence, with only local exceptions, to suit the condition of the colonists, who claimed it as their birth-right and inheritance, 9 Cr. 333, in its largest sense, as including the whole system of English jurisprudence, 1 Gall. 493; the inexhaustible fountain from which we draw our laws, 9 S. & R. 330, 39, 58. So it continued after the colonies became states, in most of which the common law was adopted by acts of assembly, which gave it the force of a statute, from the time of such adoption, and as it was then; so that in the language of this Court-”At the adoption of the constitution, there were no states in this Union, the basis of whose jurisprudence was not essentially, that of the common law in its widest meaning; and probably no states were contemplated, in which it would not exist.” 3 Pet. 446, 8. It is also the basis on which the federal system of jurisprudence was erected by the constitution, the judiciary and process acts, which refer to “cases in law and in equity,” “suits at common law,” “the common law, the principles and usages of law,” as they had at the time been defined and settled in England; 5 Cr. 222; 3 Wh. 221; 4 Wh. 115, 16; 7 Wh. 45; 10 Wh. 29, 32, 56, 8; 1 Pet. 613: and were adopted as then understood by the old states.

WE have determined that since the only law was ‘Common Law’ when the National Constitution was written, in Section 2 of Article III of the ‘Constitution for the United States of America’, ‘in Law’ can mean only ‘Common Law’. In fact, everything except “admiralty and maritime Jurisdiction” should be under Common Law Jurisdiction.

Remember from page 5 above, it states:

“It is the law which gives jurisdiction…”

And jurisdiction has a lot to do with where you inhabit and if you walk into what you believe is a court of law without knowing what you are doing, you could be putting yourself in a jurisdiction which might put you in jail for whatever reason:

JURISDICTION, Practice. A power constitutionally conferred upon a judge or magistrate, to take cognizance of, and decide causes according to law, and to carry his sentence into execution. 6 Pet. 591; 9 John. 239. The tract of land or district within which a judge or magistrate has jurisdiction, is called his territory, and his power in relation to his territory is called his territorial jurisdiction.

Judges today are not following any Constitutions because they have no power constitutionally conferred upon them because they are not using Common Law in their courts.

You will need to know and understand the “tract of land or district” that you inhabit and that you really cannot prove that you lawfully own any land. More on this can be provided if you ask for it. It is too long to cover here.

First you have to understand that the Internet is not a very good source for researching the Law but just a starting place.  You should end up in a good Law Library to document everything you can learn from the Internet. For those going up against a judge, you will need to fully study and understand “Subject Matter Jurisdiction” and In Personam Jurisdiction. You should also use the correct dictionary when using Common Law, which is posted here. In the court case we have been involved in, we start out with the following:

Comes now the Defendant, (First and last name only), In Propria Persona appearing specially, not generally or voluntarily herein, to demand all unalienable rights protected under the common law, pursuant to the laws for the state of Kansas based upon the status of the accused as a matter of due process of law to Motion this Court move the Court to dismiss action based on violations of statutes and state:

Most of the People don’t know who they are because they don’t know what their ‘Character’ or ‘Status’ really is when inhabiting one of the Original Union States! If you do inhabit one of these Union states, each of their constitutions has within it a Declaration of Rights. If it doesn’t, you are not living in a free sovereign state. For example, the Missouri Constitution of 1820 has 22 items listed under Article XIII. Declaration of Rights, starting with the following:

That the general, great, and essential principles of liberty and free government may be recognized and established, we declare,

1. That all political power is vested in, and derived from, the people.

Are you sure you are one of the People as that term is used today?

For more proof that the state constitutions have been changed, see Missouri Constitution currently being published where you cannot find any ‘Declaration of Rights’.

We need to collectively act or we will lose one at a time. “The good men may do separately is small compared with what they may do collectively.” — Benjamin Franklin

In the early 1800s, the ‘Powers to be’ started using Roman Civil Law when Common Law was the only law that they could use, which was an unconstitutional act.  Over time, the people stopped standing up for their Rights to use Common Law because of the attorneys. As it has been explained herein, our Rights are a maxim of the common law; a right never dies, and it is the law which gives jurisdiction. Common Law is the only law a sovereign should use to protect all of his unalienable Rights!

Abraham Lincoln was the first president to be assassinated on April 15, 1865. His Gettysburg Address is the most frequently-quoted speech in U.S. history

Lincoln recognized, or I should say discovered, a ‘Conspiracy’ to ‘Divide’ the People. and on June 16, 1858, more than 1,000 Republican delegates met in the Springfield, IL statehouse for the Republican State Convention. At 5:00 p.m. they chose Abraham Lincoln as their candidate for the U.S. Senate, running against Democrat Stephen A. Douglas. At 8:00 p.m. Lincoln delivered this address to his Republican colleagues in the Hall of Representatives. The title reflects part of the speech’s introduction, “A house divided against itself cannot stand” (Please note that some of the websites do not post the whole speech), a concept familiar to Lincoln’s audience as a statement by Jesus recorded in all three synoptic gospels (Matthew, Mark, and Luke). Lincoln asked a few questions in his speech which are essential to what we have today. You should read the whole speech, but following are three paragraphs you really need to understand.

After reading and knowing what is reported in this document, you should understand that the American Civil War was a planned event as told to us by Otto von Bismarck, Chancellor of Germany, with three different quotes; About 991 results from Internet searchAbout 153 results from Internet search; and About 117,000 results from Internet search. Now, years later, these quotes are in question by someone’s opinion calling them ‘Bogus’, meaning that they say it is without any facts or documents to prove that Bismarck did say it. Does it really matter when you have a myriad of other facts which lead you to the same place?

Lincoln (para. 16):

It will throw additional light on the latter, to go back, and run the mind over the string of historical facts already stated. Several things will now appear less dark and mysterious than they did when they were transpiring. The people were to be left “perfectly free,” subject only to the Constitution. What the Constitution had to do with it, outsiders could not then see. Plainly enough now, it was an exactly fitted niche, for the Dred Scott decision to afterward come in, and declare the perfect free freedom of the people to be just no freedom at all. Why was the amendment, expressly declaring the right of the people, voted down? Plainly enough now: the adoption of it would have spoiled the niche for the Dred Scott decision. Why was the court decision held up? Why even a Senator’s individual opinion withheld, till after the presidential election? Plainly enough now – the speaking out then would have damaged the perfectly free argument upon which the election was to be carried. Why the outgoing President’s felicitation on the indorsement? Why the delay of a re-argument? Why the incoming President’s advance exhortation in favor of the decision? These things look like the cautious patting and petting of a spirited horse, preparatory to mounting him, when it is dreaded that he may give the rider a fall. And why the hasty after – indorsement of the decision by the President and others? (bold emphasis mine)

We cannot absolutely know that all these exact adaptations are the result of preconcert. But when we see a lot of framed timbers, different portions of which we know have been gotten out at different times and places, and by different workmen – StephenFranklinRoger, and James, for instance – and when we see these timbers joined together and see they exactly matte the frame of a house or a mill, all the tenons and mortices exactly fitting, and all the lengths and proportions of the different pieces exactly adapted to their respective places, and not a piece. too many or too few, – not omitting even scaffolding – or, if a single piece be lacking, we see the place in the frame exactly fitted and prepared yet to bring such piece in – in such a case we find it impossible not to believe that Stephen and Franklin and Roger and James all understood one another from the beginning and all worked upon a common plan or draft drawn up before the first blow was struck.

It should not be overlooked that, by the Nebraska Bill, the people of a State, as well as a Territory, were to be left “perfectly free,” “subject only to the Constitution.” Why mention a State? They were legislating for Territories, and not for or about States. Certainly the people of a State are and ought to be subject to the Constitution of the United States; but why is mention of this lugged into this merely Territorial lawWhy are the people of a Territory and the people of a State therein lumped together, and their relation to the Constitution therein treated as being precisely the same? While the opinion of the court, by Chief-Justice Taney, in the Dred Scott case and the separate opinions of all the concurring judges, expressly declare that the Constitution of the United States neither permits Congress nor a Territorial legislature to exclude slavery from any United States Territory, they all omit to declare whether or not the same Constitution permits a State, or the people of a State, to exclude it. Possibly this is a mere omission; but who can be quite sure, if McLean or Curtis had sought to get into the opinion a declaration of unlimited power in the people of a State to exclude slavery from their limits, just as Chase and Mace sought to get such declaration, in behalf of the people of a Territory, into the Nebraska Bill-I ask, who can be quite sure that it would not have been voted down in the one case as it had been in the other? The nearest approach to the point of declaring the power of a State over slavery is made by Judge Nelson. He approaches it more than once, using the precise idea, and almost the language, too, of the Nebraska Act. On one occasion, his exact language is, “except in cases where the power is restrained by the Constitution of the United States the law of the State is supreme over the subject of slavery within its jurisdiction.” In what cases the power of the States is so restrained by the United States Constitution is left an open question, precisely as the same question, as to the restraint on the power of the Territories, was left open in the Nebraska Act Put this and that together, and we have another nice little niche which we may ere long see filled with another Supreme Court decisions declaring that the Constitution of the United States does not permit a State to exclude slavery from its limits. And this may especially be expected if the doctrine of “care not wether slavery be voted down or voted up,” shall gain upon he public mind sufficiently to give promise that such a decision an be maintained when made.

There are other Presidents who have attempted to warn us but are not included here because of space.

We should be able to agree that except in cases where the power is restrained by the Constitution of the United States, the law of the State is supreme over the subject of anything within its jurisdiction.

And here we go again using the term ‘jurisdiction’ – “except in cases where the power is restrained by the Constitution of the United States, the law of the State is supreme over the subject of slavery within its jurisdiction.” This is true because a judge declared it several times, and those court cases, as far as I understand, have never been overturned, making the actions of  StephenFranklinRoger, and James acting together to cause the American Civil War. Do you believe they were the only ones to want the war?  And what was the reason – Control of the Money the people were required to use to survive!

Please remember if someone does something that is unconstitutional, it stands until challenged. This is the reason for the Constructive Notice covered later.

The major event in 1886 during our Civil War which is well-documented where ‘citizens’ separated themselves from the parent state – Black’s Law Dictionary, SEVENTH EDITION page 703 – De facto government:

1. A government that has taken over the regular government and exercises sovereignty over a nation.

2. An independent government established and exercised by a group of a country’s inhabitants who have separated themselves from the parent state.

During this time period, some of the lawfully-elected state officials were removed from office and replaced by the U.S. Government, another unconstitutional act. Then these separated citizens made new state constitutions, creating a new de facto government within the Lawful state governments, which was another unconstitutional act. These new governments started using Roman Civil Codes to control everyone as subjects, not sovereigns. From early on, the definitions of terms were being changed to deceive the People which was another unconstitutional act. Following is just one example of changing the definition of the term ‘PERSON’:

PERSON. This word is applied to men, women and children, who are called natural persons. In law, man and person are not exactly-synonymous terms. Any human being is a man, whether he be a member of society or not, whatever may be the rank he holds, or whatever may be his age, sex, &c. A person is a man considered according to the rank he holds in society, with all the rights to which the place he holds entitles him, and the duties which it imposes. 1 Bouv. Inst. n. 137.

2. It is also used to denote a corporation which is an artificial person. 1 Bl. Com. 123; 4 Bing. 669; C. 33 Eng. C. L R. 488; Wooddes. Lect. 116; Bac. Us. 57; 1 Mod. 164.

3. But when the word “Persons” is spoken of in legislative acts, natural persons will be intended, unless something appears in the context to show that it applies to artificial persons. 1 Scam. R. 178.

In the beginning in our country, it was only “PERSON. This word is applied to men, women and children, who are called “natural persons.” When the banklords found out how great things were for the Colonists before 1750, they had to stop them. Back in those days, most of the people knew that they were ‘Freemen’ and when the King of England fell under the control of the Banklords, Khazars, the King started doing things to the Colonists that were against their unalienable Rights as Freemen, causing our Revolutionary War with England.

See the “The unanimous Declaration of the thirteen united States of America,” which at some point in history was changed to the Declaration of Independence, which is a misnomer because it was not about Independence, but rather, a list of wrongs being done against the Colonists by the King. The unanimous Declaration lists the Law as being changed by the King doing away with ‘Common Law’.

This ‘unanimous Declaration of the thirteen united States of America’ by the Representatives of the united States of America, in General Congress, Assembled, appealing to the Supreme Judge of the world for the rectitude of our intentions, do, in the Name, and by Authority of the good People of these Colonies, solemnly publish and declare was their ‘Last Resort’ so therefore we have a LAST RESORT:

A court of last resort, is one which decides, definitely, without appeal or writ of error, or any other examination whatever, a suit or action, or some other matter, which has been submitted to its judgment, and over which it has jurisdiction.

2. The supreme court is a court of last resort in all matters which legally come before it; and whenever a court possesses the power to decide without appeal or other examination whatever, a subject matter submitted to it, it is a court of last resort; but this is not to be understood as preventing an examination into its jurisdiction, or excess of authority, for then the judgment of a superior does not try and decide so much whether the point decided has been so done according to law, as to try the authority of the inferior court.

But without ‘Common Law,’ this and any other Court of Law will never do one thing to restore the Lawful State Governments. Our Last Resort is to make it public, just as the Founding Fathers did with their ‘Declaration’ of wrongs being done by the King. Because WE are the Kings collectively, we have to use a ‘Constructive Notice’ under Common Law to notice the people who work for the people as our agents or servants.  The following is a sample of the first paragraph:

The United States of America is a republican form of government (Art. IV, Sec. 4, of the constitution of the United States) with a Presbytery type of representation thus constituting a Democratic commonwealth, not a democracy.  That all power is vested in, and derived from the people.  The people are the principal and the people who work for the people are the agents or servants of the people.  You are either one of the people with unalienable or natural rights secured by the Constitution of the United States and all lawful amendments to the Constitution of the United States and the state in which you inhabit which are protected by the common law or you are a public servant bound by Oath or Affirmation to support this Constitution of the United States (Art. VI, sec, 3 of the constitution of the United States) and the constitution of the State in which you work.  If you are not one of these two, then you are a foreign individual and/or state involved in espionage and/or terrorist activities against the people of the United States of America.  Servants of the people are under Constitutional restrictions to their duties as outlined in the Constitution of the United States and in the constitution of the State in which they work, and in the statutes of that state.  Any servant with knowledge and with willful intent operating outside the Constitutional and statutory restrictions placed upon them is a violation of their oath.  This will be an attack on the people for whom you serve.  If the action is done willingly and with intent then it is an act of treason and may be considered an act of war.  The damaged individual may seek monetary damages and criminal prosecution.

We cannot use any part of the “The unanimous Declaration of the thirteen united States of America,” because, unlike the Colonies, WE are not part of the current ‘government de facto’. The current de facto government is not the People’s government, and WE do not have the right under their laws to change their laws. WE collectively or individually do have the Right under Common Law to separate from them because of their acts of Sedition. WE do have the power to restore the lawful De jure state governments by using their first Constitutions with Section. 4 of Article IV of the Constitution for the United States of America:

The United States shall guarantee to every State in this Union a Republican Form of Government, and shall protect each of them against Invasion; and on Application of the Legislature, or of the Executive (when the Legislature cannot be convened), against domestic Violence.

This guarantee’s to every State in this Union a Republican Form of Government

The current fifty state government de facto are not instituted among Men, deriving their just powers from the consent of the governed as the Colonists were because under their government de facto WE are “person(s)” as defined in their ‘Roman Civil Codes’ titled U.S. Codes and not Freemen or Freewomen as sovereigns. You need to prove that you are not a person as defined this term U.S. Codes:

Please note the very important information in (a) “When used in this title” which means there could be other meanings – “When used in this title, where not otherwise distinctly expressed or manifestly incompatible with the intent thereof”. § 7701 (1) Person “The term “person” shall be construed to mean and include an individual, a trust, estate, partnership, association, company or corporation.

I do not believe we are corporations or any other terms, but if you create one of them, you may be required to act for them at some point in your life. The only term that I believe is not something WE create is an  “individual.” I located the Code’s definition in § 552 (a) (2), and the term “individual” means a citizen of the United States or an alien lawfully admitted for permanent residence;

Now compare the terminology used:

―When in the Course of human events it becomes necessary for one people to dissolve the political bands which have connected them with another and to assume among the powers of the earth, the separate and equal station to which the Laws of Nature and of Nature’s God entitle them, a decent respect to the opinions of mankind requires that they should declare the causes which impel them to the separation.‖

―We hold these truths to be self-evident, that all men are created equal, that they are endowed by their Creator with certain unalienable Rights, that among these are Life, Liberty and the pursuit of Happiness. — That to secure these rights, Governments are instituted among Men, deriving their just powers from the consent of the governed, — That whenever any Form of Government becomes destructive of these ends, it is the Right of the People to alter or to abolish it, and to institute new Government, laying its foundation on such principles and organizing its powers in such form, as to them shall seem most likely to effect their Safety and Happiness.‖

What you believe are our elected and appointed officials are really only “foreign individuals and/or states involved in espionage and/or terrorist activities against the people of the united States of America.”

Agents of a Foreign Government: A Bizarre Saga by Dan Meador (April 5, 2000):

There are no implementing regulations for section 7621 of the Internal Revenue Code, which authorizes the President to establish revenue districts. Consequently, there are no revenue districts in States of the Union. The Cooper article explained why. With enactment of the Internal Revenue Code of 1954, Federal income tax administration had for all practical purposes been turned over to the Bureau of Internal Revenue; Puerto Rico, which in 1953, via executive name change, had become the Internal Revenue Service.

That history of war with England and Common Law is nicely explained in the last paragraph:

In all the various revolutions, with their dark and dreary scenes of violence and bloodshed, through which England has passed, the people have clung to their ancient laws with a devotion almost superstitious. When our forefathers established governments in America they laid their foundations on the common law. And when difficulties grew up between them and the mother country, they acted as their English ancestors had always acted in their political troubles – interposed the common law as the shield against arbitrary power. When the United Colonies met in Congress, in 1774, they claimed the common law of England as a branch of those “indubitable rights and liberties to which the respective colonies are entitled.” And the common law, like a silent providence is still the preserver of our liberties.

Common Law is for ‘natural persons,’ while Roman Civil Law is actually Codes for ‘artificial persons’ or subjects of the state. The term ‘state’ means a government.

Are you, your spouse and children ‘natural persons’ inhabiting the soil, within a specified boundary, ordained and established by the sole and vested authority of the people, through their lawfully-elected representatives, creating a free and independent republic, one of the united States of America as that term was used in the “unanimous Declaration of the thirteen united States of America”? If you are, then you are a sovereign and you cannot lawfully change that fact, and no one else can change it either!

There is much more documentation about what happened to our ‘Republican Form of Government’ that is guaranteed to all ‘natural persons’ within the Union states –

The Khazars control the people by causing wars. Have you ever watched Norman Dodd’s dying testimony on ‘You tube’?

Henry Ford, Sr. stated that if we removed the power of money from the banklords, we would stop all wars.

A Time Line focusing on Taxes, Money and War

We cannot survive while being controlled by all the wars we have been duped into over the years. Have you read my web pages?!.html:

How Tyranny Came to America

“It was the old story: In order to learn, first I had to unlearn. Most of what I’d been taught and told about the Constitution was misguided or even false. And I’d never been told some of the most elementary things, which would have saved me a tremendous amount of confusion.” by Joe Sobran

Stan Jones running for Senate from Montana tells the Truth about Globalization, North American UNION, our new money the AMERICO and the NAFTA SUPER Hwy. Short Video Now removed!

My first webpage was about how inflation was controlling us so that most all of us would die broke and would not be able to pass on our wealth to our children. The bigger picture is that we went from 90% self-employed to employees of all those big corporations controlled by the Khazars. Alexander Hamilton lobbied for the first privately-owned federal bank. However, Thomas Jefferson opposed it writing:

“If the American people ever allow the banks to control the issuance of their currency, first by inflation and then by deflation, the banks and corporations that will grow up around them will deprive the people of all property, until their children will wake up homeless on the continent their fathers occupied.” What Jefferson said is coming true; it is being predicted that home values are going to lose 20% more by 2012. A record 2.82 million homes faced foreclosure in 2009. Will 2011 break 2010′s record-setting year for foreclosure filings in the U.S., with almost 2.9 million properties being forecloses on nationwide? It is predicted to be 20 million total home foreclosures by 2012. Even if you are not one of them, your home value will most likely be affected in a big way. Some have lost everything and others are looking at a 50% loss in value.

My second web page is about wars and the connection to the banklords causing wars because they wanted to control us by their money- A Time Line focusing on Taxes, Money and War.  It took the banklords over 200 years to totally control our money:

An audio explaining just how they are controlling all of us with their money but his solution will not work because the current governments are de facto, and we are no longer one of the People as in ‘We the People;’ therefore, we have no ‘Standing.’ Voting in their de facto elections will not change anything because they control the counting of the votes; see Hacking the Democracy video.

Is printing more paper money the answer to our economic woes?

A 20-second clip where Alan Greenspan states: WE CAN ALWAYS PRINT MORE MONEY – If you watch it and like it click on that you liked it. There is “No Chance of Default, US Can Print Money” as reported on CNBC. You have to understand that the U.S. is totally controlled by the banklords. It is their country, not ours. If it were our country, it would be our money and we could print more so the 2.9 million homeowners would not have lost their homes just in 2010. 

My third web page was about the Conspiracy JFK talked about in his speech – You Be The Judge & Jury. JFK didn’t explain the Conspiracy and I attempt to explain it here – The Conspiracy explained and documented!

Our plan is for all the money stolen by the Municipal Corporations controlled by the Khazars will be returned to the Lawful state government of Kansas. CAFR accounts explained here and Your State CAFR Is Just Like Oregon’s:

Oregon State agencies have $4.9 billion in combined ending fund balances, according to the 2008 Comprehensive Annual Financial Report released by the Governor’s Office. The state claims that of this amount, 71.5 percent is available for spending at the states discretion. In this clip, House Republican Leader Bruce Hanna (R-Roseburg) said the Legislature should utilize these cash-on-hand revenues before raising taxes on Oregonians and businesses.

We need your help in alerting the people!

“The world is a dangerous place to live; not because of the people who are evil, but because of the people who don’t do anything about it” —Albert Einstein

A 16-minute ‘youtube’ video explaining the Slave World known today as the System – U.S. Prison Population Tops 2 Million

The Internal Revenue Codes are for subjects, not sovereigns, but there may be exceptions.

“When you have eliminated the impossible, whatever remains, however improbable, must be the truth.” — Sir Arthur Conan Doyle

Only the truth will set us free, and with more people learning the truth, it will happen so that one day soon, we all will be able to say, “Thank God I’m free at last!”

“The individual is handicapped by living with the monstrous conspiracy known today as the System, all of their adult life and they will not realize that it really exists until they first listen to President John F. Kennedy’s audio posted on his Presidential Library website and then read the research about the subject.” ~ Steven Pattison

Audio from JFK library or Six minute clip

There are a thousand hacking at the branches of evil to one who is striking at the root.” – Henry David Thoreau, American author (1817-1862)

WE are completing JFK’s mission of alerting the American people and we need your help because the root is so enormous that it will take more than just one to dig it up and get it out of our country. All we would ask anyone to do is listen to JFK and alert others with the research about the subject.

You have to know if we don’t do something soon, we will have what Thomas Jefferson said a very long time ago:

“If the American people ever allow the banks to control the issuance of their currency, first by inflation and then by deflation, the banks and corporations that will grow up around them will deprive the people of all property, until their children will wake up homeless on the continent their fathers occupied.”

Albert Einstein developed theories on physics and statistical mechanics. Some of his research led to the development of the first U.S. atomic bomb.

We are only asking you to do what you can.

“Insanity: doing the same thing over and over again and expecting different results.” — Albert Einstein

Please do something different today! If you just forward this to one man or woman who wants to learn the truth and they email me or call, then it will be a step in the right direction for the Truth to be known by all! That is all that JFK wanted for the people for the people to be informed of the truth.

All rights reserved,

/S/ Steven Pattison, one of the People within the boundaries of Kansas, a state of the Union.

Contact:  (913) 461-1661

© 2011, The Post & Email. All rights reserved internationally, unless otherwise specified. To read more on our copyright restrictions, see our Copyright notice on the subheader of every page, along the left margin.





By: Jim R. Schwiesow

Recently eight duly elected and active Oregon and California county sheriffs’ addressed, in a public forum, federal and state intrusions upon the unalienable rights of their citizens and the unconstitutional (illegal) incursions of warrantless state and federal endeavors in their jurisdictions. By their testimony these fine sheriffs’ verbally documented the assault on sovereignty and the abridgment of individual rights by the despotic strives that they have personally witnessed.

Most disturbing was the fact that federal encroachments were aided and abetted by state politicians who were willing to bargain away state sovereignty and the exclusive right to local control in exchange for federal dollars; a disturbing development given that states ought to employ a barrier against unconstitutional federal trespass upon the personal liberties of their people.

If you became aware of this event, via the mass media, friendly reader you were indeed a rare exception as the particulars of the forum had all of the earmarks of being a closely guarded secret by a media that totally eschews any moral obligation to apprise the public of other than sensationally motivated, politically correct, or politically actuated and patronage-directed substance. It is a bread and butter issue with the media why waste precious air-time and tabloid space on trivial matters such as constitutional devastation when there are so many millions of dollars to be garnered through sensationalistic enterprise and by political and corporate patronage.


And eight sheriffs do not a consensus make. Think not that these eight ethically inclined and morally sound sheriffs are indicative of the profession of which they are a part, or that they are suggestive of the majority of their counterparts that are spread across the length and breadth of this nation; because they are not.

God bless their selfless souls, I would like to be able to shake their hands and convey to each of them personally my words of thanks and to express my admiration and respect for the courage that enabled them to make a stand in the face of federal and state tyranny.

These eight lonely souls – and the few others of their caliber across the nation – who direct the powers of the office of sheriff to an unremitting and persevering preservation and enforcement of the unalienable and inherent protections of the Constitution are distressingly rare.


The power of the Office of Sheriff does not emanate from self-possessed privilege, nor is it established by political requisite or based upon legislative agency; the power of the sheriff is of and by the people.

Sheriffs’ are the only boots on the ground law enforcement agents that derive their authority from the people and not by political prerogative or by bureaucratic appointment. One would think that they would value and want to preserve such a unique circumstance, but in all too many instances such is not the case. Many sheriffs are more than willing to sell their souls to the establishment and to sample – as indentured handmaidens – what they believe to be a more rewarding circumstance as subordinate buddies of the bureaucratic agencies of an increasingly reprehensible political system. In short they are not interested in a preserving the Constitution or in the rights of the people, but rather in developing a misguided sense of their own importance. That they have become lackeys’ of a perverse political system rather than servants of the people seems to have escaped their consciousness.


Since I am acutely aware of the drastic slippage of integrity on the part of sheriffs’ on the local level I will recount happenings in my own state of which I am enormously ashamed.

In Iowa sheriffs’ are presently charged with the responsibility of the issuing of concealed weapons permits. Until two years ago such issuance was done at the sole discretion of the sheriff. During the last couple of legislative sessions two measures were introduced; first to enable a “shall issue” controlled carry mandate that was passed in greatly abridged measure, and secondly to establish a “constitutional carry” (aka unrestricted carry) privilege pursuant to the second amendment of the Constitution.

The constitutional carry measure was torpedoed and destroyed by legislative Democrat progressives who hate guns and individual rights, by a media that loves Democrat progressives who hate guns, by Republicans who promised support and then cowardly reneged because they feared a media that loves Democrat progressives who hate guns, and by sheriffs’ who felt that to be required to recognize the second amendment rights of their constituents deprived them of power and authority.

By virtue of their position sheriffs’ are allowed concealed carry privileges, so why would they wish to deny the same constitutional right to Joe or Jill Citizen, other than assert a bullying authority over the citizens of their county.  Certainly their actions in this regard are no less destructive of individual freedom than the actions of the progressive dimwits who do hate guns, and their intentions are a good deal less honest.

The Iowa Sheriffs’ and Deputies’ Association lobbied intensely to maintain the status quo in regard to a discretionary issue of weapons permits. The members of that organization believed that they should have the right to arbitrarily deny such permits. Except for a handful of sheriffs’, who were wise heads and who weren’t going to let the association do their thinking for them, the vast majority of the sheriffs’ in the state adamantly opposed having to recognize the second amendment rights of the citizens within their counties. And dear reader such is the state of the Office of Sheriff in a great majority of the counties in the various states across the nation today, quite possibly in your own county.

Sadly, this propensity of sheriffs’ to ignore the oath – which they are required to make – to uphold the constitutions on both the state of federal level has become the norm rather than the exception. The Bill of Rights sets forth law that cannot be repealed or abridged by any power. This being the case one wonders at the audacity of state and local authorities – including sheriffs’ – who think that they have the power to negate the immutable laws set forth in the Constitution. If even one of these amendments falls, all will fall.

Indeed it is abundantly evident that the blatant and illegal circumvention of the second amendment has contributed to a serious weakening of the integrity of the entirety of the Bill of Rights. Currently we are witness to an ever increasing disdain and disregard – by the federal judiciary and the bureaucratic agencies of Homeland Security – for not only the second amendment, but also for the first, fourth, and fifth amendments’ as well.

It is a slippery slope that we tread when we allow federal, state, and local authorities to sidestep the constitutional laws that have made this country unique among nations.  Make no mistake about it the first ten amendments to the Constitution identified as the Bill of Rights are absolute and immutable laws; they are not optional, they are not conditional, and they are not negotiable. They are foundational in regard to the preservation of individual liberties and they are perpetual in nature.


Currently I am hearing that the sheriff is the last bastion between the people and the liberty-stealing machinations of a now corrupt and unconstitutional federal system, oh really!  It is my firm and fast opinion that in their present state of being the sheriffs’ offices in the nation are not defenders of constitutional freedoms, but rather have joined with the enemies in federal and state governments that rain tyranny upon the heads of the people.

If the sheriffs’ offices of this nation were to be filled with individuals such as Sheriff Joe Arpaio of Maricopa County, Arizona and the eight stalwart sheriffs’ from California and Oregon heretofore referred, the citizens of this nation would be in constitutionally capable hands, but such is not the case. It seems that a reliable indication of the high caliber of a sheriff is directly proportional to the number of ignorant socialist progressive enemies that the sheriff has attracted. This being the case it must be conceded that Sheriff Joe Arpaio is indeed a giant among sheriffs’. He is a template of what a sheriff ought to be. Truly the integrity of a man can be determined by the character of his enemies.


In 1976 the ninety-nine Iowa county sheriffs’ invited the state deputy sheriff’s association to amalgamate with that of the sheriffs’ under a new banner to be ever after referred to as the I.S.S.D.A. (Iowa State Sheriffs’ & Deputies’ Association) A short time later this marriage between the sheriffs’ and deputies’ helped to birth a new civil service law that was applicable to the totality of the deputy sheriffs’ throughout the state. Rather than draft an original approach to the new civil service law, statutes were copied and imported from the socialistic template of another state,  and thus began the slide in regard to the autonomy of individual Iowa county sheriffs’ in regard to the affairs of their office.

In short order county sheriffs’ lost what little was left of their local identity when this new socialistic endeavor between sheriffs’ and deputies’ brought forth another dim-witted and stupidly thought out program of change. The legislature – at the behest of the I.S.S.D.A – put into place a law requiring that all enforcement personnel of the sheriffs’ offices throughout the state be required to wear the same uniform, mark their patrol vehicles in an identical manner, and procure all accoutrements of attire and car markings via a state contract.

Thus when you drive through the State of Iowa and pass from county to county you will note a bevy of good little sheriff clones all turned out like peas in a pod. Heaven forbid that there might be any display of individuality; a communistic bent militates against such individualistic deportment.

So much for the heretofore enviable independent status of the county sheriff; most municipal police agencies would give their eye teeth for such self-governing status, and sheriffs’ bartered it away for no good reason. It is difficult to discern such profound stupidity.


The destruction of the agency of the sheriff was monumental. Civil Service, coupled with public employee unions, wrested from the individual sheriffs the authority to hire, fire, or discipline subordinate employees. Civil Service Commissions now have that authority. Applicants are screened, tested, interviewed, and selected by civilian service commission committees, which assemble the lists of candidates from which sheriffs’ must hire to fill vacancies or positions. Additionally it takes a near act of congress for a sheriff to be able to discipline or demote an uncontrollable or duty derelict subordinate. If after progressing successfully through a series of Civil Service hearings and maneuvers a sheriff is still not free to carry out his censor, dismissal, or demotion. He must then run the gauntlet of union grievance procedures that have the legislative blessings of the state. Such actions often take months and years and consume extraordinary amounts of taxpayer dollars.

Think not dear reader that the afore-described particulars are confined to any particular state; they are in fact a present pain in the behind in most of the states with provisions for the Office of Sheriff. One can almost understand why some sheriffs’ shirk their sworn responsibilities. Remember now, I said almost as there is never an excuse for a relinquishing of integrity or for a deliberate deviation from what is right and proper.

The sheriff’s office is too important to be handed over to a collection of nincompoops who in all probability would not make good dog catchers. And this is not to disparage dog catchers as many of these I believe would be a notch above quite a number of those who presently hold the Office of Sheriff.


To the sheriffs’ who read this column:  Those of you who are dedicated and conscientious constitutional sheriffs’ please ignore the forgoing in regard to worthless sheriffs’ and be aware of the pitfalls leading to destruction that I have heretofore enumerated; and for those of you who are coasting along as toadies of the system, get the hell out of the business and let a good sheriff take the reins.

And to you dear readers, hold your sheriff’s feet to the fire in regard to the enablement and protection of your liberties and constitutional perquisites. Throw out the bums and cronies and replace them with ethical God-fearing and constitutionally correct persons of unquestionable integrity.

Stand with honorable sheriffs’ against misguided and politically motivated legislative assaults upon their office. Do what is necessary to remove the office of sheriff from the political realm and the pernicious affliction of a forced inclusion in the unholy intrigues of the two national political parties. Remember that sheriffs’ represent the people and not the biased wishes and dictates of either of the national political parties. The office must be independent except as to the wishes of the people.

The sheriff is the principal peace officer in your county. Stand with the good and get rid of the bad. Make that a commitment and encourage your neighbors to do the same. You will never regret it.

God bless and God speed.

It’s Simply a Matter of Trust…








Barbara H, Peterson

We, as reporters and investigators, are subject to being attacked mercilessly from all sides when our findings incriminate the global elite shysters, and/or expose their agendas. From without and within, people that we thought we could trust turn out to not be who they seem to be.


So just how do you know who or what to believe? This is where critical thinking comes in.


Critical thinking is, in short, self-directed, self-disciplined, self-monitored, and self-corrective thinking. It presupposes assent to rigorous standards of excellence and mindful command of their use. It entails effective communication and problem solving abilities and a commitment to overcome our native egocentrism and sociocentrism.”


To think critically, is to subject yourself to the idea of change.


WE are creatures of habit. We get comfortable in our little safe dens of crystallized thinking processes that leads to morbidity and death due to chronic stagnation. We don’t like change. We don’t like anything that interrupts our slumber. And that is our downfall. Unless we change our own personal habits and thinking processes, we are doomed to follow that last lobotomized sheep into the black hole of anonymity and comfortable helplessness against the forces that are being set up against us to force us into compliance with unjust laws and corporate actions, as well as eliminate a good portion of us in a depopulation program that would make even that last remaining hair on grandpa’s head stand straight up in disbelief.


THEY are also creatures of habit. THEY are the ones pitted against us in this battle to get the truth out to as many people as possible. The good news is, if they can figure out our habits, we can figure out theirs.


I trust people to do what they do habitually. I trust that what a person has done umpteen times in the past, against all common sense or rationality, will be the exact same thing that person will do again and again and again….. unless he/she purposely decides to change. And the odds of that? Minimal, at best.


So how do you know if someone is using you and trying to subvert your message? Look to his/her past actions. Has he/she lied to you in the past? Is the information presented factual, with reputable sources? Is the information presented a mixture of half truths? Chances are, what was done in the past will be repeated over and over again. And last but definitely not least…. follow the money. Then crawl out of your slumber and change your thinking to reflect what you have found out. Do not cling to the false hope that this organization/person who has deceived you in the past on numerous occasions, lied to you, and hung you out to dry just for the fun of it, is going to somehow change. Most likely, it’s not going to happen. So who has to do the changing? YOU. Cut the ties, loose the bindings, and get the hell out of there, even if the majority says different. The majority is notoriously wrong most of the time.


Unless we are prepared to change in whatever direction our critical thinking leads us, we are doomed to repeat the same failed actions over and over and over again. And we become easy pickings. The quicker we learn to change and adapt to new information and/or circumstances, the more difficult it is for anyone to figure out just what our next step will be. It’s like ducking and dodging in boxing. It’s much harder to hit a moving target. Just ask Sugar Ray Leonard…


© 2011 Barbara H. Peterson


Ingo Bischoff on Why Land Cannot Be Owned and Why the Federal Reserve Was “Good Once and What Needs to Be Done to Take Back America




The Daily Bell is pleased to present an exclusive interview with Ingo Bischoff.

with Anthony Wile

Introduction: Ingo Bischoff is the president of the San Francisco School of Economics, a California non-profit corporation. He did his undergraduate work in Physics, Chemistry and Business Science and his graduate work in Economics. In his professional life, he was the CEO of a commercial printing and publishing company for 28 years. After his retirement from commercial business, he formed the San Francisco School of Economics in 2006. A previous interview with Mr. Bischoff can be seen here: Ingo Bischoff on Real Bills and Why They Are Not Inflationary.

Daily Bell: Thanks for sitting down with us again. We’re going to ask you questions based on a quantity of recent feedbacks you’ve posted here regarding the economic philosophy of your School and financial history generally. So if we bounce around a bit it is only because we’re trying to cover areas that you’ve focused on recently.

Ingo Bischoff: Thank you for the invitation. I am always pleased to answer your questions.

Daily Bell: Let’s jump right in. Can land ever be owned? If not, why not?

Ingo Bischoff: Let me first define what is meant by land. “Land” is all the natural universe except Man and wealth. “Land” is not only the earth, it is the oil and minerals in the ground, the air and the sea. Just as you cannot claim to “own” the air or the sea, so you cannot claim to own the earth. All you can do with them is to “use” them. I subscribe toJohn Locke‘s view of the origin of ownership rights. Locke believed that ownership of property is created by the application of labor. The application of labor on or to “land,” resulting in something which has exchange value, is termed “wealth.” It is human exertion, or the “labor” applied in the production of wealth, which determines ownership rights to wealth. Since “land” was not produced by labor there are no ownership rights in land which can vest.

Daily Bell: Why is a Georgist land tax a good idea?

Ingo Bischoff: By Georgist land tax, I believe you mean the “land value tax” advocated by Henry George. There is a difference. If “Land” is not “owned,” on what basis could you tax it? Land can only be used and therefore it only has a “use value” aka “land value.” It is this “land value” which Henry George advocates to tax. Why is it a good idea to tax land values?

The “use value” or “land value” of a particular piece of land is determined by the use to which surrounding lands are put. Anyone with right to use a certain piece of land cannot increase its value by adding improvements. The value of a piece of land only increases if improvements are added to the surrounding lands. “Land use” or “land value” must be distinguished between residential and business use. Residential use of land is for domiciliary purposes. The improvements upon residential land are “wealth” with ownership rights. The exclusive use of land upon which the improvements rest is guaranteed by a “fee simple.”

The improvements on “commercially used” land are “capital” to which ownership rights attach. Exclusive use of land for commercial purposes is also guaranteed by a “fee simple” title. The value of residentially used land increases rarely. Only the addition of commonly used improvements or services can increase the location value of residential lands. On the other hand, the value of commercially used land fluctuates by the importance a particular piece of land or mineral resource takes on as being a factor of production in the creation of wealth. The payment for the exclusive use of “land” based on the “location value” Henry George called a “land value tax.” The word “tax” indicates that the revenue is used to pay for the cost of government.

Daily Bell: Why are you confident that communities can wield taxes “for the greater good”?

Ingo Bischoff: “I don’t know that I would use the word “wield” to describe the collection of a “land value tax” by local taxing jurisdictionsbecause it leaves the impression that something is unjustly taken. Nothing could be further from the truth. The “land value tax” is based on the location value of a particular piece of land, which derived the value from community action. It is not based on the value of the improvements upon the “land.” Any improvements upon the land are “wealth” or “capital.” The “land value tax” for residential use of “land” is part of the living cost for which an individual pays with his “wages.” One can call it “rent.” On the other hand, the “land value tax” for commercial use of “land” is compensation for the use of “land” as a factor in the production of wealth. It is also called a “rent.” However, this rent is an expense and it must figure in the overall cost of production of “wealth” or in the provision of a service. What is so good about the “land value tax”?

The “land value tax” is the only tax which when applied does not diminish that which is being taxed. When I make this statement it is met often with utter incredulity. However, if you replace the word “tax” with the word “rent” the statement becomes clear. There exists a “value” in the use of a particular piece of land for which one is willing to pay a “rent” or such value does not exist. The “land value tax” itself cannot destroy or diminish the value of a location. When the word “rent” is used to make the point there is great objection because the word “rent” implies that one does not “own” the “land.” With this implication, we are back to your earlier question as to whether land can be owned.

The real question is not “ownership” of land. The question is whether “use” of land in perpetuity, to include inheritance rights, can be guaranteed. A “fee simple” title acquired with the registration of a piece of land gives that guarantee. The valuation of fee simple titled land by an elected county assessor is done for the purpose of calculating a “use tax” or “land value tax.”

I maintain that the founding fathers wanted a “land value tax” for the states, to be collected at the local community level, and wanted it to be the only tax to pay for the costs of government at all levels. Article IV, Section 4 of the U.S. Constitution guarantees every state a like form of government as the governments created by the constitutions of the original thirteen states. These governments were modeled on the Anglo-Saxon shire system. The Anglo-Saxon shires, headed by a sheriff, administered the use of land in pre-Norman England. Our counties can be compared to the old Anglo-Saxon shires. They are an administrative sub-division of the state. Each state in the Union is a sovereign entity, and it possesses “allodial” title over lands within clearly defined borders, except those lands held by the federal government. Allodial lands cannot be taxed by any other sovereign.

The state, being an allodial title holder, does NOT “own” the land. “Allodial” means that the state is obligated to protect the lands and the population within the defined borders, and that the state must insure the equitable use of allodial lands. The counties under states’ constitutions are the administrative agencies which register the use of land and issue “fee simple” titles. An elected county assessor values the lands under “fee simple” title based on rules of valuation established by the Association of County Assessors, as well as by other guidelines. The county assessor publishes the valuations subject to appeal. Some counties accept self-valuation for publication. The valuation list, as an official document, is furnished to towns and municipalities. The counties use valuations to calculate tax bills only for lands situated in unincorporated areas of a county. Before tax bills can be prepared to cover the costs of government the elected town or city councils must conduct public hearings to allow input to the budget.

Once a budget has been voted, it is divided by the total of the valuations within the taxing jurisdiction. The fraction obtained is called the mil rate. The mil rate, when multiplied by the individual valuation, results in the individual tax bill. If the land user does not want to pay this tax, he can sell his “fee simple” title. To arrive at the exact worth of a “fee simple” title, the annual tax is capitalized using the prevailing interest rate. The “land value tax” recognizes that improvements made and services provided with tax money benefit some locations more than others. The “land value tax” establishes the equitable use of land. Failure to collect the full land value tax for all “fee simple” titled lands leads to inequities and distortions in the economy. Through political influence, land speculators try to shift the “land value tax” away from commercially used lands to residential users. The efforts of the land speculators have been particularly successful in California with passage of Proposition 13.

Daily Bell: What is it about anarchy that rubs you the wrong way? How do you define anarchy and anarcho-capitalism?

Ingo Bischoff: Anarchy as a form of government means government without laws. Human beings must then survive in an environment for which they were not created by genetic evolution. I agree with the late Edward Keating, Professor of Law at Santa Clara University, that the instincts of humans, which are suitable for a nonviolent, herbivorous existence in an arboreal environment, are detrimental and stressful to the cultural adaptation required for existence in a terrestrial environment. Unless it is recognized and accepted that human instincts can get in the way of peaceful existence, and therefore humans act accordingly, laws are needed to curb the free exercise of human instinct. Anarchy in society will quickly stop production and commerce. Lines of communication will cease and private property cannot be protected. It is the advocacy of anarchy as a form of government which rubs me the wrong way.

By anarcho-capitalism I understand that personal and economic activities would be regulated by privately run law rather than through politics, and that victimless crimes would not be punished. I can easily sign up not to punish victimless crime. The 4,700 federal crimes on the books now should be reduced to the 20 federal crimes initially set out. Otherwise, laws should be established by political consensus and enforced at the community level. Laws should be passed only to curb the detrimental effects of the free exercise of human instincts. Except to follow the obligation to ensure the equitable administration of lands use, states should not involve themselves in the regulation of any economic activity, whatsoever.

Daily Bell: Why don’t you follow the Austrians? What do you hold against this kind of free-market thinking?

Ingo Bischoff: To the contrary, I agree with Carl Menger‘s marginal utility analysis as described in his 1871 published book Grundsaetze der Wirtschaftslehre. I accept Eugen von Boehm-Bawerk’s contention that the natural difference in value between present and future goods is the basis from which all interest takes its origin, as he describes it in his book Kapital und Kapitalzins, published in 1884. On the other hand, I agree with the time preference theory of Professor Antal Fekete‘s which maintains that a time premium also exists, and that it is incorporated in the price of a present good. Eugen von Boehm-Bawerk’s productivity theory claims that it is only the marginal productivity of capital which determines the rate of interest. As it regards the use of Real Bills, I take issue with the thinking of Ludwig von Mises who fails to recognize in his Human Action the difference between the rate of interest and the discount rate. While there is much with which I agree in “Austrian Economics” there are some things with which I disagree.

“Free-market” thinking, termed by Murray Rothbard as “Anarcho-capitalism,” argues for a society based on the voluntary trade of private property and services (including money, consumer goods, land and capital goods) in order to maximize individual liberty and prosperity.

To maximize individual liberty and prosperity, the “Free Market” distributes “wealth” by a system of arbitrage where the discovery of prices is based on marginal utility analysis, and in which “Money,” the commodity with constant or nearly constant marginal utility, is the standard of value against which the value of any other commodity or service is measured. To have a “Free Market” in “Money,” therefore, is a contradiction. Furthermore, a “Free Market” in “Land” is not possible, because only “wealth” can be distributed through a “Free Market” system. “Land” is not wealth, as I discussed earlier.

Daily Bell: OK, you have Austrian sympathies. What other economists do you admire?

Ingo Bischoff: While I was served up the writings of John Hicks, Franco Modigliani and Paul Samuelson in college, I did not agree with any of them. Neither do I agree with the monetarist theories of Milton Friedman. I believe in theAdam Smith ideals of “free markets” which are free of arbitrary and discriminatory intervention by government, and which use the “gold standard” as a hedge against depreciation and devaluation of the currency created under the Real Bills Doctrine. The Adam Smith type of “free market” provides “mobility” beyond national borders. Under its “gold standard” the public purse has to be held tight. The economic order which employs a currency created under the Real Bills Doctrine and the “gold standard” is the vision of the founding fathers for the system of public law, social customs and institutions that is known as “capitalism.”

The economists I admire most are Adam Smith of Scotland (1723 – 1790), Heinrich Rittershausen of Germany (1898 – 1984) and Antal Fekete of Budapest, Hungary.

Daily Bell: If every law is a price fix, transferring wealth from one group to another, then how can one pass “good” law or regulation? What makes them so?

Ingo Bischoff: I do not accept your premise that every law is a “price fix.” Wealth distributed by law or mandate is “Socialism.” I believe in the “free market” which distributes wealth through voluntary transactions. “Good” laws or regulations are those which curb the detrimental effects of unfettered exercise of basic human instincts which interfere with individual liberty and the economic activity of families or groups to survive and to procreate.

Daily Bell: Explain to us how Real Bills dominated the US economy before the 20th century and when they lost their applicability.

Ingo Bischoff: Real Bills or Bills of Exchange to finance the production of consumer items were first used by the Bank of Pennsylvania in the creation of the Pennsylvania Pound in the 1750s. Under the Real Bills “Doctrine,” a supplier delivers goods to a producer or merchant and draws a “Real Bill” payable in 90 days. If the producer or merchant accepts the goods, he signs the Real Bill obligating himself to pay the face amount within 90 days. Once the Real Bill is signed there is no recourse, not to the signer (producer or merchant) nor to the drawer (supplier). With the signature attached, a Real Bill then becomes a financial instrument which is immediately negotiable.

It is seldom understood that a Real Bill is not a “credit” instrument and that the connection between the drawee and the drawer of a Real Bill is not the same as that between a lender and a borrower. The drawer of a Real Bill is not a lender. He discounts the Real Bill. Discounting is not lending. It is the drawee who reacts to the changes in the discount rate. These changes are governed by the demand of the consumer for the product of the producer or merchant. A drawee has the unconditional privilege of prepaying his bill. A lender, on the other hand, wants interest for lending money, not a discount from the borrower.

Beginning with the 1750s, Real Bills with various face amounts and maturity dates were discounted by banks in North America. Banks created uniform, denominated bank notes against the value of Real Bills and put them into circulation. Under the Real Bills “Doctrine,” the value of the un-matured Real Bills in vaults must match the value of the bank notes in circulation. If Real Bills that have been paid upon maturity are not replaced with like value of newly discounted Real Bills, then the excess value of bank notes must be taken out of circulation.

It was failure by bankers to adhere to requirements under the Real Bills “Doctrine” and the provisions of their bank charters that repeatedly led banks into trouble. Bankers used “idle” bank notes to speculate in “real estate.” The lack of full “land value taxation” encouraged such speculation. While rogue acts by bankers were not immediately apparent in their detrimental effect, the distortions they created in markets and prices caused economies to retard or collapse in cycles of 18 to 20 years in length. The worst of such economic busts was the panic of 1907. Finally, the public put pressure on the US Congress to do something to change the behavior of the banks. The result was the Federal Reserve Act of 1913.

Daily Bell: You have praised Ben Franklin’s Philadelphia bank. Was its currency backed by gold? Is it true that this bank used only Real Bills against which to create its currency, the Pennsylvania Pound?

Ingo Bischoff: The Bank of Philadelphia discounted Real Bills against the payment of coin which circulated in North America. They were of British, French, Dutch and Spanish origin. The bank collected the discount to the face value upon maturity. The Pennsylvania Pound bank note did not promise redemption in monetary coin to support confidence in its value. Because of the lack of gold or silver mines in colonial America, there were no “colonial” coins. The coins in circulation were those of Britain or other sovereigns. The value of the Pennsylvania Pound was derived entirely from the reputation of the principals of the bank, of which Benjamin Franklin was one and George Clymer, as president of the bank, was another. Despite the lack of redemption promise, the impeccable and honest way in which the Bank of Philadelphia was run caused the value of the Pennsylvania Pound never to drop below the value of monetary coin. This remarkable fact was cited by Adam Smith in his book The Wealth of Nations, published in 1776.

I do not see a contradiction in my logic when I praise the Bank of Philadelphia for adhering to the Real Bills “Doctrine” without promising redemption in monetary coin. The Real Bills “Doctrine” only requires that the value of bank notes in circulation always match the value of un-matured Real Bills held by the bank. I am sure that in the case of the Bank of Pennsylvania this was the case at all times.

Only after the ratification of the US Constitution were states required to issue bank charters which qualified bank notes, if redeemable in gold and silver, to be used as legal tender in payment of debt.

Daily Bell: Explain to us why the Federal Reserve was “good” until its 1930s’ reinvention.

Ingo Bischoff: The Federal Reserve Act of 1913 (FRA) was legislation passed by the US Congress to put a hold to the repeated boom and bust cycles caused by improper bank behavior. While the big money center banks saw the legislation coming and did everything possible to gain control over the planned franchise of a national currency, the individual states were extremely protective of the rights and independence of their state chartered banks. Over the objection of the money center banks, the US Senate, comprised of US Senators selected by state legislators, insisted that the “Federal Reserve” as a national system be divided into 12 independent, regional Reserve Banks each with its own authority to create a uniform national currency for their region based on the value of “Bills of Exchange” and gold held by the region’s member banks. The issue of Federal Reserve Notes by a regional Reserve Bank differed from any other issue of Federal Reserve Notes only by the regional bank seal. The creation of the Federal Reserve Notes by regional banks was overseen by a Board of Directors selected by the US Congress.

The New York regional Reserve Bank, under the governorship of Benjamin Strong, started to violate the Federal Reserve Act in the 1920s by conducting Open Market Operations amounting to monetizing government debt. This was strictly prohibited by the original FRA. The violation by the FRBNY continued throughout the 1920s. It caused the Florida real estate bubble which burst in 1925 and the collapse of the stock market in 1929. By the early 1930s, banks were no longer able or willing to redeem Federal Reserve Notes for gold as promised.

Daily Bell: You have claimed that until the past few years and the advent of TARP that the Fed could NOT print unlimited dollars but had to get permission from the Treasury to print every dollar that it made. Where is the operative language that backs your assertion? Please quote it. (You stand athwart considerable free-market opinion that says otherwise – and that the Fed has been unconstrained for decades and has ALWAYS – virtually – printed as much money as it wanted.)

Ingo Bischoff: The expansion of the money supply under the “Federal Reserve” can be separated into three broad categories. The expansion of the money supply from 1914 until 1933 rested on the creation of redeemable Federal Reserve Notes against the value of discounted Real Bills. The amount of currency was directly related to Real Bills initiated as a result of consumer demand. This way, the money supply matched the demand for currency in the economy. The FRBNY illegally increased the money supply when it monetized government debt throughout the 1920s, causing the collapse of the redeemable Federal Reserve Note monetary system, which operated under the Real Bills Doctrine and which was established with the original Federal Reserve Act of 1913.

Executive Order #6102 issued in March of 1933, in which the US Congress concurred, nationalized domestic gold holdings. This act by President F. D. Roosevelt destroyed the Real Bills market and thereby banking under the Real Bills Doctrine. The Banking Act of 1935 abolished the independence of the regional Reserve Banks and their authority to create their own Federal Reserve Notes. The independent Reserve Banks became Federal Reserve District Banks under the direction and control of the newly created “Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System,” an “independent” government agency known generally as the “Fed” [See Federal Reserve Act, Section 10].

By inserting Paragraph (b) into Section 14 of the Federal Reserve Act through legislation in 1934 the US Congress authorized the conduct of Federal Open Market Operations, something which the FRBNY had been doing illegally throughout the 1920s. With the Banking Act of 1935, the Congress established a hybrid gold-and-managed-money standard which was known as an international bullion standard. The government fixed the price of gold at $35 of Federal Reserve Note currency per ounce at which it would buy all the gold offered, and it stood ready to sell gold at this price to the central banks of friendly countries. The brakes for currency creation were transferred from the hands of US citizens to those of foreign central banks. The money supply was determined by the Federal Open Market Committee and the expansion effected by the purchase of government bonds. Depending on reserve requirements, the system could expand the money supply; however, not nearly as much as appears on the surface when one considers that few borrowers would pay interest on money without intending to use the loan for some specific purpose.

Foreign central banks finally exercised the brakes on USD creation in 1971 when President Nixon was forced to suspend gold redemption for Federal Reserve Note currency presented by foreign banks. With the decision by Richard Nixon to suspend redemption, the last vestiges of the gold standard were gone. The value of the USD/FRN was underwritten by an agreement with the Saudis to quote crude oil in USD/FRN only. This elevated the irredeemable USD/FRN to the world reserve currency, a status which the USD/FRN still enjoys today and may do so for a while. As long as the United States can guarantee the unimpeded flow of oil from the Persian Gulf countries will trust the USD/FRN as reserve currency to pay for their oil purchases.

The expansion of the money supply after 1971 has relied heavily on the sale of US government securities. The “ear marks” entered into the annual budget by US Representatives to pay for projects in their districts result in budget deficits which then are monetized. The proceeds of the sale of government bonds are funneled by the Treasury into local economies where they create economic activity, bank deposits and demand for loans. Banks have initial credit authorization from the Federal Reserve against which they can extend loans. Subsequent authorization can only be obtained by submitting T-Bills as evidence that payment has been collected on outstanding loans. Until 2008, the predominant method of expanding the money supply was through insertion of Federal Reserve Notes received from selling US government debt, primarily to foreigners. The compound interest factor operating on the government debt for several decades took its toll on the value of the USD/FRN evidenced by the financial crisis which befell the US and the rest of the world in 2008. This created difficulties for the future sale of government securities, and the Federal Reserve had to resort to all out money creation by buying up worthless banks’ assets under TARP and by repurchasing government bonds with QE, which caused an uproar among foreign government holders of US Treasuries. That is where we are today in the way the money supply is expanded.

Daily Bell: How is it that the Fed has inflated the price of the dollar down to four or five cents if the Fed has not been steadily introducing price inflation into the economy?

Ingo Bischoff: The Fed has done exactly what you allege over a long period of time. However, if it had been doing so all along by merely printing “money out of thin air,” as it did with TARP or QEs, the USD/FRN would have “flamed out” long ago.

Daily Bell: Explain to those who might not understand it what constitutional amendments ought to be repealed and why.

Ingo Bischoff: The central banking system, installed with the Banking Act of 1935, could never have been foosted upon the American people without the existence of the 16th and 17th Amendments. These two amendments are 180 degrees opposed to the intent of the original US Constitution.

The violation of the original FRA by the FRBNY in the 1920s consisted of conducting Open Market Operations. It was made possible only by the existence of the 16th Amendment. The national income tax was the guaranteed revenue needed to service Treasury bonds. The national income tax alone made possible the illegal monetization of US debt in the 1920s. The US Senate, by then elected under the 17th Amendment, said nothing.

If you take the income tax away from the federal government and you send Senators to the US Senate who again are the representatives of the state governments, and who can be recalled by the state legislatures, power is going to shift from the federal government back to the states.

Daily Bell: Explain why you find Alexander Hamilton – the scourge of Jeffersonian agrarian freedoms – to be an honorable and patriotic individual.

Ingo Bischoff: Alexander Hamilton, though an Anglophile, nevertheless was an honorable and patriotic individual. Unlike Jefferson, who was suspicious of bank credits, Alexander Hamilton figured out that the might of the British military was largely based on British credit around the world. He explained to George Washington how the colonists could fight the British by ruining their credit and by establishing good credit around the world for the new North American States. It was Alexander Hamilton who insisted on honoring all promises of payment given during the fight for independence. Though many promises were sold by original holders for pennies of face value, particularly by soldiers, Hamilton insisted that they be honored at full face value even though political pressure was against him. He prevailed, and he thereby established a remarkably good credit record for the United States. It helped greatly in fighting the British in the War of 1812.

Daily Bell: Explain why you do not believe either Hamilton or JP Morgan were agents of European banking elites.

Ingo Bischoff: While Hamilton admired English institutions and had relationships with London bankers, he first and foremost looked out for the welfare of the United States. J. P. Morgan was sent by his father to study banking in Austria, Germany and England. As such, he considered himself of the banking profession, and he was mindful to cultivate relationships. However, as a banker in the United States, he was considered the undisputed leader in banking circles. He did much to keep the bickering banking interests in line for the good of the country.

Daily Bell: Explain, please, why you believe, along with J. P. Morgan, that only gold is money and silver is not.

Ingo Bischoff: Gold has been money for 3,000 years. Gold as currency became inefficient in the Middle Ages when financing for production had to compete with the need for gold in transacting commerce. That is when Real Bills started to emerge as the basis for the creation of currency. Only small amounts of gold were needed to clear Real Bills. However, paper currency was not readily accepted, and since the supply of silver to gold was fairly constant at the ratio of 1:15 for many decades, silver became the currency with which to transact commerce. In the end, gold won out to be the standard of value. Silver today is mostly an industrial commodity which derives its value from use as a commodity and not from use as money.

Daily Bell: Explain why you believe that historically most private money standards did not include both gold AND silver. We believe they did.

Ingo Bischoff: When you speak of “private money standards,” I assume you mean deposit receipts for gold and silver used as currency. I have no doubt that they circulated.

Daily Bell: Explain, please, why the 1920s Fed inflated so aggressively. You believe it was not a criminal act? Why wasn’t it? And what was the MOTIVE?

Ingo Bischoff: It wasn’t the “Fed” that inflated so aggressively in the 1920s. Remember, the “Fed” refers to the “Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System.” It only came into existence with the Banking Act of 1935. Governor Benjamin Strong of the regional Reserve Bank of New York must be held responsible for the violation of the Federal Reserve Act of 1913. Of course, he died in 1928, before the collapse of the stock market. His motivation was to monetize US government debt to help out the British Pound, which had lost value due to the drainage of gold reserves to pay for the costs of WW I. President Coolidge adamantly refused to agree to cancel payment due the United States from Britain for war materials supplied. When the US economy entered a slump in the early 1920s, Benjamin Strong seized the opportunity to monetize US debt, at the same time helping out his friend, Montegue Norman, the Exchequer of Great Britain. The monetization of US debt in the 1920s was clearly a criminal act, since the original legislation quite clearly prohibited the monetization of “Anticipation Bills.”

Daily Bell: What is a reasonable level of taxation? Is the IRS necessary?

Ingo Bischoff: There is no reasonable level of taxation. There is only a reasonable level of expenditure for government services. The US Constitution clearly prohibits the taxation of wages and wealth. This only leaves the taxation of land on an equitable basis which can only be done by collecting the full “land value tax,” which I described earlier. Strange as it may seem, the land value tax collected at the local community level can pay for the cost of government at all levels, to include the federal government. There is absolutely no need for an agency such as the IRS to exist.

Daily Bell: Why were the Fed enabling act and progressive taxation passed almost simultaneously?

Ingo Bischoff: The ratifications of the 16th Amendment and the 17th Amendment were supported by the money center banks in retaliation for the states’ opposition to hand them control over the Federal Reserve with the pending Federal Reserve Act. After the two amendments were ratified, the money center banks relented on holding up passage of the Federal Reserve Act. A similar situation occurs with the Occupy Wall Street movement calling for a “Robin Hood Tax” to help establish a “New World Order.”

Daily Bell: How did America and the world get into the fix that it is in?

Ingo Bischoff: America got into the fix entirely due to the excesses of central banking. Because of the compound interest function, the monetization of debt will always sooner or later lead to the destruction of a currency.

Daily Bell: Should America be interfering militarily all over the world?

Ingo Bischoff: America isn’t interfering all over the world. America interferes where it needs to insure that the flow of crude oil is controlled or otherwise not impeded. It is the value of OPEC oil, set by the Saudis and the American Oil Majors, which gives value to the USD/FRN. In other words, the US military guarantees the value of the USD/FRN.

Daily Bell: Is the Internet making a difference by introducing more freedom into the world?

Ingo Bischoff: Without a question, the Internet exposes the propaganda emanating from the Main Stream Media owned and operated by the monetary elite. The average individual can find out through the Internet about the dangers which are about to take him down. He does not have to depend on a compromised education establishment or a biased media to be informed about the dangers. Freedom depends on knowledge.

Daily Bell: Did the Gutenberg Press do the same thing?

Ingo Bischoff: It certainly did. It spread information to an extent not possible before the printed word was mass produced by use of the Gutenberg Press. It put a stop to the overreach and the tyranny of the Church in Rome, and it ushered in a brand new world order with the Protestant Reformation led by Martin Luther.

Daily Bell: Will the Internet fail ultimately and be controlled by the powers-that-be?

Ingo Bischoff: It’s too late for that. The genie is out of the bottle. Any attempt to muzzle the Internet now will cause those who attempt it to go down in flames.

Daily Bell: Explain, please, what you would do as President of the United States to fix the economy and the lamentable state of freedom that now exists.

Ingo Bischoff: First, I would urge the Congress to remove the “legal tender” protection given the Federal Reserve Note in the Coinage Act of 1982. This would allow banking again under the Real Bills “Doctrine” and enable a competing currency to appear. The credit unions could easily be the conduit for such currency creation. Real Bills and redeemable currency would create immediate employment opportunities in the private productive sector. Government employees would be encouraged to seek jobs which pay in redeemable currency, not irredeemable Federal Reserve Notes. Next, I would urge the Congress to propose an amendment to repeal the 17th Amendment. In case the Congress refuses, I would urge the states to request the Congress to call for an Article V convention. I believe that with the return of the states to the seat of power in the federal government, the repeal of the 16th Amendment is a given. As I mentioned earlier, with the 16th and 17th Amendments removed from the US Constitution, power will revert to the states. However, repeal of the amendments is difficult to realize, because there is formidable opposition by all sorts of special interests regardless of political party affiliation arrayed against it.

Daily Bell: Thanks for sitting down with us and answering the “tough” questions!

Ingo Bischoff: Thank you. It was a pleasure.


We’ve been the recipient of Ingo Bischoff’s posts for several years now and have interviewed him several times as well. We think this interview may clarify some previous issues and we thank him for providing his thoughts so generously.

No matter what else Ingo Bischoff is, he’s surely one of the nation’s (perhaps the world’s) most tenacious proponents of Real Bills. They remain a controversial topic, but he has steadily made his case for them and for a number of other views which some might consider idiosyncratic – not within either the Austrian free-market or Keynesian socialist paradigms.

Of course, we don’t agree with all Mr. Bischoff’s formulations; we’d place him in the ambit of a classical liberal, someone who sees a reasonable if limited role for government. We’ve become more philosophically attuned to anarcho-capitalism over time. Thus, we’ve discovered increasing areas of disagreement over the years.

Additionally, Mr. Bischoff either doesn’t know or doesn’t care to acknowledge that anarchy is merely the absence of government not a condition of social disorder or chaos. Ironically, as we can see today, government is just as likely at times to be the instigator of chaos as its remover.

In no particular order, we disagree with his opinions regarding the Federal Reserve (it was never any good, nor could it have been), J.P. Morgan and Alexander Hamilton (they were seemingly agents of European banking families in our view), Ben Franklin’s Philadelphia bank (it was ultimately an inflation machine) and even his theory of land (we think land can and ought to be “owned” if people wish to do so, and we don’t agree with the concept of forced-renting of land from the cooperative).

Those are just some of our areas of disagreement. Bottom line, we don’t much believe in “reasonable” government these days. We don’t think there’s likely any such thing. Government is made up of people who will pass laws over time that advantage themselves and their allies and paymasters. The only defense against government is the dissemination of REAL information about what’s going on at the top.

What’s real information? It starts with the idea that every law is a price fix and every price fix distorts the “real” economy by transferring wealth from those who made it those who didn’t and don’t really know how to apply it. The result is that that equity between individuals is INCREASED as wealth is dissipated.

The only trouble is that this sort of redistribution results in a “race to the bottom.” In the end (and we seem to verging on end times now) fewer and fewer people accumulate more wealth (those at the very top) while everyone else has been equalized into poverty. The net result is poverty and paralysis of the body politic.

And yet … there is hope, as well. We’re fortunate to live in a time when the Internet can provide us real insight into the way the world works. This sort of illumination has happened before, most recently with the Gutenberg Press, which spawned the Renaissance, the Reformation and ultimately the discovery and population of the “New World.”

Real history, so it seems to us today, is a struggle between elites who want to impose the maximum amount ofauthoritarianism that is possible and middle classes that resist to a greater or less extent, depending on the efficacy of the communication technology that is doing the informing.

Technology, in the modern era, is overtaken and co-opted by elites that promote their dominant social themes of authoritarian control. Then some new technology comes along to make people aware of their manipulation and they fight to be free-er again. It’s a cycle. We’re in the free-er part of the cycle now.

This paradigm does not seem to leave much room for “reasonable government.” In fact, we hope the middle classes, informed by the Internet, roll back the current Western Leviathan as broadly as possible. Why? Because then the elites will have more ground to make up once they begin to exercise significant control over the Internet. They’re not there yet – not by a long-shot – in our view, no matter what “doomsters and gloomsters” say.

Just to repeat … every law and every regulation fixes a price of some sort and redistributes wealth from those who earn to those who do not. Thus, the marketplace is a much more effective mechanism for regulating people’s behavior than “regulatory democracy” – which inevitably ends in totalitarianism.

We believe in the maximum amount of privatization for every part of the society, from private law to business, to money, to culture and religion. The state, we think, enforces its will via force and cannot do otherwise. Mr. Bischoff posits a much gentler approach to these issues than we do. Perhaps he is correct, though we think modern history is unfortunately showing us otherwise.


To be sure “Anarcho-capitalism” after what America has experienced, may seem preferable, but it is nothing but a surreptitious Trojan Horse filled with monopolistic capitalist, with the dominance of world commerce and governance on their minds. Government is regulation and the power to enforce it, the problem with government is how to control it, by keeping the regulators honest, and focused on freedom principals. However, America seems hell bent on remaining ignorant of these principals, and history. As for the so-called elite economist, nothing but gold and silver in your possession is going to preserve your wealth. Electronic transfer of debt just feeds the information gathers, and it is none of the governments business where or on what we spend our money. Checks issued from private credit unions is the best way of preserving our privacy, assuming we have laws to that affect. The more information the government collects the more they justify manipulating the people. A state owned bank, like North Dakota in each State could use credit unions as a means of conducting business, and international settlements can be done by physical shipment. Dito for intra State debts. Keep the government as far detached from currency as possible, as the only truth we can rely on is that human nature is depraved, and self centered, and the accumulation of vast sums of money equals the accumulation of power to control governments. I respect intelligence, creativity, hard work and risk, but money equals power and absolute power equals absolute corruption. If the pursuit of godliness equaled the greed for wealth, we would have a better world. Not perfect, but much better. I am convinced that America has come to the end of the experiment, and a new form of governance is justified. There are many forms of government, but so far, none has proven capable of resisting corruption. Government’s are like people, they start off with great ambition, but get old and full of disabilities. I am also convinced that a National government is not needed and states do have certain concerns that could be addressed by agreements, compact, contracts or what ever is needed to preserve our independence from leviathan governments. We all have the need for security and the opportunity to prosper; not a government that prevents it. Fifty individual sovereign States with ties to common concerns would suit me just fine, and slow the growth of corruption. If the south had won the civil war it would be a better world. The south had the good sense to be jealous of their independence, even from each other, and that is the best principal to foster a controllable government. You may not agree with me, but that too is what makes for the need of some kind of government, because you will have to kill me or change my mind with your successful example, before I will abandon my principals.



Dastych’s Weblog Home

The Bush family’s project hammer

By Deanna Spingola

 Hammering the USSR’s Economy

In 1989 President George H. W. Bush began the multi-billion dollar Project Hammer program using an investment strategy to bring about the economic destruction of the Soviet Union including the theft of the Soviet treasury, the destabilization of the ruble, funding a KGB coup against Gorbachev in August 1991 and the seizure of major energy and munitions industries in the Soviet Union. Those resources would subsequently be turned over to international bankers and corporations. On November 1, 2001, the second operative in the Bush regime, President George W. Bush, issued Executive Order 13233 on the basis of “national security” and concealed the records of past presidents, especially his father’s spurious activities during 1990 and 1991. Consequently, those records are no longer accessible to the public. [1] The Russian coup plot was discussed in June 1991 when Yeltsin visited with Bush in conjunction with his visit to the United States. On that same visit, Yeltsin met discreetly with Gerald Corrigan, the chairman of the New YorkFederal Reserve. [2]

Because of numerous Presidential Executive Orders, the ethically questionable Project Hammer was deemed legal. Of course, even Hitler’s acts were “lawful,” as he had manipulated the laws to accommodate his actions. Many of Reagan’s executive orders were actually authored by Vice President Bush or his legal associates, and it is possible that Project Hammer was created by Reagan’s CIA Director, William Casey, who had directed OSS operations through Alan Dulles in Europe during World War II. Prior to his OSS affiliation, Casey worked for the Board of Economic Warfare which allegedly targeted “Hitler’s economic jugular.” [3] Allen Dulles, brother of John Foster Dulles, was the Director of the CIA from 1953 to 1961. He was a senior partner at the Wall Street firm of Sullivan and Cromwell, which represented the Rockefeller Empire and other mammoth trusts, corporations and cartels.

Project Hammer was staffed with CIA operatives and others associated with the National Security apparatus. Covert channels were already in place as a result of other illegal Bush activities. Thus, it was a given (1) that the project would use secret, illegal funds for unapproved covert operations, and (2) that the American public and Congress would not be informed about the illegal actions perpetrated in foreign countries. The first objective was allegedly to crush Communism, a growing political philosophy and social movement that was initially funded by the usual group of international bankers who now supported their demise. To this end, the “Vulcans,” under George H. W. Bush, waged war against the Soviet Union. [4]

The Return of the Vulcans

In their reincarnation in the administration of George W. Bush, the Vulcans functioned as a supposedly benign group, led by Council of Foreign Relations (CFR) member Condoleezza Rice, who attempted to augment and compensate for the Bush’s lack of experience and education concerning foreign policy during his presidential campaign. Rice had been President George H. W. Bush’s Soviet and East European Affairs Advisor in the National Security Council during the Soviet Union’s dissolution and during the German reunification (July 1, 1990). The resurrected Vulcan group included Richard Armitage, Robert Blackwill, Stephen Hadley, Richard Perle, Rabbi Dov S. Zakheim, Robert Zoellick and Paul Wolfowitz. Other key campaign figures included Dick Cheney, George P. Shultz and Colin Powell, all influential but not actually a part of the Vulcan Group. All of these people, associated with the George H. W. Bush administration, returned to powerful, strategic positions in George W. Bush’s administration.

Richard Perle and Paul Wolfowitz have been accused of being agents for the Israeli government. Investigations by Congress and the FBI have substantiated those allegations. Zakheim and his family were heavily involved in Yeshivat Sha’alvim, an educational organization in which students are taught to render absolute commitment to the State of Israel. [5]

Many of these individuals were also members of the Project for a New American Century (PNAC) which was established in the spring of 1997 with the intention of promoting American Global leadership at any cost. The chairman and co-founder was William Kristol, son of Irving Kristol (CFR), considered the godfather of neo-conservatism which promotes the ideas of Max Shachtman and Leo Strauss, a noted Zionist and professor of political science at the University of Chicago. Kristol’s co-founder was Robert W. Kagan (CFR). Kristol is also the editor and co-founder, along with John Podhoretz, of the Weekly Standard Magazine, established September 17, 1995 and owned by Rupert Murdoch until August 2009. This “conservative” magazine is edited by William Kristol and Fred Barnes and promotes Middle East warfare and a huge military budget, a mentality that infects the most popular “conservative” talk show radio hosts. Kristol is a trustee for the Manhattan Institute which was founded by CIA Director William Casey and was staffed with former CIA officers.

The Vulcans had almost limitless financing from a cache known by several names — the Black Eagle Trust, the Marcos gold, Yamashita’s Gold, the Golden Lily Treasure, or the DurhamTrust. Japan, under Emperor Hirohito, appointed a brother, Prince Chichibu, to head Golden Lily, established in November 1937 before Japan’s infamous Rape of Nanking, to accompany and follow the military. The Golden Lily operation carried out massive plunder throughout Asia and included an army of jewelers, financial experts and smelters. [6] While the Nazis also engaged in plundering the countries they invaded, they were not as organized and methodical as the Japanese. After the Allied blockade, Golden Lily headquarters were moved from Singapore to Manila where 175 storage sites were built by slave laborers and POWs. Billions of dollars worth of gold and other plundered treasures were stockpiled in these underground caverns, some of which were discovered by the notorious Cold Warrior, Edward G. Lansdalewho directed the recovery of some of the vaults. Truman and subsequent presidents, without congressional knowledge, have used those resources to finance the CIA’s chaotic clandestine activities throughout the world. Much of the Middle East chaos is financed by those pillaged funds. A tiny portion of that treasure was the source of Ferdinand Marcos’ vast wealth. Marcos worked with the CIA for decades using Golden Lily funds to bribe nations to support the Vietnam War. In return, Marcos was allowed to sell over $1 trillion in gold through Australian brokers. [7]

In July 1944, the leaders of forty-four nations met at Bretton Woods, New Hampshire to plan the post-war economy and to discuss organizing a global political action fund which would use the Black Eagle Trust ostensibly to fight communism, bribe political leaders, enhance the treasuries of U.S. allies, and manipulate elections in foreign countries and other unconstitutional covert operations. Certainly, those politicos who managed the funds also received financial benefits. This trust was headed by Secretary of War Henry Stimson, assisted by John J. McCloy (later head of the World Bank) and Robert Lovett (later Secretary of Defense) and consultant Robert B. Anderson (later Secretary of the Treasury). [8] Anderson later operated the Commercial Exchange Bank of Anguilla in the British West Indies and was convicted of running illegal offshore banking operations and tax evasion. Investors lost about $4.4 million. Consequently, he was sent to prison for a token amount of time, one month. He was also under house arrest for five years. He could have received a ten-year sentence but Judge Palmieri considered Anderson’s “distinguished service” to the country in the “top levels of Government.” [9]

Between 1945 and 1947 huge quantities of gold and platinum were deposited in prominent banks throughout the world.


These deposits came to be known as the Black Eagle Trust. Swiss banks, because of their neutrality, were pivotal in maintaining these funds. These funds were allocated to fighting communism and paying bribes and fixing elections in places like Italy, Greece, and Japan. [10] Stimson and McCloy, both retired from government service, continued their involvement in the management of the Black Eagle Trust. Robert B. Anderson, who toured the treasure sites with Douglas MacArthur, set up the Black Eagle Trust and later became a member of Eisenhower’s cabinet. [11] In order to maintain secrecy about the Trust, Washington officials insisted that the Japanese did not plunder the countries they invaded. Japanese officials who wanted to divulge the facts were imprisoned or murdered in a way that made it look like suicide, a common CIA tactic. [12] The Germans paid reparations to thousands of victims while the Japanese paid next to nothing. Military leaders who opposed foreign policies that embraced exploitation of third world countries were suicided or died from mysterious causes, which includes individuals such as George S. Patton, Smedley D. Butlerand James V. Forrestal.

The Vulcan’s effort to crush Communism and end the Cold War was largely funded by that Japanese plunder.

The Vulcans were resurrected when George W. Bush was installed as president in 2000, facilitated by election maneuvers, probably lots of payoffs, and Jeb Bush’s purge of Florida voters. They conducted other illegal operations, like securities fraud and money laundering. This entailed murder and false imprisonment to prevent penitent participants from divulging the activities of the group. During the process of accomplishing the main objective of destroying the Soviet Union, the operatives made massive profits.

In September 1991, George H. W. Bushand Alan Greenspan, both Pilgrims Society members, financed $240 billionin illegal bonds to economically decimate the Soviet Union and bring Soviet oil and gas resources under the control of Western investors, backed by the Black Eagle Trust and supported later by Putinwho for the right price purged certain oligarchs.


The $240 billion in illegal bonds were apparently replaced with Treasury notes backed by U.S. taxpayers. [13] To conceal the clearance of $240 billion in securities, the Federal Reserve, within two months, increased the money supply to pre-9/11 numbers which resulted in the American taxpayer refinancing the $240 billion. [14]

The Takeover of Russia’s Oil Industry

BP Amoco became the largest foreign direct investor in Russia in 1997 when it paid a half-billion dollars to buy a 10 percent stake in the Russian oil conglomerate Sidanko. Then in 1999, Tyumen Oil bought Sidanko’s prize unit, Chernogorneft which allegedly made BP Amoco’s investment worthless. Tyumen offered to cooperate with BP Amoco on the development of Chernogorneft but BP Amoco was not interested. [15] In October 1998, Halliburton Energy Services had entered into an agreement with Moscow-based Tyumen Oil Company (TNK). Their efforts were focused on the four western Siberia fields, the first one being the Samotlorskoye field. [16] TNK has proven oil reserves of 4.3 billion barrels and possibly as many as 6.1 billion barrels, with crude oil production and refining capabilities of 420,000 barrels/day and 230,000 barrels/day, respectively. TNK markets gasoline through 400 retail outlets. [17] In 2002 Halliburton and Sibneft, Russia’s fifth largest crude oil producer, signed an agreement. Sibneft will use Halliburton’s new technologies to improve well construction and processing while Halliburton directs all project management. [18]

Tyumenskaya Neftyanaya Kompaniya (Tyumen Oil Company) was established in 1995 by government decree. It is now TNK-BP, the leading Russian oil company and ranks among the top ten privately owned oil companies worldwide in terms of crude oil production. The company, formed in 2003, resulted from the merger of BP’s Russian oil and gas assets and the oil and gas assets of Alfa, Access/Renova group (AAR). BP and AAR each own fifty percent of TNK-BP. The shareholders of TNK-BP own almost fifty percent of Slavneft, a vertically integrated Russian oil company. [19] This transaction was the biggest in Russian corporate history and was managed by Vladimir Lechtman, the Moscow partner for Jones Day, a global law firm with thirty offices and 2,200 lawyers worldwide. TNK-BP, Russia’s second-largest oil company employs almost 100,000 people and operates in Samotlor. [20]

Putin was financially rewarded by the collaborators and was happy to purge some annoying industrialists who stood in the way.

Mikhail Khodorkovsky was the manager of Yukos, the company that he built into Russia’s second-largest oil company after acquiring it for $168 million when his Bank MENATEP, the first privately owned but notoriously corrupt bank since 1917 and wiped out in August 1998, purchased it through a controversial government privatization auction in 1995. MENATEP was named as a defendant in the Avisma lawsuit which was filed on August 19, 1999. [21] The bank may have facilitated the large-scale theft of Soviet Treasury funds before and following the USSR‘s collapse in 1991. [22] His company had borrowed hundreds of millions of dollars from western banks. [23] He was arrested on October 25, 2003 and sentenced in June 2005 to eight years on fraud and tax evasion charges. He was allegedly targeted as a political enemy by President Vladimir Putin who went after other big business owners who apparently made money by acquiring states assets. Yukos was sold piecemeal to pay off $28 billion in back tax charges. Yukos was seized and given to Rosneft. [24]

When Khodorkovsky was arrested, his secretive business arrangement with the Rothschild family was exposed as Jacob Rothschild assumed Khodorkovsky’s 26% control of Yukos while Khodorkovsky’s directorial seat on the Yukos board went to Edgar Ortiz, a former Halliburton vice president during Dick Cheney’s reign as CEO at Halliburton. Cheney, as President and CEO of Halliburton, automatically had an association with the State Oil Company of Azerbaijan Republic (SOCAR). [25] In November 1997, Dick Cheney, in anticipation of imminent events, had appointed Edgar Ortiz as president of Halliburton Energy Services, their global division. [26]

The Yukos Oil Company merged with the smaller Sibneft Oil Company on October 3, 2003 which created Russia’s largest oil and gas business and the world’s fourth-largest private oil company. [27] On May 11, 2007 Halliburton announced they had made an agreement with the Tyumen State Oil and Gas University to open a new employee-training center in Russia to grow their business in that country and in the surrounding region. They are currently training students from five countries, Kazakhstan, the Netherlands, Norway, Russia and the United Kingdom. [28] Halliburton was awarded a $33 million contract by TNK-BP to provide oil field services to develop the Ust-Vakh field in Western Siberia. [29]

September 11 — Black Op Cover-up

Three top securities brokers had offices in the World Trade Center, Cantor Fitzgerald, Euro Brokersand Garbon Inter Capital.

Flight 11 struck just under the floors where Cantor Fitzgerald was located. Cantor Fitzgerald, with possible connections to the U.S. Intelligence apparatus, was America‘s biggest securities broker and apparently the main target. Within minutes, an explosion in the North Tower’s vacant 23rd floor, right under the offices of the FBI and Garbon Inter Capital on the 25th floor caused a huge fire from the 22nd through the 25th floors. At the same time, there was an explosion in the basement of the North Tower. [30]

A vault in the NorthTowerbasement held less than $1 billion in gold, much of which was reportedly moved before 9/11. However, the government had hundreds of billions of dollars of securities which were summarily destroyed.

The Federal Reserve, untouched by the crisis at its downtown offices (as they had everything backed up to a remote location), assumed emergency powers that afternoon. The $240 billion in securities were electronically cleared. [31] Then, at 9:03, Flight 175 slammed into the 78th floor of the South Tower just below the 84th floor where Euro Brokers were located. [32] Brian Clark, the manager at Euro Brokers, heard numerous explosions, apparently unrelated to what he referred to as the oxygen-starved fire caused by the plane crash.

The September 11 attacks related to the financial improprieties during the preceding ten years which spurred at least nine federal investigations which were initiated in 1997-1998, about the same time that Osama bin Laden, after twenty years as a CIA asset, announced a fatwa against the U.S. The records of many of those investigations were held in the Buildings Six and Seven and on the 23rd floor of the North Tower. Those investigations were sure to reveal the Black Eagle Trust shenanigans. [33] Building Seven, not hit by a plane, collapsed at 5:20:33 p.m. but was vacated as early as 9:00 when evacuees claimed to see dead bodies and sporadic fires within the building.

By 2008 and even earlier the covert securities were worth trillions.

The securities used to decimate the Soviets and end the Cold War were stored in certain broker’s vaults in the World Trade Center where they were destroyed on September 11, 2001. They would have come due for settlement and clearing on September 12, 2001. [34] The federal agency investigating these bonds, the Office of Naval Intelligence was in the section of the Pentagon that was destroyed on September 11. Renovations at the Pentagon were due to be completed on September 16, 2001. However, the Office of Naval Intelligence (ONI), the entity that often monitors war games, was hurriedly moved. If they were monitoring the simultaneous war games that morning, they would have realized that the games were used as a distraction from the actual assault.

Whatever hit the Pentagon struck the NavyCommandCenterand the offices of the Chief of Naval Operations Intelligence Plot (CNO-IP). [35] There were 125 fatalities in the Pentagon; thirty-one percent of them were people who worked in the NavalCommandCenter, the location of the Office of Naval Intelligence. Thirty-nine of the forty people who worked in the Office of Naval Intelligence died. [36]

On September 10, 2001Rumsfeld announced that the Pentagon couldn’t account for $2.3 trillion,

”We are, as they say, tangled in our anchor chain. Our financial systems are decades old. According to some estimates, we cannot track $2.3 trillion in transactions. We cannot share information from floor to floor in this building because it’s stored on dozens of technological systems that are inaccessible or incompatible.” [37] It was forgotten the following morning. Accountants, bookkeepers and budget analysts who were in the section of the Pentagon being renovated met their unexpected deaths. The destruction of accounting facts and figures will prevent discovery of where that money went. I am quite certain someone knows where it is. Certainly this is not merely gross incompetence but private seizure of public funds. [38] At the time Rabbi Dov Zakheim was chief-financial officer for the Department of Defense. [39] In 1993, Zakheim worked for SPS International, part of System Planning Corporation, a defense contractor. His firm’s subsidiary, Tridata Corporation directed the investigation of the first “terrorist” attack on the World Trade Center in 1993. [40]

Certain National Security officials who had participated in the Cold War victory in 1991 thus comprised the collateral damage of the Cold War.


They, along with hundreds of innocent people were in the World Trade Center towers and the Pentagon. Their deaths were presumably required to conceal the existence of the Black Eagle Trust, along with the numerous illegal activities it had funded for over 50 years. This massive destruction, and the lost lives, constitutes a massive cover-up and continued lawlessness by the brotherhood of death, Skull and Bones, and their accomplices, the Enterprise. [41] The Enterprise was established in the 1980s as a covert fascist Cold Warriors faction working with other groups like Halliburton’s private security forces and the Moonies. Citibank is connected to the Enterprise, along with all the CIA front banks, Nugen Hand and BCCI.

Double Dipping

Alvin B. “Buzzy” Krongard was elected Chief Executive Officer of Alexander Brown and Sons in 1991 and Chairman of the Board in 1994. Bankers Trust purchased Alexander Brown and Sons in 1997 to form BT Alex Brown. Krongard relinquished his investments in Alex Brown to Banker’s Trust as part of the merger. He became Vice Chairman of Banker’s Trust where he personally interacted with wealthy clients who were intimately linked to drug money laundering. After a year of possible networking, Krongard joined (or as Michael Ruppert suggests, rejoined) the CIA in 1998 where his friend, Director George Tenet, concentrated his skills on private banking ventures within the elite moneyed community. Senate investigations verify that private banking firms frequently engage in money laundering from illicit drugs and corporate crime operations. [42] On January 28, 2000 the Reginald Howe and GATA Lawsuit was filed which accused certain U.S. bullion banks of illegally dumping U.S. Treasury gold on the market.

The lawsuit named Deutsche Bank Alex Brown, the U.S. Treasury, Alan Greenspan, the Federal Reserve, and Citibank, Chase, as defendants. Gerald Corrigan was accused of having private knowledge of the scheme. [43] Krongard became the Executive Director of the CIA, essentially the Chief Operating Officer, and the number three man on March 16, 2001. Krongard, while at the CIA, arranged for Blackwater’s Erik Prince to get his first contract with the U.S. government, and later joined its board.

Richard Wagner, a data retrieval expert, estimated that more than $100 million in illegal transactions appeared to have rushed through the WTC computers before and during the disaster on September 11, 2001.

A Deutsche Bank employee verified that approximately five minutes before the first plane hit the tower that the Deutsche Bank computer system in their WTC office was seized by an outside, unknown entity. Every single file was swiftly uploaded to an unidentified locality. This employee escaped from the building, but lost many of his friends. He knew, from his position in the company, that Alex Brown, the Deutsche Bank subsidiary participated in insider trading.

 Senator Carl Levin claimed that Alex Brown was just one of twenty prominent U.S.banks associated with money laundering. [44]

Andreas von Bülow, a Social Democratic Party member of the German parliament (1969-1994), was on the parliamentary committee on intelligence services, a group that has access to classified information. Von Bülow was also a member of the Schalck-Golodkowski investigation committee which investigates white-collar crime. He has estimated that inside trader profits surrounding 9/11 totaled approximately $15 billion.

Von Bülow told The Daily Telegraph “If what I say is right, the whole USgovernment should end up behind bars.”

Further, he said, “They have hidden behind a veil of secrecy and destroyed the evidence…they invented the story of 19 Muslims working within Osama bin Laden’s al Qaeda in order to hide the truth of their own covert operation.” He also said, “I’m convinced that the US apparatus must have played a role and my theory is backed up by the [Washington] government’s refusal to present any proof whatsoever of what happened.” [45]

On September 26, CBS reported that the amount was more than $100 million and that seven countries were investigating the irregular trades. Two newspapers, Reuters and the New York Times, and other mainstream media reported that the CIA regularly monitors extraordinary trades and economic irregularities to ascertain possible criminal activities or financial assaults.

In fact, the CIA uses specialized software, PROMIS, to scrutinize trades. [46]

Numerous researchers believe, with justification, that the transactions in the financial markets are indicative of foreknowledge of the events of 9/11, the attacks on the Twin Towers and the Pentagon. One of the trades, for $2.5 million, a pittance compared to the total, went unclaimed. Alex Brown, once managed by Krongard, was the firm that placed the put options on United Airlines stock.

President Bush awarded Krongard by appointing him as CIA Executive Director in 2004. [47]

Between September 6 and 7, 2001, the Chicago Board Options Exchange received purchases of 4,744 put options on United Airlines and only 396 call options. If 4,000 of those options were purchased by people with foreknowledge, they would have accrued about $5 million. On September 10, the Chicago exchange received 4,516 put options on American Airlines compared to 748 calls. The implications are that some insiders might profit by about $4 million. These two incidents were wholly irregular and at least six times higher than normal. [48]

Morgan Stanley Dean Witter & Company, who occupied floors 43-46, 56, 59-74 of the World Trade Center, Tower 2, saw 2,157 of its October $45 put options bought in the three trading days before Black Tuesday. This compares to an average of 27 contracts per day before September 6. Morgan Stanley’s share price fell from $48.90 to $42.50 in the aftermath of the attacks. Assuming that 2,000 of these options contracts were bought based upon knowledge of the approaching attacks, their purchasers could have profited by at least $1.2 million.

The U.S.government never again mentioned the trade irregularities after October 12, 2001. [49] Catastrophic events serve two purposes for the top criminal element in society — the perpetrators seize resources while their legislative accomplices impose burdensome restrictions on the citizens to make them more submissive and silent.


[1]  Collateral Damage: U.S. Covert Operations and the Terrorist Attacks on September 11, 2001 by E.P. Heidner, pp. 4-5

[2]  Ibid, p. 20

[3]  Ibid, pp. 4-5

[4]  Ibid

[5]  September 11 Commission Report by E. P. Heidner, 2008, p. 108

[6]  Gold Warriors, America’s Secret Recovery of Yamashita’s Gold by Sterling and Peggy Seagrave, Verso Publishing, 2003, pp. 32-43

[7]  Ibid, pp. 318

[8]  Ibid, pp. 14-15

[9]  Ex-Treasury Chief Gets 1-Month Term in Bank Fraud Case by Frank J. Prial, New York Times, June 28, 1987

[10]  Gold Warriors, America’s Secret Recovery of Yamashita’s Gold by Sterling and Peggy Seagrave, Verso Publishing, 2003, p. 5

[11]  Ibid, p. 98

[12]  Ibid, p. 102

[13]  Collateral Damage: U.S. Covert Operations and the Terrorist Attacks on September 11, 2001 by E.P. Heidner, pp. 4-6

[14]  Ibid, p. 29

[15]  Tyumen Oil of Russia Seeks Links to Old Foes After Winning Fight By Neela Banerjee, New York Times, December 2, 1999

[16]  Halliburton Energy Services Enters Into Alliance Agreement With Tyumen Oil Company, Press Release, October 15, 1998,

[17]  Ibid

[18]  Halliburton Press Release, Halliburton And Russian Oil Company Sibneft Sign Framework Agreement, February 7, 2002,

[19]  TNK-BP, Our company,

[20]  Russia’s largest field is far from depleted By Jerome R. Corsi, Word Net Daily, November 04, 2005,

[21]  Collateral Damage: U.S. Covert Operations and the Terrorist Attacks on September 11, 2001 by E.P. Heidner, p. 28

[22]  Mikhail B. Khodorkovsky, Source Watch,

[23]  Russia’s Ruling Robbers by Mark Ames, Consortium News, March 11, 1999,

[24]  “Sovest” Group Campaign for Granting Political Prisoner Status to Mikhail Khodorkovsky, February 7, 2008

[25]  Halliburton Man to Sub for Khodorkovsky, Simon Ostrovsky, Moscow Times, April 30, 2004 as noted in the September 11 Commission Report, p. 233; See also Arrested Oil Tycoon Passed Shares to Banker, Washington Times, November 2, 2003

[26]  Halliburton Press Release, Ortiz Named President Of Halliburton Energy Services, November 19, 1997,

[27]  Russia: Yukos-Sibneft union forms world’s No. 4 oil producer, Global Finance, Jun 2003,

[28]  Halliburton Opens Russia Training Center, International Business Times, May 11, 2007,

[29]  Halliburton gets Russia work, Oil Daily, January 26, 2006,

[30]  Collateral Damage: U.S. Covert Operations and the Terrorist Attacks on September 11, 2001 by E.P. Heidner, p. 2

[31]  Ibid, p. 29

[32]  Ibid, pp. 2

[33]  Ibid, p. 28-29

[34]  “Sioux City, Iowa, July 25, 2005 , According to leaked documents from an intelligence file obtained through a military source in the Office of Naval Intelligence (ONI), on or about September 12, 1991 non-performing and unauthorized gold-backed debt instruments were used to purchase ten-year “Brady” bonds. The bonds in turn were illegally employed as collateral to borrow $240 billion — 120 in Japanese Yen and 120 in Deutsch Marks — exchanged for U.S. currency under false pretenses; or counterfeit and unlawful conversion of collateral against which an unlimited amount of money could be created in derivatives and debt instruments…” from Cash payoffs, bonds and murder linked to White House 9/11 finance, Tom Flocco,

[35]  Collateral Damage: U.S. Covert Operations and the Terrorist Attacks on September 11, 2001 by E.P. Heidner, p. 45

[36]  Ibid, p. 2

[37]  Rumsfeld’s comments were on the Department of defense web site but have been understandably removed,

[38]  The War On Waste Defense Department Cannot Account For 25% Of Funds — $2.3 Trillion,

[39]  September 11 Commission Report by E. P. Heidner, 2008, p. 108

[40]  Following Zakheim and Pentagon Trillions to Israel and 9-11By Jerry Mazza, July 31, 2006,

[41]  Collateral Damage: U.S. Covert Operations and the Terrorist Attacks on September 11, 2001 by E.P. Heidner, p. 6

[42]  Crossing the Rubicon, the Decline of the American Empire at the End of the Age of Oil by Michael C. Ruppert, New Society Publishers, Canada, 2004, p. 56

[43]  Collateral Damage: U.S. Covert Operations and the Terrorist Attacks on September 11, 2001 by E.P. Heidner, p. 28

[44]  Crossing the Rubicon, the Decline of the American Empire at the End of the Age of Oil by Michael C. Ruppert, New Society Publishers, Canada, 2004, pp. 243-247

[45]  USA staged 9/11 Attacks, German best-seller by Kate Connolly, National Post & London Telegraph, November 20, 2003

[46]  Crossing the Rubicon, the Decline of the American Empire at the End of the Age of Oil by Michael C. Ruppert, New Society Publishers, Canada, 2004, pp. 243-247

[47]  Ibid, pp. 243-247

[48]  Ibid, pp. 243-247

[49]  Ibid, pp. 243-247

© Deanna Spingola

Latest articles

February 8, 2010

The Bush family’s project hammer

January 28, 2010

Depopulation by government edict

May 30, 2009

Seizing power and property

February 21, 2009

Bailouts, stimulus packages or redistribution of assets? (Part Two of Two)

February 20, 2009

Bailouts, stimulus packages or redistribution of assets? (Part One of Two)

December 22, 2008

The power elite playbook, controlled conflict and staged incompetence (Part 20)

December 10, 2008

The power elite playbook, establishing precedents (Part 19)

November 30, 2008

The power elite playbook, corporate generals (Part 18)

November 22, 2008

The power elite playbook, fascism and false flags = war (Part 17)

November 15, 2008

The power elite playbook, Japan, land of Western industrialization (Part 16)

The Elite Plan for a New World Social Order


This article was first published in 
New Dawn Magazine

When the Industrial Revolution began in Britain, in the late 1700s, there was lots of money to be made by investing in factories and mills, by opening up new markets, and by gaining control of sources of raw materials. The folks who had the most money to invest, however, were not so much in Britain but more in Holland. Holland had been the leading Western power in the 1600s, and its bankers were the leading capitalists. In pursuit of profit, Dutch capital flowed to the British stock market, and thus the Dutch funded the rise of Britain, who subsequently eclipsed Holland both economically and geopolitically.

In this way British industrialism came to be dominated by wealthy investors, and capitalism became the dominant economic system. This led to a major social transformation. Britain had been essentially an aristocratic society, dominated by landholding families. As capitalism became dominant economically, capitalists became dominant politically. Tax structures and import-export policies were gradually changed to favour investors over landowners.

It was no longer economically viable to simply maintain an estate in the countryside: one needed to develop it, turn it to more productive use. Victorian dramas are filled with stories of aristocratic families who fall on hard times, and are forced to sell off their properties. For dramatic purposes, this decline is typically attributed to a failure in some character, a weak eldest son perhaps. But in fact the decline of aristocracy was part of a larger social transformation brought on by the rise of capitalism.

The business of the capitalist is the management of capital, and this management is generally handled through the mediation of banks and brokerage houses. It should not be surprising that investment bankers came to occupy the top of the hierarchy of capitalist wealth and power. And in fact, there are a handful of banking families, including the Rothschilds and the Rockefellers, who have come to dominate economic and political affairs in the Western world.

Unlike aristocrats, capitalists are not tied to a place, or to the maintenance of a place. Capital is disloyal and mobile – it flows to where the most growth can be found, as it flowed from Holland to Britain, then from Britain to the USA, and most recently from everywhere to China. Just as a copper mine might be exploited and then abandoned, so under capitalism a whole nation can be exploited and then abandoned, as we see in the rusting industrial areas of America and Britain.

This detachment from place leads to a different kind of geopolitics under capitalism, as compared to aristocracy. A king goes to war when he sees an advantage to his nation in doing so. Historians can ‘explain’ the wars of pre-capitalist days, in terms of the aggrandisement of monarchs and nations.

A capitalist stirs up a war in order to make profits, and in fact our elite banking families have financed both sides of most military conflicts since at least World War 1. Hence historians have a hard time ‘explaining’ World War 1 in terms of national motivations and objectives.

In pre-capitalist days warfare was like chess, each side trying to win. Under capitalism warfare is more like a casino, where the players battle it out as long as they can get credit for more chips, and the real winner always turns out to be the house – the bankers who finance the war and decide who will be the last man standing. Not only are wars the most profitable of all capitalist ventures, but by choosing the winners, and managing the reconstruction, the elite banking families are able, over time, to tune the geopolitical configuration to suit their own interests.

Nations and populations are but pawns in their games. Millions die in wars, infrastructures are destroyed, and while the world mourns, the bankers are counting their winnings and making plans for their postwar reconstruction investments.

From their position of power, as the financiers of governments, the banking elite have over time perfected their methods of control. Staying always behind the scenes, they pull the strings controlling the media, the political parties, the intelligence agencies, the stock markets, and the offices of government. And perhaps their greatest lever of power is their control over currencies. By means of their central-bank scam, they engineer boom and bust cycles, and they print money from nothing and then loan it at interest to governments. The power of the elite banking gang (the ‘banksters’) is both absolute and subtle…

Some of the biggest men in the United States are afraid of something. They know there is a power somewhere, so organised, so subtle, so watchful, so interlocked, so complete, so pervasive that they had better not speak above their breath when they speak in condemnation of it. – President Woodrow Wilson


The End of Growth – Banksters vs. Capitalism

It was always inevitable, on a finite planet, that there would be a limit to economic growth. Industrialisation has enabled us to rush headlong toward that limit over the past two centuries. Production has become ever more efficient, markets have become ever more global, and finally the paradigm of perpetual growth has reached the point of diminishing returns.

Indeed, that point was actually reached by about 1970. Since then capital has not so much sought growth through increased production, but rather by extracting greater returns from relatively flat production levels. Hence globalisation, which moved production to low-waged areas, providing greater profit margins. Hence privatisation, which transfers revenue streams to investors that formerly went to national treasuries. Hence derivative and currency markets, which create the electronic illusion of economic growth, without actually producing anything in the real world.

For almost forty years, the capitalist system was kept going by these various mechanisms, none of which were productive in any real sense. And then in September 2008 this house of cards collapsed, all of a sudden, bringing the global financial system to its knees.

If one studies the collapse of civilisations, one learns that failure-to-adapt is fatal. Is our civilisation falling into that trap? We had two centuries of real growth, where the growth-dynamic of capitalism was in harmony with the reality of industrial growth. Then we had four decades of artificial growth – capitalism being sustained by a house of cards. And now, after the house of cards has collapsed, every effort is apparently being made to bring about ‘a recovery’ – of growth! It is very easy to get the impression that our civilisation is in the process of collapse, based on the failure-to-adapt principle.

Such an impression would be partly right and partly wrong. In order to understand the real situation we need to make a clear distinction between the capitalist elite and capitalism itself. Capitalism is an economic system driven by growth; the capitalist elite are the folks who have managed to gain control of the Western world while capitalism has operated over the past two centuries. The capitalist system is past its sell-by date, the bankster elite are well aware of that fact – and they are adapting.

Capitalism is a vehicle that helped bring the banksters to absolute power, but they have no more loyalty to that system than they have to place, or to anything or anyone. As mentioned earlier, they think on a global scale, with nations and populations as pawns. They define what money is and they issue it, just like the banker in a game of Monopoly. They can also make up a new game with a new kind of money. They have long outgrown any need to rely on any particular economic system in order to maintain their power. Capitalism was handy in an era of rapid growth. For an era of non-growth, a different game is being prepared.

Thus, capitalism was not allowed to die a natural death. Instead it was brought down by a controlled demolition. First it was put on a life-support system, as mentioned above, with globalisation, privatisation, currency markets, etc. Then it was injected with a euthanasia death-drug, in the form of real-estate bubbles and toxic derivatives. Finally, the Bank of International Settlements in Basel – the central bank of central banks – pulled the plug on the life-support system: they declared the ‘mark-to-market rule’, which made all the risk-holding banks instantly insolvent, although it took a while for this to become apparent. Every step in this process was carefully planned and managed by the central-banking clique.

The End of Sovereignty – Restoring the Ancien Régime

Just as the financial collapse was carefully managed, so was the post-collapse scenario, with its suicidal bailout programs. National budgets were already stretched; they certainly did not have reserves available to salvage the insolvent banks. Thus the bailout commitments amounted to nothing more than the taking on of astronomical new debts by governments. In order to service the bailout commitments, the money would need to be borrowed from the same financial system that was being bailed out!

It’s not that the banks were too big to fail, rather the banksters were too powerful to fail: they made politicians an offer they couldn’t refuse. In the USA, Congress was told that without bailouts there would be martial law the next morning. In Ireland, the Ministers were told there would be financial chaos and rioting in the streets. In fact, as Iceland demonstrated, the sensible way to deal with the insolvent banks was with an orderly process of receivership.

The effect of the coerced bailouts was to transfer insolvency from the banks to the national treasuries. Banking debts were transformed into sovereign debts and budget deficits. Now, quite predictably, it is the nations that are seeking bailouts, and those bailouts come with conditions attached. Instead of the banks going into receivership, the nations are going into receivership.

In his book, Confessions of an Economic Hit Man, John Perkins explains how the third world has been coerced over the past several decades – through pressure and trickery of various kinds – into perpetual debt bondage. By design, the debts can never be repaid. Instead, the debts must be periodically refinanced, and each round of refinancing buries the nation deeper in debt – and compels the nation to submit to even more drastic IMF diktats. With the orchestrated financial collapse, and the ‘too big to fail’ scam, the banksters have now crossed the Rubicon: the hit-man agenda is now operating here in the first world.

In the EU, the first round of nations to go down will be the so-called PIGS – Portugal, Ireland, Greece, and Spain. The fiction, that the PIGS can deal with the bailouts, is based on the assumption that the era of limitless growth will resume. As the banksters themselves know full well, that just isn’t going to happen. Eventually the PIGS will be forced to default, and then the rest of the EU will go down as well, all part of a controlled-demolition project.

When a nation succumbs to debt bondage, it ceases to be a sovereign nation, governed by some kind of internal political process. Instead it comes under the control of IMF diktats. As we have seen in the third world, and is happening now in Europe, these diktats are all about austerity and privatisation. Government functions are eliminated or privatised, and national assets are sold off. Little by little – again a controlled demolition – the nation state is dismantled. In the end, the primary functions left to government are police suppression of its own population, and the collection of taxes to be handed over to the banksters.

In fact, the dismantling of the nation state began long before the financial collapse of 2008. In the USA and Britain, it began in 1980, with Reagan and Thatcher. In Europe, it began in 1988, with the Maastricht Treaty. Globalisation accelerated the dismantling process, with the exporting of jobs and industry, privatisation programs, ‘free trade’ agreements, and the establishment of the regulation-busting World Trade Organisation (WTO). Events since 2008 have enabled the rapid acceleration of a process that was already well underway.

With the collapse, the bailouts, and the total failure to pursue any kind of effective recovery program, the signals are very clear: the system will be allowed to collapse totally, thus clearing the ground for a pre-architected ‘solution’. As the nation state is being dismantled, a new regime of global governance is being established to replace it. As we can see with the WTO, IMF, World Bank, and the other pieces of the embryonic world government, the new global system will make no pretensions about popular representation or democratic process. Rule will be by means of autocratic global bureaucracies, which will take their orders, directly or indirectly, from the bankster clique.

In his book, The Globalization of Poverty, Michel Chossudovsky explains how globalisation, and the actions of the IMF, created massive poverty throughout the third world over the past several decades. As we can see, with the dramatic emphasis on austerity following the collapse and bailouts, this poverty-creation project has now crossed the Rubicon. In this new world system there will be no prosperous middle class. Indeed, the new regime will very much resemble the old days of royalty and serfdom (the ancien régime). The banksters are the new royal family, with the whole world as their dominion. The technocrats who run the global bureaucracies, and the mandarins who pose as politicians in the residual nations, are the privileged upper class. The rest of us, the overwhelming majority, will find ourselves in the role of impoverished serfs – if we are lucky enough to be one of the survivors of the collapse process.

Today Americans would be outraged if UN troops entered Los Angeles to restore order; tomorrow they will be grateful. This is especially true if they were told there was an outside threat from beyond, whether real or promulgated, that threatened our very existence. It is then that all peoples of the world will plead with world leaders to deliver them from this evil. The one thing every man fears is the unknown. When presented with this scenario, individual rights will be willingly relinquished for the guarantee of their well being granted to them by their world government. – Henry Kissinger speaking at Evian, France, May 21, 1992 Bilderbergers meeting


The End of Liberty – The Global Police State

For the past four decades, since about 1970, we’ve been experiencing a regime-change process, from an old global system to a new global system. In the old system, first world nations were relatively democratic and prosperous, while the third world suffered under police state tyranny, mass poverty, and imperialism (exploitation by external powers). As discussed above, the transition process has been characterised by ‘crossing the Rubicon’ – the introduction of policies and practices into the first world, that were formerly limited, for the most part, to the third world.

Thus debt bondage to the IMF crossed the Rubicon, enabled by the collapse-bailout scam. In turn, mass poverty is crossing that same Rubicon, due to austerity measures imposed by the IMF, with its new bond-holding powers. Imperialism is also crossing the Rubicon, as the first world comes under the exploitative control of banksters and their bureaucracies, a power nexus that is external to all national identities. Unsurprisingly, police state tyranny is also crossing the Rubicon: the imposition of third world poverty levels requires third world methods of repression.

The anti-globalisation movement can be taken as the beginning of popular resistance to the process of regime change. Similarly, the police response to the Seattle anti-globalisation demonstrations, in November 1999, can be taken as the ‘crossing of the Rubicon’ for police state tyranny. The excessive and arbitrary violence of that response – including such things as holding people’s eyes open and spraying pepper into them – was unprecedented against non-violent demonstrators in a first world nation.

Ironically, that police response, particularly as it was so widely publicised, actually strengthened the anti-globalisation movement. As demonstrations grew in size and strength, the police response grew still more violent. A climax of sorts was reached in Genoa, in July 2001, when the levels of violence on both sides began to resemble almost a guerilla war.

In those days the anti-globalisation movement was dominating the international news pages, and opposition to globalisation was reaching massive proportions. The visible movement was only the tip of an anti-systemic iceberg. In a very real sense, general popular sentiment in the first world was beginning to take a radical turn. Movement leaders were now thinking in terms of an anti-capitalist movement. There was a political volatility in the air, a sense that, just maybe possibly, enlightened popular sentiment might succeed in shifting the course of events.

All of that changed on September 11, 2001, the day the towers came down. The anti-globalisation movement, along with globalisation itself, disappeared almost totally from public consciousness on that fateful day. Suddenly it was a whole new global scenario, a whole new media circus – with a new enemy, and a new kind of war, a war without end, a war against phantoms, a war against ‘terrorism’.

Earlier we saw how the orchestrated financial collapse of September 2008 enabled certain ongoing projects to be rapidly accelerated, such as the dismantlement of sovereignty, and the imposition of austerity. Similarly, the events of September 2001 enabled certain ongoing projects to be greatly accelerated, such as the abandonment of civil liberties and international law.

Before the towers had even come down, the ‘Patriot Act’ had already been drafted, proclaiming in no uncertain terms that the police state was here (in the USA) in force and here to stay – the Bill of Rights was null and void. Before long, similar ‘anti-terrorist’ legislation had been adopted throughout the first world. If any anti-systemic movement were to again raise its head in the first world (as it did, for example, recently in Greece), arbitrary police powers could be brought to bear – as much as might be necessary – to put the resistance down. No popular movement would be allowed to derail the banksters’ regime-change designs. The anti-globalisation movement had been shouting, ‘This is what real democracy looks like’. With 9/11, the banksters replied: ‘This is what real oppression looks like’.

The events of 9/11 led directly to the invasions of Iraq and Afghanistan, and in general helped create a climate where invasions of sovereign nations could be readily justified, with one excuse or another. International law was to be as thoroughly abandoned as was civil liberties. Just as all restraint was removed from domestic police interventions, so was all restraint being removed from geopolitical military interventions. Nothing was to stand in the way of the banksters’ regime-change agenda.

The technetronic era involves the gradual appearance of a more controlled society… dominated by an elite, unrestrained by traditional values… this elite would not hesitate to achieve its political ends by using the latest modern techniques for influencing public behaviour… Persisting social crisis, the emergence of a charismatic personality, and the exploitation of mass media to obtain public confidence would be the stepping-stones in the piecemeal transformation of the United States into a highly controlled society… In addition, it may be possible – and tempting – to exploit for strategic political purposes the fruits of research on the brain and on human behaviour. – Zbigniew Brzezinski, Between Two Ages: America’s Role in the Technetronic Era, 1970


The Post-Capitalist Era – New Myths for a New Culture

2012 might not be the exact year, but it’s difficult to see the endgame lasting much beyond that – and the masters of the universe love symbolism, as with 911 (both in Chile and in Manhattan), KLA 007, and others. 2012 is loaded with symbolism, eg. the Mayan Calendar, and the Internet is buzzing with various 2012-related prophecies, survival strategies, anticipated alien interventions, etc. And then there is the Hollywood film, 2012, which explicitly portrays the demise of most of humanity, and the pre-planned salvation of a select few. One never knows with Hollywood productions, what is escapist fantasy, and what is aimed at preparing the public mind symbolically for what is to come.

Whatever the exact date, all the threads will come together, geopolitically and domestically, and the world will change. It will be a new era, just as capitalism was a new era after aristocracy, and the Dark Ages followed the era of the Roman Empire. Each era has its own structure, its own economics, its own social forms, and its own mythology. These things must relate to one another coherently, and their nature follows from the fundamental power relationships and economic circumstances of the system.

Whenever there is a change of era, the previous era is always demonised in a new mythology. In the Garden of Eden story the serpent is demonised – a revered symbol in paganism, the predecessor to monotheism. With the rise of European nation states, the Catholic Church was demonised, and Protestantism introduced. When republics came along, the demonisation of monarchs was an important part of the process. In the post-2012 world, democracy and national sovereignty will be demonised. This will be very important, in getting people to accept arbitrary totalitarian rule…

In those terrible dark days, before the blessed unification of humanity, anarchy reigned in the world. One nation would attack another, no better than predators in the wild. Nations had no long-term coherence; voters would swing from one party to another, keeping governments always in transition and confusion. How did anyone ever think that masses of semi-educated people could govern themselves, and run a complex society? Democracy was an ill-conceived experiment that led only to corruption and chaotic governance. How lucky we are to be in this well-ordered world, where humanity has finally grown up, and those with the best expertise make the decisions for the whole globe.

Capitalism is about growth, progress, and change. Under capitalism the virtues of ambition, initiative, and competitiveness are praised, because those virtues serve the dynamics of capitalism. People are encouraged to always accumulate more, and never be satisfied with what they have. Under capitalism, people need to have a bit of liberty, and a bit of prosperity, so that the dynamics of capitalism can operate. Without some liberty, ambition cannot be pursued; without some prosperity, how could accumulation be pursued? In the post-capitalist world, the capitalist virtues will be demonised. This will be very important, in getting people to accept poverty and regimentation…

The pursuit of money is the root of all evil, and the capitalist system was inherently corrupt and wasteful. Anarchy reined in the marketplace, as corporations blindly pursued profit, with no concern for human needs or for the Earth. How much more sensible are our production brigades, producing only what is needed, and using only what is sustainable. Capitalism encouraged greed and consumption; people struggled to compete with one another, to ‘get ahead’ in the rat race. How much wiser we are now, to live within our ration quotas, and to accept our assigned duties, whatever they might be, in service to humanity.

In this regime change, ushering in the post-capitalist era, we’re seeing a conscious orchestration of economics, politics, geopolitics, and mythology – as one coordinated project. A whole new reality is being created, a whole new global culture. When it comes down to it, the ability to transform culture is the ultimate form of power. In only a single generation, a new culture becomes ‘the way things are’. And what, we might inquire, might stand in the way of any future manipulations of the cultural regime that the bankster royal family might contemplate?

Ever since public education was introduced, the state and the family have competed to control childhood conditioning – and it is in childhood that culture is transmitted to the next generation. In the micromanaged post-capitalist future, we’ll most likely see the ‘final solution’ of social control, which is for the state to monopolise child raising. This would eliminate from society the parent-child bond, and hence family-related bonds in general. No longer is there a concept of relatives, just fellow members of the hive. The family must be demonised. Already, here in Ireland, there are daily TV spots dramatising the plight of children who are being abused or neglected by their parents…

How scary were the old days, when unlicensed, untrained couples had total control over vulnerable children, behind closed doors, with whatever neuroses, addictions, or perversions the parents happened to possess. How did this vestige of patriarchal slavery, this safe-house den of child abuse, continue so long to exist, and not be recognised for what it was? How much better off we are now, with children being raised scientifically, by trained staff, where they are taught discipline and healthy values. 

The above article appeared in New Dawn No. 128 (September-October 2011).

RIchard K Moore, an expatriate from Silicon Valley, retired and moved to Ireland in 1994 to begin his ‘real work’ – trying to understand how the world works, and how we can make it better. Many years of researching and writing culminated in his widely acclaimed book Escaping the Matrix: How We the People Can Change the World (The Cyberjournal Project, 2005). His cyberjournal email list has been going since 1994 ( The book’s website is, while his website contains an extensive biography plus list of his articles. Richard can be contacted via email at This article appears in New Dawn



China Runs Out of Money


Wednesday, November 02, 2011 – by Staff Report

Companies’ cash is drying up, with dire consequences for their workers … Unpaid wages in China … Efforts to curb inflation in China are having some painful side-effects. A squeeze on bank lending has prompted some businesses short of cash to stop paying wages to blue-collar workers. Even the much-vaunted state sector is feeling the pinch. Work has all but ground to a halt on thousands of kilometres of railway track, and many of the network’s 6m construction workers have been complaining about not being paid for weeks or sometimes months. – Economist

Dominant Social Theme: One thing is for sure, the Chinese communists know how to run a capitalist economy and have done a helluva lot better job than Europe or America! Something about socialism really gives people the “smarts.”

Free-Market Analysis: The editors of the Economist “newspaper” – who never met a tin-pot dictatorship or dictator that they couldn’t find some way to praise – have apparently “hit a wall” when it comes to China. That great hope of capitalism (Communist China) is broke and heading for a hard landing.

After singing the praises of China and its vibrant “free market” for years, the Economist editors have now run smack into reality, giving rise to this squib of a story that indicates the ChiComs are hitting the proverbial brick wall when it comes to their hyperactive and impossibly stimulated economy.

We’re not supposed to understand this, of course. It’s an elite dominant social theme, after all, that the ChiComs’ murderous command-and-control economy has much to recommend it that the West’s anarchic and “free” economies (sarcasm off) do not. Here’s some more from the article:

Migrant workers from China’s vast countryside are usually the first to suffer when employers find themselves strapped for cash. In February a revision to the criminal law made it illegal for a company to withhold salary if it had the means to pay. This has done little to protect the more than 150m rural migrants who perform most of the country’s manual labour … The $600 billion stimulus launched in 2008 is all but spent. Indeed, the central government has urged state banks to cut back on lending in order to curb inflation, which in the year to July reached a three-year high of 6.5%, before dropping to 6.1% in September.

In recent weeks a credit crisis in the eastern city of Wenzhou has led to the flight of dozens of businessmen, leaving thousands of workers at private companies unpaid. State firms are little better off. After two record years of track-laying, the problems now facing the railway-building industry are severe. The government has had a change of heart about rapidly expanding the high-speed rail network following a fatal crash of two high-speed trains in July.

But bank credit drying up has also played a big part. China Daily, an English-language newspaper, says many of the industry’s migrant workers have not been paid for months. Complaints have been growing. A senior railway official quoted in the state media said workers at China Railway Engineering Corporation, one of the country biggest civil-engineering firms, had submitted more than 2,000 petitions to the authorities since July. Another newspaper, Economic Information Daily, said wage arrears and protests by rail workers had “alarmed” top leaders in Beijing. Only a third of railway construction projects were continuing normally, it said.

The power elite had evidently and obviously hoped to contrast China’s “vibrant” quasi-controlled economy (their description) to the West’s chaotic and uncontrolled one (their description). But China appears to be unraveling faster than expected. The Chinese central bank (state owned) doesn’t seem to managing that ole “soft landing” very well.

In fact, as we’ve been pointing out for several years now, there’s not going to be a Chinese soft landing. The rotting, empty Chinese cities and shoddy, tipsy skyscrapers, profligate and corrupt Chinese central bank, entrepreneurial flight (see yesterday’s article) and rising civil violence across the country (so bad it’s not being reported formally anymore) should be red flags (no pun intended) that explain what one needs to know.

The Chinese miracle is dead. It never existed anyway, anymore than the West’s late-20th century consumer mania was a product of Anglo-American “genius.” No, the story of modern directed history is the story of elite-controlled money stimulation and central banking largess. Control tens of trillions and you can control the world. And they have. Not just in the US but in China, too.

What is “real” in China? The current state of development? Or is it Money Power? The central bank, like Western central banks, has tens of trillions to float the pretense of the Chinese Miracle. Sure, the Chinese people constitute an ancient, wise and powerful culture. But you don’t develop an entire country in 30 years. Do you?

Not in our opinion. Not without central banking super money you don’t. But we are supposed to believe it anyway. Just as we are supposed to believe the big-brain central banking technocrats of the Chinese central banking authority can bring that large and populous country in for a “soft landing.” Whatever that means. Would the elites lie to us? Would they?

When the bust comes – and it is coming – all three legs of the stool will have been knocked away. America, Europe AND China will be no longer capable of firing the cylinders of the modern central banking economy. The world will sink into the deepest depression it has ever known. Chaos and worse will sweep across the world. And what then?

Conclusion: Are the elites waiting in the wings with their next fancy project? And what will it be called? World government?





Ending Taxation – “The Only Game in Town” 2011

The way our government can “and” should be. (Updated)

The documentary “The Fist Cut” was uploaded to YouTube on October 31st 2011 and is a video that is essential for viewing by every responsible American (1hr 12min). The “Final Cut” should be finished in 2012. (1hr 30) and released on DVD.

It can be viewed on the CAFR1 YouTube account but should “not” be copied and posted elsewhere other than by using the “embedded html code”




When watched you will realize this documentary must be viewed by as many Americans as possible and viewed by them as soon as possible. The big picture will come into clear view and then the course of action will be very clear also.

People in the business and financial community need to see this documentary. The “good” Guys and Gals running for public office also.

The copy uploaded to YouTube is a mid resolution file to play where stopping play to let load will not be that frequent if at all. If the play does stop, hit the “Pause” button on the player and let load for a while and then when the “Play” button is hit it should play uninterrupted. (the mid-size file was 392 megs)

Per regaining control of our government where “all” Americans truly benefit, what is brought forward in this documentary is not “a” solution, it is “the” solution going forward for centuries.

Please share the link for viewing with all that you know.

This documentary will fill in the biggest piece of the puzzle that has eluded the public, intentionally done so by a control structure out of self interest for over a 100-years. No longer will the population be left in the dark or be “the mark” for the controllers with the public release of this video and the comprehension learned through it.

If you have an email list for AARP, Financial Planers, Education Groups, News Services, Member Associations of Firemen – Police – Teachers – Military – Taxpayers, please send the link for all of them to view.

The more Americans that see this documentary the faster corrective action will com to play. So please help accomplish massive viewing of this documentary from Coast to Coast.

After viewing, please don’t forget to click “Like” and comment on the documentary. Additionally there is no reason that this video will not exceed five-million views worldwide in the next 30-days. Help make it happen!

Released FYI and for your community, State, and national action by,


Walter Burien –
P. O. Box 2112
Saint Johns, AZ 85936

Tel. (928) 458-5854

Any local government can be restructured to meet their annual budget needs “Without” taxes. TRF (Tax Retirement Funds) paying for every City, County, State’s annual budgetary needs! What is taxation? ANS: A revenue source. What is investment income and enterprise income? ANS: A revenue source. It s time to replace one revenue source with another. Taxation is not needed, TRF today and no taxation for tomorrow.

To automatically subscribe to CAFR1 NATIONAL posts –

To automatically unsubscribe to CAFR1 NATIONAL posts –